diff options
Diffstat (limited to '646-h/646-h.htm')
| -rw-r--r-- | 646-h/646-h.htm | 12062 |
1 files changed, 12062 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/646-h/646-h.htm b/646-h/646-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..61eb8a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/646-h/646-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,12062 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne</title> +<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> +<style type="text/css"> + +body { margin-left: 20%; + margin-right: 20%; + text-align: justify; } + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight: +normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 300%; + margin-top: 0.6em; + margin-bottom: 0.6em; + letter-spacing: 0.12em; + word-spacing: 0.2em; + text-indent: 0em;} +h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;} +h4 {font-size: 120%;} +h5 {font-size: 110%;} + +div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;} + +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;} + +p {text-indent: 1em; + margin-top: 0.25em; + margin-bottom: 0.25em; } + +p.letter {text-indent: 0%; + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em; } + +p.noindent {text-indent: 0% } + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +div.fig { display:block; + margin:0 auto; + text-align:center; + margin-top: 1em; + margin-bottom: 1em;} + +a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none} +a:hover {color:red} + + </style> +</head> +<body> + +<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Coral Island, by R. M. Ballantyne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and +most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions +whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms +of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online +at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you +are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the +country where you are located before using this eBook. +</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The Coral Island<br /> + a Tale of the Pacific Ocean</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: R. M. Ballantyne</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: September, 1996 [eBook #646]<br /> +[Most recently updated: September 27, 2021]</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> +<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: David Price</div> +<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND ***</div> + +<div class="fig" style="width:75%;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" style="width:100%;" alt="[Illustration]" /> +</div> + +<h1>The Coral Island:<br /> +A Tale of the Pacific Ocean</h1> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p0b.jpg"> +<img alt="A coral island" src="images/p0s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p style="text-align: center"><span class="smcap">by</span></p> +<p style="text-align: center">ROBERT MICHAEL BALLANTYNE,<br /> +<span class="smcap">author of</span> “<span +class="smcap">hudson’s bay</span>; <span +class="smcap">or</span>, <span class="smcap">every-day life in +the wilds of north america</span>;<br /> +”<span class="smcap">snow-flakes and sun-beams</span>; +<span class="smcap">or</span>, <span class="smcap">the young +fur-traders</span>;”<br /> +“<span class="smcap">ungava</span>: <span class="smcap">a +tale of the esquimaux</span>,” <span +class="smcap">etc.</span>, <span class="smcap">etc.</span></p> +<p style="text-align: center"><span class="smcap">with +illustrations by dalziel</span>.</p> +<p style="text-align: center">London:<br /> +THOMAS NELSON AND SONS, PATERNOSTER ROW.<br /> +<span class="smcap">edinburgh</span>; <span class="smcap">and new +york</span>.<br /> +1884.</p> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>Preface</h2> + +<p>I was a boy when I went through the wonderful adventures +herein set down. With the memory of my boyish feelings +strong upon me, I present my book specially to boys, in the +earnest hope that they may derive valuable information, much +pleasure, great profit, and unbounded amusement from its +pages.</p> + +<p>One word more. If there is any boy or man who loves to +be melancholy and morose, and who cannot enter with kindly +sympathy into the regions of fun, let me seriously advise him to +shut my book and put it away. It is not meant for him.</p> +<p style="text-align: right">RALPH ROVER</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The beginning—My early life and character—I thirst +for adventure in foreign lands and go to sea.</p> + +<p>Roving has always been, and still is, my ruling passion, the +joy of my heart, the very sunshine of my existence. In +childhood, in boyhood, and in man’s estate, I have been a +rover; not a mere rambler among the woody glens and upon the +hill-tops of my own native land, but an enthusiastic rover +throughout the length and breadth of the wide wide world.</p> + +<p>It was a wild, black night of howling storm, the night in +which I was born on the foaming bosom of the broad Atlantic +Ocean. My father was a sea-captain; my grandfather was a +sea-captain; my great-grandfather had been a marine. Nobody +could tell positively what occupation <i>his</i> father had +followed; but my dear mother used to assert that he had been a +midshipman, whose grandfather, on the mother’s side, had +been an admiral in the royal navy. At anyrate we knew that, +as far back as our family could be traced, it had been intimately +connected with the great watery waste. Indeed this was the +case on both sides of the house; for my mother always went to sea +with my father on his long voyages, and so spent the greater part +of her life upon the water.</p> + +<p>Thus it was, I suppose, that I came to inherit a roving +disposition. Soon after I was born, my father, being old, +retired from a seafaring life, purchased a small cottage in a +fishing village on the west coast of England, and settled down to +spend the evening of his life on the shores of that sea which had +for so many years been his home. It was not long after this +that I began to show the roving spirit that dwelt within +me. For some time past my infant legs had been gaining +strength, so that I came to be dissatisfied with rubbing the skin +off my chubby knees by walking on them, and made many attempts to +stand up and walk like a man; all of which attempts, however, +resulted in my sitting down violently and in sudden +surprise. One day I took advantage of my dear +mother’s absence to make another effort; and, to my joy, I +actually succeeded in reaching the doorstep, over which I tumbled +into a pool of muddy water that lay before my father’s +cottage door. Ah, how vividly I remember the horror of my +poor mother when she found me sweltering in the mud amongst a +group of cackling ducks, and the tenderness with which she +stripped off my dripping clothes and washed my dirty little +body! From this time forth my rambles became more frequent, +and, as I grew older, more distant, until at last I had wandered +far and near on the shore and in the woods around our humble +dwelling, and did not rest content until my father bound me +apprentice to a coasting vessel, and let me go to sea.</p> + +<p>For some years I was happy in visiting the sea-ports, and in +coasting along the shores of my native land. My Christian +name was Ralph, and my comrades added to this the name of Rover, +in consequence of the passion which I always evinced for +travelling. Rover was not my real name, but as I never +received any other I came at last to answer to it as naturally as +to my proper name; and, as it is not a bad one, I see no good +reason why I should not introduce myself to the reader as Ralph +Rover. My shipmates were kind, good-natured fellows, and +they and I got on very well together. They did, indeed, +very frequently make game of and banter me, but not unkindly; and +I overheard them sometimes saying that Ralph Rover was a +“queer, old-fashioned fellow.” This, I must +confess, surprised me much, and I pondered the saying long, but +could come at no satisfactory conclusion as to that wherein my +old-fashionedness lay. It is true I was a quiet lad, and +seldom spoke except when spoken to. Moreover, I never could +understand the jokes of my companions even when they were +explained to me: which dulness in apprehension occasioned me much +grief; however, I tried to make up for it by smiling and looking +pleased when I observed that they were laughing at some witticism +which I had failed to detect. I was also very fond of +inquiring into the nature of things and their causes, and often +fell into fits of abstraction while thus engaged in my +mind. But in all this I saw nothing that did not seem to be +exceedingly natural, and could by no means understand why my +comrades should call me “an old-fashioned +fellow.”</p> + +<p>Now, while engaged in the coasting trade, I fell in with many +seamen who had travelled to almost every quarter of the globe; +and I freely confess that my heart glowed ardently within me as +they recounted their wild adventures in foreign lands,—the +dreadful storms they had weathered, the appalling dangers they +had escaped, the wonderful creatures they had seen both on the +land and in the sea, and the interesting lands and strange people +they had visited. But of all the places of which they told +me, none captivated and charmed my imagination so much as the +Coral Islands of the Southern Seas. They told me of +thousands of beautiful fertile islands that had been formed by a +small creature called the coral insect, where summer reigned +nearly all the year round,—where the trees were laden with +a constant harvest of luxuriant fruit,—where the climate +was almost perpetually delightful,—yet where, strange to +say, men were wild, bloodthirsty savages, excepting in those +favoured isles to which the gospel of our Saviour had been +conveyed. These exciting accounts had so great an effect +upon my mind, that, when I reached the age of fifteen, I resolved +to make a voyage to the South Seas.</p> + +<p>I had no little difficulty at first in prevailing on my dear +parents to let me go; but when I urged on my father that he would +never have become a great captain had he remained in the coasting +trade, he saw the truth of what I said, and gave his +consent. My dear mother, seeing that my father had made up +his mind, no longer offered opposition to my wishes. +“But oh, Ralph,” she said, on the day I bade her +adieu, “come back soon to us, my dear boy, for we are +getting old now, Ralph, and may not have many years to +live.”</p> + +<p>I will not take up my reader’s time with a minute +account of all that occurred before I took my final leave of my +dear parents. Suffice it to say, that my father placed me +under the charge of an old mess-mate of his own, a merchant +captain, who was on the point of sailing to the South Seas in his +own ship, the Arrow. My mother gave me her blessing and a +small Bible; and her last request was, that I would never forget +to read a chapter every day, and say my prayers; which I +promised, with tears in my eyes, that I would certainly do.</p> + +<p>Soon afterwards I went on board the Arrow, which was a fine +large ship, and set sail for the islands of the Pacific +Ocean.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The departure—The sea—My companions—Some +account of the wonderful sights we saw on the great deep—A +dreadful storm and a frightful wreck.</p> + +<p>It was a bright, beautiful, warm day when our ship spread her +canvass to the breeze, and sailed for the regions of the +south. Oh, how my heart bounded with delight as I listened +to the merry chorus of the sailors, while they hauled at the +ropes and got in the anchor! The captain shouted—the +men ran to obey—the noble ship bent over to the breeze, and +the shore gradually faded from my view, while I stood looking on +with a kind of feeling that the whole was a delightful dream.</p> + +<p>The first thing that struck me as being different from +anything I had yet seen during my short career on the sea, was +the hoisting of the anchor on deck, and lashing it firmly down +with ropes, as if we had now bid adieu to the land for ever, and +would require its services no more.</p> + +<p>“There, lass,” cried a broad-shouldered jack-tar, +giving the fluke of the anchor a hearty slap with his hand after +the housing was completed—“there, lass, take a good +nap now, for we shan’t ask you to kiss the mud again for +many a long day to come!”</p> + +<p>And so it was. That anchor did not “kiss the +mud” for many long days afterwards; and when at last it +did, it was for the last time!</p> + +<p>There were a number of boys in the ship, but two of them were +my special favourites. Jack Martin was a tall, strapping, +broad-shouldered youth of eighteen, with a handsome, +good-humoured, firm face. He had had a good education, was +clever and hearty and lion-like in his actions, but mild and +quiet in disposition. Jack was a general favourite, and had +a peculiar fondness for me. My other companion was Peterkin +Gay. He was little, quick, funny, decidedly mischievous, +and about fourteen years old. But Peterkin’s mischief +was almost always harmless, else he could not have been so much +beloved as he was.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! youngster,” cried Jack Martin, giving me a +slap on the shoulder, the day I joined the ship, “come +below and I’ll show you your berth. You and I are to +be mess-mates, and I think we shall be good friends, for I like +the look o’ you.”</p> + +<p>Jack was right. He and I and Peterkin afterwards became +the best and stanchest friends that ever tossed together on the +stormy waves.</p> + +<p>I shall say little about the first part of our voyage. +We had the usual amount of rough weather and calm; also we saw +many strange fish rolling in the sea, and I was greatly delighted +one day by seeing a shoal of flying fish dart out of the water +and skim through the air about a foot above the surface. +They were pursued by dolphins, which feed on them, and one +flying-fish in its terror flew over the ship, struck on the +rigging, and fell upon the deck. Its wings were just fins +elongated, and we found that they could never fly far at a time, +and never mounted into the air like birds, but skimmed along the +surface of the sea. Jack and I had it for dinner, and found +it remarkably good.</p> + +<p>When we approached Cape Horn, at the southern extremity of +America, the weather became very cold and stormy, and the sailors +began to tell stories about the furious gales and the dangers of +that terrible cape.</p> + +<p>“Cape Horn,” said one, “is the most horrible +headland I ever doubled. I’ve sailed round it twice +already, and both times the ship was a’most blow’d +out o’ the water.”</p> + +<p>“An’ I’ve been round it once,” said +another, “an’ that time the sails were split, and the +ropes frozen in the blocks, so that they wouldn’t work, and +we wos all but lost.”</p> + +<p>“An’ I’ve been round it five times,” +cried a third, “an’ every time wos wuss than another, +the gales wos so tree-mendous!”</p> + +<p>“And I’ve been round it no times at all,” +cried Peterkin, with an impudent wink of his eye, +“an’ <i>that</i> time I wos blow’d inside +out!”</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, we passed the dreaded cape without much rough +weather, and, in the course of a few weeks afterwards, were +sailing gently, before a warm tropical breeze, over the Pacific +Ocean. Thus we proceeded on our voyage, sometimes bounding +merrily before a fair breeze, at other times floating calmly on +the glassy wave and fishing for the curious inhabitants of the +deep,—all of which, although the sailors thought little of +them, were strange, and interesting, and very wonderful to +me.</p> + +<p>At last we came among the Coral Islands of the Pacific, and I +shall never forget the delight with which I gazed,—when we +chanced to pass one,—at the pure, white, dazzling shores, +and the verdant palm-trees, which looked bright and beautiful in +the sunshine. And often did we three long to be landed on +one, imagining that we should certainly find perfect happiness +there! Our wish was granted sooner than we expected.</p> + +<p>One night, soon after we entered the tropics, an awful storm +burst upon our ship. The first squall of wind carried away +two of our masts; and left only the foremast standing. Even +this, however, was more than enough, for we did not dare to hoist +a rag of sail on it. For five days the tempest raged in all +its fury. Everything was swept off the decks except one +small boat. The steersman was lashed to the wheel, lest he +should be washed away, and we all gave ourselves up for +lost. The captain said that he had no idea where we were, +as we had been blown far out of our course; and we feared much +that we might get among the dangerous coral reefs which are so +numerous in the Pacific. At day-break on the sixth morning +of the gale we saw land ahead. It was an island encircled +by a reef of coral on which the waves broke in fury. There +was calm water within this reef, but we could only see one narrow +opening into it. For this opening we steered, but, ere we +reached it, a tremendous wave broke on our stern, tore the rudder +completely off, and left us at the mercy of the winds and +waves.</p> + +<p>“It’s all over with us now, lads,” said the +captain to the men; “get the boat ready to launch; we shall +be on the rocks in less than half an hour.”</p> + +<p>The men obeyed in gloomy silence, for they felt that there was +little hope of so small a boat living in such a sea.</p> + +<p>“Come boys,” said Jack Martin, in a grave tone, to +me and Peterkin, as we stood on the quarterdeck awaiting our +fate;—“Come boys, we three shall stick +together. You see it is impossible that the little boat can +reach the shore, crowded with men. It will be sure to +upset, so I mean rather to trust myself to a large oar. I see +through the telescope that the ship will strike at the tail of +the reef, where the waves break into the quiet water inside; so, +if we manage to cling to the oar till it is driven over the +breakers, we may perhaps gain the shore. What say you; will +you join me?”</p> + +<p>We gladly agreed to follow Jack, for he inspired us with +confidence, although I could perceive, by the sad tone of his +voice, that he had little hope; and, indeed, when I looked at the +white waves that lashed the reef and boiled against the rocks as +if in fury, I felt that there was but a step between us and +death. My heart sank within me; but at that moment my +thoughts turned to my beloved mother, and I remembered those +words, which were among the last that she said to +me—“Ralph, my dearest child, always remember in the +hour of danger to look to your Lord and Saviour Jesus +Christ. He alone is both able and willing to save your body +and your soul.” So I felt much comforted when I +thought thereon.</p> + +<p>The ship was now very near the rocks. The men were ready +with the boat, and the captain beside them giving orders, when a +tremendous wave came towards us. We three ran towards the +bow to lay hold of our oar, and had barely reached it when the +wave fell on the deck with a crash like thunder. At the +same moment the ship struck, the foremast broke off close to the +deck and went over the side, carrying the boat and men along with +it. Our oar got entangled with the wreck, and Jack seized +an axe to cut it free, but, owing to the motion of the ship, he +missed the cordage and struck the axe deep into the oar. +Another wave, however, washed it clear of the wreck. We all +seized hold of it, and the next instant we were struggling in the +wild sea. The last thing I saw was the boat whirling in the +surf, and all the sailors tossed into the foaming waves. +Then I became insensible.</p> + +<p>On recovering from my swoon, I found myself lying on a bank of +soft grass, under the shelter of an overhanging rock, with +Peterkin on his knees by my side, tenderly bathing my temples +with water, and endeavouring to stop the blood that flowed from a +wound in my forehead.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<p class="letter" +>The Coral Island—Our first cogitations after landing, +and the result of them—We conclude that the island is +uninhabited.</p> + +<p>There is a strange and peculiar sensation experienced in +recovering from a state of insensibility, which is almost +indescribable; a sort of dreamy, confused consciousness; a +half-waking half-sleeping condition, accompanied with a feeling +of weariness, which, however, is by no means disagreeable. +As I slowly recovered and heard the voice of Peterkin inquiring +whether I felt better, I thought that I must have overslept +myself, and should be sent to the mast-head for being lazy; but +before I could leap up in haste, the thought seemed to vanish +suddenly away, and I fancied that I must have been ill. +Then a balmy breeze fanned my cheek, and I thought of home, and +the garden at the back of my father’s cottage, with its +luxuriant flowers, and the sweet-scented honey-suckle that my +dear mother trained so carefully upon the trellised porch. +But the roaring of the surf put these delightful thoughts to +flight, and I was back again at sea, watching the dolphins and +the flying-fish, and reefing topsails off the wild and stormy +Cape Horn. Gradually the roar of the surf became louder and +more distinct. I thought of being wrecked far far away from +my native land, and slowly opened my eyes to meet those of my +companion Jack, who, with a look of intense anxiety, was gazing +into my face.</p> + +<p>“Speak to us, my dear Ralph,” whispered Jack, +tenderly, “are you better now?”</p> + +<p>I smiled and looked up, saying, “Better; why, what do +you mean, Jack? I’m quite well.”</p> + +<p>“Then what are you shamming for, and frightening us in +this way?” said Peterkin, smiling through his tears; for +the poor boy had been really under the impression that I was +dying.</p> + +<p>I now raised myself on my elbow, and putting my hand to my +forehead, found that it had been cut pretty severely, and that I +had lost a good deal of blood.</p> + +<p>“Come, come, Ralph,” said Jack, pressing me gently +backward, “lie down, my boy; you’re not right +yet. Wet your lips with this water, it’s cool and +clear as crystal. I got it from a spring close at +hand. There now, don’t say a word, hold your +tongue,” said he, seeing me about to speak. +“I’ll tell you all about it, but you must not utter a +syllable till you have rested well.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! don’t stop him from speaking, Jack,” +said Peterkin, who, now that his fears for my safety were +removed, busied himself in erecting a shelter of broken branches +in order to protect me from the wind; which, however, was almost +unnecessary, for the rock beside which I had been laid completely +broke the force of the gale. “Let him speak, Jack; +it’s a comfort to hear that he’s alive, after lying +there stiff and white and sulky for a whole hour, just like an +Egyptian mummy. Never saw such a fellow as you are, Ralph; +always up to mischief. You’ve almost knocked out all +my teeth and more than half choked me, and now you go shamming +dead! It’s very wicked of you, indeed it +is.”</p> + +<p>While Peterkin ran on in this style, my faculties became quite +clear again, and I began to understand my position. +“What do you mean by saying I half choked you, +Peterkin?” said I.</p> + +<p>“What do I mean? Is English not your mother +tongue, or do you want me to repeat it in French, by way of +making it clearer? Don’t you +remember—”</p> + +<p>“I remember nothing,” said I, interrupting him, +“after we were thrown into the sea.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p24b.jpg"> +<img alt="Slowly recovering" src="images/p24s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>“Hush, Peterkin,” said Jack, “you’re +exciting Ralph with your nonsense. I’ll explain it to +you. You recollect that after the ship struck, we three +sprang over the bow into the sea; well, I noticed that the oar +struck your head and gave you that cut on the brow, which nearly +stunned you, so that you grasped Peterkin round the neck without +knowing apparently what you were about. In doing so you +pushed the telescope,—which you clung to as if it had been +your life,—against Peterkin’s mouth—”</p> + +<p>“Pushed it against his mouth!” interrupted +Peterkin, “say crammed it down his throat. Why, +there’s a distinct mark of the brass rim on the back of my +gullet at this moment!”</p> + +<p>“Well, well, be that as it may,” continued Jack, +“you clung to him, Ralph, till I feared you really would +choke him; but I saw that he had a good hold of the oar, so I +exerted myself to the utmost to push you towards the shore, which +we luckily reached without much trouble, for the water inside the +reef is quite calm.”</p> + +<p>“But the captain and crew, what of them?” I +inquired anxiously.</p> + +<p>Jack shook his head.</p> + +<p>“Are they lost?”</p> + +<p>“No, they are not lost, I hope, but I fear there is not +much chance of their being saved. The ship struck at the +very tail of the island on which we are cast. When the boat +was tossed into the sea it fortunately did not upset, although it +shipped a good deal of water, and all the men managed to scramble +into it; but before they could get the oars out the gale carried +them past the point and away to leeward of the island. +After we landed I saw them endeavouring to pull towards us, but +as they had only one pair of oars out of the eight that belong to +the boat, and as the wind was blowing right in their teeth, they +gradually lost ground. Then I saw them put about and hoist +some sort of sail,—a blanket, I fancy, for it was too small +for the boat,—and in half an hour they were out of +sight.”</p> + +<p>“Poor fellows,” I murmured sorrowfully.</p> + +<p>“But the more I think about it, I’ve better hope +of them,” continued Jack, in a more cheerful tone. +“You see, Ralph, I’ve read a great deal about these +South Sea Islands, and I know that in many places they are +scattered about in thousands over the sea, so they’re +almost sure to fall in with one of them before long.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I hope so,” said Peterkin, +earnestly. “But what has become of the wreck, +Jack? I saw you clambering up the rocks there while I was +watching Ralph. Did you say she had gone to +pieces?”</p> + +<p>“No, she has not gone to pieces, but she has gone to the +bottom,” replied Jack. “As I said before, she +struck on the tail of the island and stove in her bow, but the +next breaker swung her clear, and she floated away to +leeward. The poor fellows in the boat made a hard struggle +to reach her, but long before they came near her she filled and +went down. It was after she foundered that I saw them +trying to pull to the island.”</p> + +<p>There was a long silence after Jack ceased speaking, and I +have no doubt that each was revolving in his mind our +extraordinary position. For my part I cannot say that my +reflections were very agreeable. I knew that we were on an +island, for Jack had said so, but whether it was inhabited or not +I did not know. If it should be inhabited, I felt certain, +from all I had heard of South Sea Islanders, that we should be +roasted alive and eaten. If it should turn out to be +uninhabited, I fancied that we should be starved to death. +“Oh!” thought I, “if the ship had only stuck on +the rocks we might have done pretty well, for we could have +obtained provisions from her, and tools to enable us to build a +shelter, but now—alas! alas! we are lost!” +These last words I uttered aloud in my distress.</p> + +<p>“Lost! Ralph?” exclaimed Jack, while a smile +overspread his hearty countenance. “Saved, you should have +said. Your cogitations seem to have taken a wrong road, and +led you to a wrong conclusion.”</p> + +<p>“Do you know what conclusion <i>I</i> have come +to?” said Peterkin. “I have made up my mind +that it’s capital,—first rate,—the best thing +that ever happened to us, and the most splendid prospect that +ever lay before three jolly young tars. We’ve got an +island all to ourselves. We’ll take possession in the +name of the king; we’ll go and enter the service of its +black inhabitants. Of course we’ll rise, naturally, +to the top of affairs. White men always do in savage +countries. You shall be king, Jack; Ralph, prime minister, +and I shall be—”</p> + +<p>“The court jester,” interrupted Jack.</p> + +<p>“No,” retorted Peterkin, “I’ll have no +title at all. I shall merely accept a highly responsible +situation under government, for you see, Jack, I’m fond of +having an enormous salary and nothing to do.”</p> + +<p>“But suppose there are no natives?”</p> + +<p>“Then we’ll build a charming villa, and plant a +lovely garden round it, stuck all full of the most splendiferous +tropical flowers, and we’ll farm the land, plant, sow, +reap, eat, sleep, and be merry.”</p> + +<p>“But to be serious,” said Jack, assuming a grave +expression of countenance, which I observed always had the effect +of checking Peterkin’s disposition to make fun of +everything, “we are really in rather an uncomfortable +position. If this is a desert island, we shall have to live +very much like the wild beasts, for we have not a tool of any +kind, not even a knife.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, we have <i>that</i>,” said Peterkin, +fumbling in his trousers pocket, from which he drew forth a small +penknife with only one blade, and that was broken.</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s better than nothing; but +come,” said Jack, rising, “we are wasting our time in +<i>talking</i> instead of <i>doing</i>. You seem well +enough to walk now, Ralph, let us see what we have got in our +pockets, and then let us climb some hill and ascertain what sort +of island we have been cast upon, for, whether good or bad, it +seems likely to be our home for some time to come.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +We examine into our personal property, and make a happy +discovery—Our island described—Jack proves himself to +be learned and sagacious above his fellows—Curious +discoveries—Natural lemonade!</p> + +<p>We now seated ourselves upon a rock and began to examine into +our personal property. When we reached the shore, after +being wrecked, my companions had taken off part of their clothes +and spread them out in the sun to dry, for, although the gale was +raging fiercely, there was not a single cloud in the bright +sky. They had also stripped off most part of my wet clothes +and spread them also on the rocks. Having resumed our +garments, we now searched all our pockets with the utmost care, +and laid their contents out on a flat stone before us; and, now +that our minds were fully alive to our condition, it was with no +little anxiety that we turned our several pockets inside out, in +order that nothing might escape us. When all was collected +together we found that our worldly goods consisted of the +following articles:—</p> + +<p>First, A small penknife with a single blade broken off about +the middle and very rusty, besides having two or three notches on +its edge. (Peterkin said of this, with his usual +pleasantry, that it would do for a saw as well as a knife, which +was a great advantage.) Second, An old German-silver +pencil-case without any lead in it. Third, A piece of +whip-cord about six yards long. Fourth, A sailmaker’s +needle of a small size. Fifth, A ship’s telescope, +which I happened to have in my hand at the time the ship struck, +and which I had clung to firmly all the time I was in the +water. Indeed it was with difficulty that Jack got it out +of my grasp when I was lying insensible on the shore. I +cannot understand why I kept such a firm hold of this +telescope. They say that a drowning man will clutch at a +straw. Perhaps it may have been some such feeling in me, +for I did not know that it was in my hand at the time we were +wrecked. However, we felt some pleasure in having it with +us now, although we did not see that it could be of much use to +us, as the glass at the small end was broken to pieces. Our +sixth article was a brass ring which Jack always wore on his +little finger. I never understood why he wore it, for Jack +was not vain of his appearance, and did not seem to care for +ornaments of any kind. Peterkin said “it was in +memory of the girl he left behind him!” But as he +never spoke of this girl to either of us, I am inclined to think +that Peterkin was either jesting or mistaken. In addition +to these articles we had a little bit of tinder, and the clothes +on our backs. These last were as follows:—</p> + +<p>Each of us had on a pair of stout canvass trousers, and a pair +of sailors’ thick shoes. Jack wore a red flannel +shirt, a blue jacket, and a red Kilmarnock bonnet or night-cap, +besides a pair of worsted socks, and a cotton +pocket-handkerchief, with sixteen portraits of Lord Nelson +printed on it, and a union Jack in the middle. Peterkin had +on a striped flannel shirt,—which he wore outside his +trousers, and belted round his waist, after the manner of a +tunic,—and a round black straw hat. He had no jacket, +having thrown it off just before we were cast into the sea; but +this was not of much consequence, as the climate of the island +proved to be extremely mild; so much so, indeed, that Jack and I +often preferred to go about without our jackets. Peterkin +had also a pair of white cotton socks, and a blue handkerchief +with white spots all over it. My own costume consisted of a +blue flannel shirt, a blue jacket, a black cap, and a pair of +worsted socks, besides the shoes and canvass trousers already +mentioned. This was all we had, and besides these things we +had nothing else; but, when we thought of the danger from which +we had escaped, and how much worse off we might have been had the +ship struck on the reef during the night, we felt very thankful +that we were possessed of so much, although, I must confess, we +sometimes wished that we had had a little more.</p> + +<p>While we were examining these things, and talking about them, +Jack suddenly started and exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“The oar! we have forgotten the oar.”</p> + +<p>“What good will that do us?” said Peterkin; +“there’s wood enough on the island to make a thousand +oars.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, lad,” replied Jack, “but there’s +a bit of hoop iron at the end of it, and that may be of much use +to us.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said I, “let us go fetch +it;” and with that we all three rose and hastened down to +the beach. I still felt a little weak from loss of blood, +so that my companions soon began to leave me behind; but Jack +perceived this, and, with his usual considerate good nature, +turned back to help me. This was now the first time that I +had looked well about me since landing, as the spot where I had +been laid was covered with thick bushes which almost hid the +country from our view. As we now emerged from among these +and walked down the sandy beach together, I cast my eyes about, +and, truly, my heart glowed within me and my spirits rose at the +beautiful prospect which I beheld on every side. The gale +had suddenly died away, just as if it had blown furiously till it +dashed our ship upon the rocks, and had nothing more to do after +accomplishing that. The island on which we stood was hilly, +and covered almost everywhere with the most beautiful and richly +coloured trees, bushes, and shrubs, none of which I knew the +names of at that time, except, indeed, the cocoa-nut palms, which +I recognised at once from the many pictures that I had seen of +them before I left home. A sandy beach of dazzling +whiteness lined this bright green shore, and upon it there fell a +gentle ripple of the sea. This last astonished me much, for +I recollected that at home the sea used to fall in huge billows +on the shore long after a storm had subsided. But on +casting my glance out to sea the cause became apparent. +About a mile distant from the shore I saw the great billows of +the ocean rolling like a green wall, and falling with a long, +loud roar, upon a low coral reef, where they were dashed into +white foam and flung up in clouds of spray. This spray +sometimes flew exceedingly high, and, every here and there, a +beautiful rainbow was formed for a moment among the falling +drops. We afterwards found that this coral reef extended +quite round the island, and formed a natural breakwater to +it. Beyond this the sea rose and tossed violently from the +effects of the storm; but between the reef and the shore it was +as calm and as smooth as a pond.</p> + +<p>My heart was filled with more delight than I can express at +sight of so many glorious objects, and my thoughts turned +suddenly to the contemplation of the Creator of them all. I +mention this the more gladly, because at that time, I am ashamed +to say, I very seldom thought of my Creator, although I was +constantly surrounded by the most beautiful and wonderful of His +works. I observed from the expression of my +companion’s countenance that he too derived much joy from +the splendid scenery, which was all the more agreeable to us +after our long voyage on the salt sea. There, the breeze +was fresh and cold, but here it was delightfully mild; and, when +a puff blew off the land, it came laden with the most exquisite +perfume that can be imagined. While we thus gazed, we were +startled by a loud “Huzza!” from Peterkin, and, on +looking towards the edge of the sea, we saw him capering and +jumping about like a monkey, and ever and anon tugging with all +his might at something that lay upon the shore.</p> + +<p>“What an odd fellow he is, to be sure,” said Jack, +taking me by the arm and hurrying forward; “come, let us +hasten to see what it is.”</p> + +<p>“Here it is, boys, hurrah! come along. Just what +we want,” cried Peterkin, as we drew near, still tugging +with all his power. “First rate; just the very +ticket!”</p> + +<p>I need scarcely say to my readers that my companion Peterkin +was in the habit of using very remarkable and peculiar +phrases. And I am free to confess that I did not well +understand the meaning of some of them,—such, for instance, +as “the very ticket;” but I think it my duty to +recount everything relating to my adventures with a strict regard +to truthfulness in as far as my memory serves me; so I write, as +nearly as possible, the exact words that my companions +spoke. I often asked Peterkin to explain what he meant by +“ticket,” but he always answered me by going into +fits of laughter. However, by observing the occasions on +which he used it, I came to understand that it meant to show that +something was remarkably good, or fortunate.</p> + +<p>On coming up we found that Peterkin was vainly endeavouring to +pull the axe out of the oar, into which, it will be remembered, +Jack struck it while endeavouring to cut away the cordage among +which it had become entangled at the bow of the ship. +Fortunately for us the axe had remained fast in the oar, and even +now, all Peterkin’s strength could not draw it out of the +cut.</p> + +<p>“Ah! that is capital indeed,” cried Jack, at the +same time giving the axe a wrench that plucked it out of the +tough wood. “How fortunate this is! It will be +of more value to us than a hundred knives, and the edge is quite +new and sharp.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll answer for the toughness of the handle at +any rate,” cried Peterkin; “my arms are nearly pulled +out of the sockets. But see here, our luck is great. +There is iron on the blade.” He pointed to a piece of +hoop iron, as he spoke, which had been nailed round the blade of +the oar to prevent it from splitting.</p> + +<p>This also was a fortunate discovery. Jack went down on +his knees, and with the edge of the axe began carefully to force +out the nails. But as they were firmly fixed in, and the +operation blunted our axe, we carried the oar up with us to the +place where we had left the rest of our things, intending to burn +the wood away from the iron at a more convenient time.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, after we had laid it on +the stone which contained our little all, “I propose that +we should go to the tail of the island, where the ship struck, +which is only a quarter of a mile off, and see if anything else +has been thrown ashore. I don’t expect anything, but +it is well to see. When we get back here it will be time to +have our supper and prepare our beds.”</p> + +<p>“Agreed!” cried Peterkin and I together, as, +indeed, we would have agreed to any proposal that Jack made; for, +besides his being older and much stronger and taller than either +of us, he was a very clever fellow, and I think would have +induced people much older than himself to choose him for their +leader, especially if they required to be led on a bold +enterprise.</p> + +<p>Now, as we hastened along the white beach, which shone so +brightly in the rays of the setting sun that our eyes were quite +dazzled by its glare, it suddenly came into Peterkin’s head +that we had nothing to eat except the wild berries which grew in +profusion at our feet.</p> + +<p>“What shall we do, Jack?” said he, with a rueful +look; “perhaps they may be poisonous!”</p> + +<p>“No fear,” replied Jack, confidently; “I +have observed that a few of them are not unlike some of the +berries that grow wild on our own native hills. Besides, I +saw one or two strange birds eating them just a few minutes ago, +and what won’t kill the birds won’t kill us. +But look up there, Peterkin,” continued Jack, pointing to +the branched head of a cocoa-nut palm. “There are +nuts for us in all stages.”</p> + +<p>“So there are!” cried Peterkin, who being of a +very unobservant nature had been too much taken up with other +things to notice anything so high above his head as the fruit of +a palm tree. But, whatever faults my young comrade had, he +could not be blamed for want of activity or animal spirits. +Indeed, the nuts had scarcely been pointed out to him when he +bounded up the tall stem of the tree like a squirrel, and, in a +few minutes, returned with three nuts, each as large as a +man’s fist.</p> + +<p>“You had better keep them till we return,” said +Jack. “Let us finish our work before +eating.”</p> + +<p>“So be it, captain, go ahead,” cried Peterkin, +thrusting the nuts into his trousers pocket. “In fact +I don’t want to eat just now, but I would give a good deal +for a drink. Oh that I could find a spring! but I +don’t see the smallest sign of one hereabouts. I say, +Jack, how does it happen that you seem to be up to +everything? You have told us the names of half-a-dozen +trees already, and yet you say that you were never in the South +Seas before.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not up to <i>everything</i>, Peterkin, as +you’ll find out ere long,” replied Jack, with a +smile; “but I have been a great reader of books of travel +and adventure all my life, and that has put me up to a good many +things that you are, perhaps, not acquainted with.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack, that’s all humbug. If you begin +to lay everything to the credit of books, I’ll quite lose +my opinion of you,” cried Peterkin, with a look of +contempt. “I’ve seen a lot o’ fellows +that were <i>always</i> poring over books, and when they came to +try to <i>do</i> anything, they were no better than +baboons!”</p> + +<p>“You are quite right,” retorted Jack; “and I +have seen a lot of fellows who never looked into books at all, +who knew nothing about anything except the things they had +actually seen, and very little they knew even about these. +Indeed, some were so ignorant that they did not know that +cocoa-nuts grew on cocoa-nut trees!”</p> + +<p>I could not refrain from laughing at this rebuke, for there +was much truth in it, as to Peterkin’s ignorance.</p> + +<p>“Humph! maybe you’re right,” answered +Peterkin; “but I would not give <i>tuppence</i> for a man +of books, if he had nothing else in him.”</p> + +<p>“Neither would I,” said Jack; “but +that’s no reason why you should run books down, or think +less of me for having read them. Suppose, now, Peterkin, +that you wanted to build a ship, and I were to give you a long +and particular account of the way to do it, would not that be +very useful?”</p> + +<p>“No doubt of it,” said Peterkin, laughing.</p> + +<p>“And suppose I were to write the account in a letter +instead of telling you in words, would that be less +useful?”</p> + +<p>“Well—no, perhaps not.”</p> + +<p>“Well, suppose I were to print it, and send it to you in +the form of a book, would it not be as good and useful as +ever?”</p> + +<p>“Oh, bother! Jack, you’re a philosopher, and +that’s worse than anything!” cried Peterkin, with a +look of pretended horror.</p> + +<p>“Very well, Peterkin, we shall see,” returned +Jack, halting under the shade of a cocoa-nut tree. +“You said you were thirsty just a minute ago; now, jump up +that tree and bring down a nut,—not a ripe one, bring a +green, unripe one.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin looked surprised, but, seeing that Jack was in +earnest, he obeyed.</p> + +<p>“Now, cut a hole in it with your penknife, and clap it +to your mouth, old fellow,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>Peterkin did as he was directed, and we both burst into +uncontrollable laughter at the changes that instantly passed over +his expressive countenance. No sooner had he put the nut to +his mouth, and thrown back his head in order to catch what came +out of it, than his eyes opened to twice their ordinary size with +astonishment, while his throat moved vigorously in the act of +swallowing. Then a smile and look of intense delight +overspread his face, except, indeed, the mouth, which, being +firmly fixed to the hole in the nut, could not take part in the +expression; but he endeavoured to make up for this by winking at +us excessively with his right eye. At length he stopped, +and, drawing a long breath, exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“Nectar! perfect nectar! I say, Jack, you’re +a Briton—the best fellow I ever met in my life. Only +taste that!” said he, turning to me and holding the nut to +my mouth. I immediately drank, and certainly I was much +surprised at the delightful liquid that flowed copiously down my +throat. It was extremely cool, and had a sweet taste, +mingled with acid; in fact, it was the likest thing to lemonade I +ever tasted, and was most grateful and refreshing. I handed +the nut to Jack, who, after tasting it, said, “Now, +Peterkin, you unbeliever, I never saw or tasted a cocoa nut in my +life before, except those sold in shops at home; but I once read +that the green nuts contain that stuff, and you see it is +true!”</p> + +<p>“And pray,” asked Peterkin, “what sort of +‘stuff’ does the ripe nut contain?”</p> + +<p>“A hollow kernel,” answered Jack, “with a +liquid like milk in it; but it does not satisfy thirst so well as +hunger. It is very wholesome food I believe.”</p> + +<p>“Meat and drink on the same tree!” cried Peterkin; +“washing in the sea, lodging on the ground,—and all +for nothing! My dear boys, we’re set up for life; it +must be the ancient Paradise,—hurrah!” and Peterkin +tossed his straw hat in the air, and ran along the beach +hallooing like a madman with delight.</p> + +<p>We afterwards found, however, that these lovely islands were +very unlike Paradise in many things. But more of this in +its proper place.</p> + +<p>We had now come to the point of rocks on which the ship had +struck, but did not find a single article, although we searched +carefully among the coral rocks, which at this place jutted out +so far as nearly to join the reef that encircled the +island. Just as we were about to return, however, we saw +something black floating in a little cove that had escaped our +observation. Running forward, we drew it from the water, +and found it to be a long thick leather boot, such as fishermen +at home wear; and a few paces farther on we picked up its +fellow. We at once recognised these as having belonged to +our captain, for he had worn them during the whole of the storm, +in order to guard his legs from the waves and spray that +constantly washed over our decks. My first thought on +seeing them was that our dear captain had been drowned; but Jack +soon put my mind more at rest on that point, by saying that if +the captain had been drowned with the boots on, he would +certainly have been washed ashore along with them, and that he +had no doubt whatever he had kicked them off while in the sea, +that he might swim more easily.</p> + +<p>Peterkin immediately put them on, but they were so large that, +as Jack said, they would have done for boots, trousers, and vest +too. I also tried them, but, although I was long enough in +the legs for them, they were much too large in the feet for me; +so we handed them to Jack, who was anxious to make me keep them, +but as they fitted his large limbs and feet as if they had been +made for him, I would not hear of it, so he consented at last to +use them. I may remark, however, that Jack did not use them +often, as they were extremely heavy.</p> + +<p>It was beginning to grow dark when we returned to our +encampment; so we put off our visit to the top of a hill till +next day, and employed the light that yet remained to us in +cutting down a quantity of boughs and the broad leaves of a tree, +of which none of us knew the name. With these we erected a +sort of rustic bower, in which we meant to pass the night. +There was no absolute necessity for this, because the air of our +island was so genial and balmy that we could have slept quite +well without any shelter; but we were so little used to sleeping +in the open air, that we did not quite relish the idea of lying +down without any covering over us: besides, our bower would +shelter us from the night dews or rain, if any should happen to +fall. Having strewed the floor with leaves and dry grass, +we bethought ourselves of supper.</p> + +<p>But it now occurred to us, for the first time, that we had no +means of making a fire.</p> + +<p>“Now, there’s a fix!—what shall we +do?” said Peterkin, while we both turned our eyes to Jack, +to whom we always looked in our difficulties. Jack seemed +not a little perplexed.</p> + +<p>“There are flints enough, no doubt, on the beach,” +said he, “but they are of no use at all without a +steel. However, we must try.” So saying, he +went to the beach, and soon returned with two flints. On +one of these he placed the tinder, and endeavoured to ignite it; +but it was with great difficulty that a very small spark was +struck out of the flints, and the tinder, being a bad, hard +piece, would not catch. He then tried the bit of hoop iron, +which would not strike fire at all; and after that the back of +the axe, with no better success. During all these trials +Peterkin sat with his hands in his pockets, gazing with a most +melancholy visage at our comrade, his face growing longer and +more miserable at each successive failure.</p> + +<p>“Oh dear!” he sighed, “I would not care a +button for the cooking of our victuals,—perhaps they +don’t need it,—but it’s so dismal to eat +one’s supper in the dark, and we have had such a capital +day, that it’s a pity to finish off in this glum +style. Oh, I have it!” he cried, starting up; +“the spy-glass,—the big glass at the end is a +burning-glass!”</p> + +<p>“You forget that we have no sun,” said I.</p> + +<p>Peterkin was silent. In his sudden recollection of the +telescope he had quite overlooked the absence of the sun.</p> + +<p>“Ah, boys, I’ve got it now!” exclaimed Jack, +rising and cutting a branch from a neighbouring bush, which be +stripped of its leaves. “I recollect seeing this done +once at home. Hand me the bit of whip-cord.” +With the cord and branch Jack soon formed a bow. Then he +cut a piece, about three inches long, off the end of a dead +branch, which he pointed at the two ends. Round this he +passed the cord of the bow, and placed one end against his chest, +which was protected from its point by a chip of wood; the other +point he placed against the bit of tinder, and then began to saw +vigorously with the bow, just as a blacksmith does with his drill +while boring a hole in a piece of iron. In a few seconds +the tinder began to smoke; in less than a minute it caught fire; +and in less than a quarter of an hour we were drinking our +lemonade and eating cocoa nuts round a fire that would have +roasted an entire sheep, while the smoke, flames, and sparks, +flew up among the broad leaves of the overhanging palm trees, and +cast a warm glow upon our leafy bower.</p> + +<p>That night the starry sky looked down through the gently +rustling trees upon our slumbers, and the distant roaring of the +surf upon the coral reef was our lullaby.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Morning, and cogitations connected therewith—We +luxuriate in the sea, try our diving powers, and make enchanting +excursions among the coral groves at the bottom of the +ocean—The wonders of the deep enlarged upon.</p> + +<p>What a joyful thing it is to awaken, on a fresh glorious +morning, and find the rising sun staring into your face with +dazzling brilliancy!—to see the birds twittering in the +bushes, and to hear the murmuring of a rill, or the soft hissing +ripples as they fall upon the sea-shore! At any time and in +any place such sights and sounds are most charming, but more +especially are they so when one awakens to them, for the first +time, in a novel and romantic situation, with the soft sweet air +of a tropical climate mingling with the fresh smell of the sea, +and stirring the strange leaves that flutter overhead and around +one, or ruffling the plumage of the stranger birds that fly +inquiringly around, as if to demand what business we have to +intrude uninvited on their domains. When I awoke on the +morning after the shipwreck, I found myself in this most +delightful condition; and, as I lay on my back upon my bed of +leaves, gazing up through the branches of the cocoa-nut trees +into the clear blue sky, and watched the few fleecy clouds that +passed slowly across it, my heart expanded more and more with an +exulting gladness, the like of which I had never felt +before. While I meditated, my thoughts again turned to the +great and kind Creator of this beautiful world, as they had done +on the previous day, when I first beheld the sea and the coral +reef, with the mighty waves dashing over it into the calm waters +of the lagoon.</p> + +<p>While thus meditating, I naturally bethought me of my Bible, +for I had faithfully kept the promise, which I gave at parting to +my beloved mother, that I would read it every morning; and it was +with a feeling of dismay that I remembered I had left it in the +ship. I was much troubled about this. However, I +consoled myself with reflecting that I could keep the second part +of my promise to her, namely, that I should never omit to say my +prayers. So I rose quietly, lest I should disturb my +companions, who were still asleep, and stepped aside into the +bushes for this purpose.</p> + +<p>On my return I found them still slumbering, so I again lay +down to think over our situation. Just at that moment I was +attracted by the sight of a very small parrot, which Jack +afterwards told me was called a paroquet. It was seated on +a twig that overhung Peterkin’s head, and I was speedily +lost in admiration of its bright green plumage, which was mingled +with other gay colours. While I looked I observed that the +bird turned its head slowly from side to side and looked +downwards, first with the one eye, and then with the other. +On glancing downwards I observed that Peterkin’s mouth was +wide open, and that this remarkable bird was looking into +it. Peterkin used to say that I had not an atom of fun in +my composition, and that I never could understand a joke. +In regard to the latter, perhaps he was right; yet I think that, +when they were explained to me, I understood jokes as well as +most people: but in regard to the former he must certainly have +been wrong, for this bird seemed to me to be extremely funny; and +I could not help thinking that, if it should happen to faint, or +slip its foot, and fall off the twig into Peterkin’s mouth, +he would perhaps think it funny too! Suddenly the paroquet +bent down its head and uttered a loud scream in his face. +This awoke him, and, with a cry of surprise, he started up, while +the foolish bird flew precipitately away.</p> + +<p>“Oh you monster!” cried Peterkin, shaking his fist +at the bird. Then he yawned and rubbed his eyes, and asked +what o’clock it was.</p> + +<p>I smiled at this question, and answered that, as our watches +were at the bottom of the sea, I could not tell, but it was a +little past sunrise.</p> + +<p>Peterkin now began to remember where we were. As he +looked up into the bright sky, and snuffed the scented air, his +eyes glistened with delight, and he uttered a faint +“hurrah!” and yawned again. Then he gazed +slowly round, till, observing the calm sea through an opening in +the bushes, he started suddenly up as if he had received an +electric shock, uttered a vehement shout, flung off his garments, +and, rushing over the white sands, plunged into the water. +The cry awoke Jack, who rose on his elbow with a look of grave +surprise; but this was followed by a quiet smile of intelligence +on seeing Peterkin in the water. With an energy that he +only gave way to in moments of excitement, Jack bounded to his +feet, threw off his clothes, shook back his hair, and with a +lion-like spring, dashed over the sands and plunged into the sea +with such force as quite to envelop Peterkin in a shower of +spray. Jack was a remarkably good swimmer and diver, so +that after his plunge we saw no sign of him for nearly a minute; +after which he suddenly emerged, with a cry of joy, a good many +yards out from the shore. My spirits were so much raised by +seeing all this that I, too, hastily threw off my garments and +endeavoured to imitate Jack’s vigorous bound; but I was so +awkward that my foot caught on a stump, and I fell to the ground; +then I slipped on a stone while running over the mud, and nearly +fell again, much to the amusement of Peterkin, who laughed +heartily, and called me a “slow coach,” while Jack +cried out, “Come along, Ralph, and I’ll help +you.” However, when I got into the water I managed +very well, for I was really a good swimmer, and diver too. +I could not, indeed, equal Jack, who was superior to any +Englishman I ever saw, but I infinitely surpassed Peterkin, who +could only swim a little, and could not dive at all.</p> + +<p>While Peterkin enjoyed himself in the shallow water and in +running along the beach, Jack and I swam out into the deep water, +and occasionally dived for stones. I shall never forget my +surprise and delight on first beholding the bottom of the +sea. As I have before stated, the water within the reef was +as calm as a pond; and, as there was no wind, it was quite clear, +from the surface to the bottom, so that we could see down easily +even at a depth of twenty or thirty yards. When Jack and I +dived in shallower water, we expected to have found sand and +stones, instead of which we found ourselves in what appeared +really to be an enchanted garden. The whole of the bottom +of the lagoon, as we called the calm water within the reef, was +covered with coral of every shape, size, and hue. Some +portions were formed like large mushrooms; others appeared like +the brain of a man, having stalks or necks attached to them; but +the most common kind was a species of branching coral, and some +portions were of a lovely pale pink colour, others pure +white. Among this there grew large quantities of sea-weed +of the richest hues imaginable, and of the most graceful forms; +while innumerable fishes—blue, red, yellow, green, and +striped—sported in and out amongst the flower-beds of this +submarine garden, and did not appear to be at all afraid of our +approaching them.</p> + +<p>On darting to the surface for breath, after our first dive, +Jack and I rose close to each other.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever in your life, Ralph, see anything so +lovely?” said Jack, as he flung the spray from his +hair.</p> + +<p>“Never,” I replied. “It appears to me +like fairy realms. I can scarcely believe that we are not +dreaming.”</p> + +<p>“Dreaming!” cried Jack, “do you know, Ralph, +I’m half tempted to think that we really are +dreaming. But if so, I am resolved to make the most of it, +and dream another dive; so here goes,—down again, my +boy!”</p> + +<p>We took the second dive together, and kept beside each other +while under water; and I was greatly surprised to find that we +could keep down much longer than I ever recollect having done in +our own seas at home. I believe that this was owing to the +heat of the water, which was so warm that we afterwards found we +could remain in it for two and three hours at a time without +feeling any unpleasant effects such as we used to experience in +the sea at home. When Jack reached the bottom, he grasped +the coral stems, and crept along on his hands and knees, peeping +under the sea-weed and among the rocks. I observed him also +pick up one or two large oysters, and retain them in his grasp, +as if he meant to take them up with him, so I also gathered a +few. Suddenly he made a grasp at a fish with blue and +yellow stripes on its back, and actually touched its tail, but +did not catch it. At this he turned towards me and +attempted to smile; but no sooner had he done so than he sprang +like an arrow to the surface, where, on following him, I found +him gasping and coughing, and spitting water from his +mouth. In a few minutes he recovered, and we both turned to +swim ashore.</p> + +<p>“I declare, Ralph,” said he, “that I +actually tried to laugh under water.”</p> + +<p>“So I saw,” I replied; “and I observed that +you very nearly caught that fish by the tail. It would have +done capitally for breakfast if you had.”</p> + +<p>“Breakfast enough here,” said he, holding up the +oysters, as we landed and ran up the beach. +“Hallo! Peterkin, here you are, boy. Split open +these fellows while Ralph and I put on our clothes. +They’ll agree with the cocoa nuts excellently, I have no +doubt.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin, who was already dressed, took the oysters, and +opened them with the edge of our axe, exclaiming, “Now, +that <i>is</i> capital. There’s nothing I’m so +fond of.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s lucky,” remarked Jack. +“I’ll be able to keep you in good order now, Master +Peterkin. You know you can’t dive any better than a +cat. So, sir, whenever you behave ill, you shall have no +oysters for breakfast.”</p> + +<p>“I’m very glad that our prospect of breakfast is +so good,” said I, “for I’m very +hungry.”</p> + +<p>“Here, then, stop your mouth with that, Ralph,” +said Peterkin, holding a large oyster to my lips. I opened +my mouth and swallowed it in silence, and really it was +remarkably good.</p> + +<p>We now set ourselves earnestly about our preparations for +spending the day. We had no difficulty with the fire this +morning, as our burning-glass was an admirable one; and while we +roasted a few oysters and ate our cocoa nuts, we held a long, +animated conversation about our plans for the future. What +those plans were, and how we carried them into effect, the reader +shall see hereafter.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An excursion into the interior, in which we make many valuable +and interesting discoveries—We get a dreadful +fright—The bread-fruit tree—Wonderful peculiarity of +some of the fruit trees—Signs of former inhabitants.</p> + +<p>Our first care, after breakfast, was to place the few articles +we possessed in the crevice of a rock at the farther end of a +small cave which we discovered near our encampment. This +cave, we hoped, might be useful to us afterwards as a +store-house. Then we cut two large clubs off a species of +very hard tree which grew near at hand. One of these was +given to Peterkin, the other to me, and Jack armed himself with +the axe. We took these precautions because we purposed to +make an excursion to the top of the mountains of the interior, in +order to obtain a better view of our island. Of course we +knew not what dangers might befall us by the way, so thought it +best to be prepared.</p> + +<p>Having completed our arrangements and carefully extinguished +our fire, we sallied forth and walked a short distance along the +sea-beach, till we came to the entrance of a valley, through +which flowed the rivulet before mentioned. Here we turned +our backs on the sea and struck into the interior.</p> + +<p>The prospect that burst upon our view on entering the valley +was truly splendid. On either side of us there was a gentle +rise in the land, which thus formed two ridges about a mile apart +on each side of the valley. These ridges,—which, as +well as the low grounds between them, were covered with trees and +shrubs of the most luxuriant kind—continued to recede +inland for about two miles, when they joined the foot of a small +mountain. This hill rose rather abruptly from the head of +the valley, and was likewise entirely covered even to the top +with trees, except on one particular spot near the left shoulder, +where was a bare and rocky place of a broken and savage +character. Beyond this hill we could not see, and we +therefore directed our course up the banks of the rivulet towards +the foot of it, intending to climb to the top, should that be +possible, as, indeed, we had no doubt it was.</p> + +<p>Jack, being the wisest and boldest among us, took the lead, +carrying the axe on his shoulder. Peterkin, with his +enormous club, came second, as he said he should like to be in a +position to defend me if any danger should threaten. I +brought up the rear, but, having been more taken up with the +wonderful and curious things I saw at starting than with thoughts +of possible danger, I had very foolishly left my club behind +me. Although, as I have said the trees and bushes were very +luxuriant, they were not so thickly crowded together as to hinder +our progress among them. We were able to wind in and out, +and to follow the banks of the stream quite easily, although, it +is true, the height and thickness of the foliage prevented us +from seeing far ahead. But sometimes a jutting-out rock on +the hill sides afforded us a position whence we could enjoy the +romantic view and mark our progress towards the foot of the +hill. I was particularly struck, during the walk, with the +richness of the undergrowth in most places, and recognised many +berries and plants that resembled those of my native land, +especially a tall, elegantly-formed fern, which emitted an +agreeable perfume. There were several kinds of flowers, +too, but I did not see so many of these as I should have expected +in such a climate. We also saw a great variety of small +birds of bright plumage, and many paroquets similar to the one +that awoke Peterkin so rudely in the morning.</p> + +<p>Thus we advanced to the foot of the hill without encountering +anything to alarm us, except, indeed, once, when we were passing +close under a part of the hill which was hidden from our view by +the broad leaves of the banana trees, which grew in great +luxuriance in that part. Jack was just preparing to force +his way through this thicket, when we were startled and arrested +by a strange pattering or rumbling sound, which appeared to us +quite different from any of the sounds we had heard during the +previous part of our walk.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” cried Peterkin, stopping short and +grasping his club with both hands, “what’s +that?”</p> + +<p>Neither of us replied; but Jack seized his axe in his right +hand, while with the other he pushed aside the broad leaves and +endeavoured to peer amongst them.</p> + +<p>“I can see nothing,” he said, after a short +pause.</p> + +<p>“I think it—”</p> + +<p>Again the rumbling sound came, louder than before, and we all +sprang back and stood on the defensive. For myself, having +forgotten my club, and not having taken the precaution to cut +another, I buttoned my jacket, doubled my fists, and threw myself +into a boxing attitude. I must say, however, that I felt +somewhat uneasy; and my companions afterwards confessed that +their thoughts at this moment had been instantly filled with all +they had ever heard or read of wild beasts and savages, +torturings at the stake, roastings alive, and such like horrible +things. Suddenly the pattering noise increased with tenfold +violence. It was followed by a fearful crash among the +bushes, which was rapidly repeated, as if some gigantic animal +were bounding towards us. In another moment an enormous +rock came crashing through the shrubbery, followed by a cloud of +dust and small stones, flew close past the spot where we stood, +carrying bushes and young trees along with it.</p> + +<p>“Pooh! is that all?” exclaimed Peterkin, wiping +the perspiration off his forehead. “Why, I thought it +was all the wild men and beasts in the South Sea Islands +galloping on in one grand charge to sweep us off the face of the +earth, instead of a mere stone tumbling down the mountain +side.”</p> + +<p>“Nevertheless,” remarked Jack, “if that same +stone had hit any of us, it would have rendered the charge you +speak of quite unnecessary, Peterkin.”</p> + +<p>This was true, and I felt very thankful for our escape. +On examining the spot more narrowly, we found that it lay close +to the foot of a very rugged precipice, from which stones of +various sizes were always tumbling at intervals. Indeed, +the numerous fragments lying scattered all around might have +suggested the cause of the sound, had we not been too suddenly +alarmed to think of anything.</p> + +<p>We now resumed our journey, resolving that, in our future +excursions into the interior, we would be careful to avoid this +dangerous precipice.</p> + +<p>Soon afterwards we arrived at the foot of the hill and +prepared to ascend it. Here Jack made a discovery which +caused us all very great joy. This was a tree of a +remarkably beautiful appearance, which Jack confidently declared +to be the celebrated bread-fruit tree.</p> + +<p>“Is it celebrated?” inquired Peterkin, with a look +of great simplicity.</p> + +<p>“It is,” replied Jack</p> + +<p>“That’s odd, now,” rejoined Peterkin; +“never heard of it before.”</p> + +<p>“Then it’s not so celebrated as I thought it +was,” returned Jack, quietly squeezing Peterkin’s hat +over his eyes; “but listen, you ignorant boobie! and hear +of it now.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin re-adjusted his hat, and was soon listening with as +much interest as myself, while Jack told us that this tree is one +of the most valuable in the islands of the south; that it bears +two, sometimes three, crops of fruit in the year; that the fruit +is very like wheaten bread in appearance, and that it constitutes +the principal food of many of the islanders.</p> + +<p>“So,” said Peterkin, “we seem to have +everything ready prepared to our hands in this wonderful +island,—lemonade ready bottled in nuts, and loaf-bread +growing on the trees!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin, as usual, was jesting; nevertheless, it is a curious +fact that he spoke almost the literal truth. +“Moreover,” continued Jack, “the bread-fruit +tree affords a capital gum, which serves the natives for pitching +their canoes; the bark of the young branches is made by them into +cloth; and of the wood, which is durable and of a good colour, +they build their houses. So you see, lads, that we have no +lack of material here to make us comfortable, if we are only +clever enough to use it.”</p> + +<p>“But are you sure that that’s it?” asked +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Quite sure,” replied Jack; “for I was +particularly interested in the account I once read of it, and I +remember the description well. I am sorry, however, that I +have forgotten the descriptions of many other trees which I am +sure we have seen to-day, if we could but recognise them. +So you see, Peterkin, I’m not up to everything +yet.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind, Jack,” said Peterkin, with a grave, +patronizing expression of countenance, patting his tall companion +on the shoulder,—“never mind, Jack; you know a good +deal for your age. You’re a clever boy, sir,—a +promising young man; and if you only go on as you have begun, +sir, you will—”</p> + +<p>The end of this speech was suddenly cut short by Jack tripping +up Peterkin’s heels and tumbling him into a mass of thick +shrubs, where, finding himself comfortable, he lay still basking +in the sunshine, while Jack and I examined the bread-tree.</p> + +<p>We were much struck with the deep, rich green colour of its +broad leaves, which were twelve or eighteen inches long, deeply +indented, and of a glossy smoothness, like the laurel. The +fruit, with which it was loaded, was nearly round, and appeared +to be about six inches in diameter, with a rough rind, marked +with lozenge-shaped divisions. It was of various colours, +from light pea-green to brown and rich yellow. Jack said +that the yellow was the ripe fruit. We afterwards found +that most of the fruit-trees on the island were evergreens, and +that we might, when we wished, pluck the blossom and the ripe +fruit from the same tree. Such a wonderful difference from +the trees of our own country surprised us not a little. The +bark of the tree was rough and light-coloured; the trunk was +about two feet in diameter, and it appeared to be twenty feet +high, being quite destitute of branches up to that height, where +it branched off into a beautiful and umbrageous head. We +noticed that the fruit hung in clusters of twos and threes on the +branches; but as we were anxious to get to the top of the hill, +we refrained from attempting to pluck any at that time.</p> + +<p>Our hearts were now very much cheered by our good fortune, and +it was with light and active steps that we clambered up the steep +sides of the hill. On reaching the summit, a new, and if +possible a grander, prospect met our gaze. We found that +this was not the highest part of the island, but that another +hill lay beyond, with a wide valley between it and the one on +which we stood. This valley, like the first, was also full +of rich trees, some dark and some light green, some heavy and +thick in foliage, and others light, feathery, and graceful, while +the beautiful blossoms on many of them threw a sort of rainbow +tint over all, and gave to the valley the appearance of a garden +of flowers. Among these we recognised many of the +bread-fruit trees, laden with yellow fruit, and also a great many +cocoa-nut palms. After gazing our fill we pushed down the +hill side, crossed the valley, and soon began to ascend the +second mountain. It was clothed with trees nearly to the +top, but the summit was bare, and in some places broken.</p> + +<p>While on our way up we came to an object which filled us with +much interest. This was the stump of a tree that had +evidently been cut down with an axe! So, then, we were not +the first who had viewed this beautiful isle. The hand of +man had been at work there before us. It now began to recur +to us again that perhaps the island was inhabited, although we +had not seen any traces of man until now; but a second glance at +the stump convinced us that we had not more reason to think so +now than formerly; for the surface of the wood was quite decayed, +and partly covered with fungus and green matter, so that it must +have been cut many years ago.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “some ship or +other has touched here long ago for wood, and only taken one +tree.”</p> + +<p>We did not think this likely, however, because, in such +circumstances, the crew of a ship would cut wood of small size, +and near the shore, whereas this was a large tree and stood near +the top of the mountain. In fact it was the highest large +tree on the mountain, all above it being wood of very recent +growth.</p> + +<p>“I can’t understand it,” said Jack, +scratching the surface of the stump with his axe. “I +can only suppose that the savages have been here and cut it for +some purpose known only to themselves. But, hallo! what +have we here?”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, Jack began carefully to scrape away the moss and +fungus from the stump, and soon laid bare three distinct traces +of marks, as if some inscription or initials had been cut +thereon. But although the traces were distinct, beyond all +doubt, the exact form of the letters could not be made out. +Jack thought they looked like J. S. but we could not be +certain. They had apparently been carelessly cut, and long +exposure to the weather had so broken them up that we could not +make out what they were. We were exceedingly perplexed at +this discovery, and stayed a long time at the place conjecturing +what these marks could have been, but without avail; so, as the +day was advancing, we left it and quickly reached the top of the +mountain.</p> + +<p>We found this to be the highest point of the island, and from +it we saw our kingdom lying, as it were, like a map around +us. As I have always thought it impossible to get a thing +properly into one’s understanding without comprehending it, +I shall beg the reader’s patience for a little while I +describe our island, thus, shortly:—</p> + +<p>It consisted of two mountains; the one we guessed at 500 feet; +the other, on which we stood, at 1000. Between these lay a +rich, beautiful valley, as already said. This valley +crossed the island from one end to the other, being high in the +middle and sloping on each side towards the sea. The large +mountain sloped, on the side farthest from where we had been +wrecked, gradually towards the sea; but although, when viewed at +a glance, it had thus a regular sloping appearance, a more +careful observation showed that it was broken up into a multitude +of very small vales, or rather dells and glens, intermingled with +little rugged spots and small but abrupt precipices here and +there, with rivulets tumbling over their edges and wandering down +the slopes in little white streams, sometimes glistening among +the broad leaves of the bread-fruit and cocoa-nut trees, or hid +altogether beneath the rich underwood. At the base of this +mountain lay a narrow bright green plain or meadow, which +terminated abruptly at the shore. On the other side of the +island, whence we had come, stood the smaller hill, at the foot +of which diverged three valleys; one being that which we had +ascended, with a smaller vale on each side of it, and separated +from it by the two ridges before mentioned. In these +smaller valleys there were no streams, but they were clothed with +the same luxuriant vegetation.</p> + +<p>The diameter of the island seemed to be about ten miles, and, +as it was almost circular in form, its circumference must have +been thirty miles;—perhaps a little more, if allowance be +made for the numerous bays and indentations of the shore. +The entire island was belted by a beach of pure white sand, on +which laved the gentle ripples of the lagoon. We now also +observed that the coral reef completely encircled the island; but +it varied its distance from it here and there, in some places +being a mile from the beach, in others, a few hundred yards, but +the average distance was half a mile. The reef lay very +low, and the spray of the surf broke quite over it in many +places. This surf never ceased its roar, for, however calm +the weather might be, there is always a gentle swaying motion in +the great Pacific, which, although scarce noticeable out at sea, +reaches the shore at last in a huge billow. The water +within the lagoon, as before said, was perfectly still. +There were three narrow openings in the reef; one opposite each +end of the valley which I have described as crossing the island; +the other opposite our own valley, which we afterwards named the +Valley of the Wreck. At each of these openings the reef +rose into two small green islets, covered with bushes and having +one or two cocoa-nut palms on each. These islets were very +singular, and appeared as if planted expressly for the purpose of +marking the channel into the lagoon. Our captain was making +for one of these openings the day we were wrecked, and would have +reached it too, I doubt not, had not the rudder been torn +away. Within the lagoon were several pretty, low coral +islands, just opposite our encampment; and, immediately beyond +these, out at sea, lay about a dozen other islands, at various +distances, from half a mile to ten miles; all of them, as far as +we could discern, smaller than ours and apparently +uninhabited. They seemed to be low coral islands, raised +but little above the sea, yet covered with cocoa-nut trees.</p> + +<p>All this we noted, and a great deal more, while we sat on the +top of the mountain. After we had satisfied ourselves we +prepared to return; but here again we discovered traces of the +presence of man. These were a pole or staff and one or two +pieces of wood which had been squared with an axe. All of +these were, however, very much decayed, and they had evidently +not been touched for many years.</p> + +<p>Full of these discoveries we returned to our encampment. +On the way we fell in with the traces of some four-footed animal, +but whether old or of recent date none of us were able to +guess. This also tended to raise our hopes of obtaining +some animal food on the island, so we reached home in good +spirits, quite prepared for supper, and highly satisfied with our +excursion.</p> + +<p>After much discussion, in which Peterkin took the lead, we +came to the conclusion that the island was uninhabited, and went +to bed.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Jack’s ingenuity—We get into difficulties about +fishing, and get out of them by a method which gives us a cold +bath—Horrible encounter with a shark.</p> + +<p>For several days after the excursion related in the last +chapter we did not wander far from our encampment, but gave +ourselves up to forming plans for the future and making our +present abode comfortable.</p> + +<p>There were various causes that induced this state of +comparative inaction. In the first place, although +everything around us was so delightful, and we could without +difficulty obtain all that we required for our bodily comfort, we +did not quite like the idea of settling down here for the rest of +our lives, far away from our friends and our native land. +To set energetically about preparations for a permanent residence +seemed so like making up our minds to saying adieu to home and +friends for ever, that we tacitly shrank from it and put off our +preparations, for one reason and another, as long as we +could. Then there was a little uncertainty still as to +there being natives on the island, and we entertained a kind of +faint hope that a ship might come and take us off. But as +day after day passed, and neither savages nor ships appeared, we +gave up all hope of an early deliverance and set diligently to +work at our homestead.</p> + +<p>During this time, however, we had not been altogether +idle. We made several experiments in cooking the cocoa-nut, +most of which did not improve it. Then we removed our +goods, and took up our abode in the cave, but found the change so +bad that we returned gladly to the bower. Besides this we +bathed very frequently, and talked a great deal; at least Jack +and Peterkin did,—I listened. Among other useful +things, Jack, who was ever the most active and diligent, +converted about three inches of the hoop-iron into an excellent +knife. First he beat it quite flat with the axe. Then +he made a rude handle, and tied the hoop-iron to it with our +piece of whip-cord, and ground it to an edge on a piece of +sand-stone. When it was finished he used it to shape a +better handle, to which he fixed it with a strip of his cotton +handkerchief;—in which operation he had, as Peterkin +pointed out, torn off one of Lord Nelson’s noses. +However, the whip-cord, thus set free, was used by Peterkin as a +fishing line. He merely tied a piece of oyster to the end +of it. This the fish were allowed to swallow, and then they +were pulled quickly ashore. But as the line was very short +and we had no boat, the fish we caught were exceedingly +small.</p> + +<p>One day Peterkin came up from the beach, where he had been +angling, and said in a very cross tone, “I’ll tell +you what, Jack, I’m not going to be humbugged with catching +such contemptible things any longer. I want you to swim out +with me on your back, and let me fish in deep water!”</p> + +<p>“Dear me, Peterkin,” replied Jack, “I had no +idea you were taking the thing so much to heart, else I would +have got you out of that difficulty long ago. Let me +see,”—and Jack looked down at a piece of timber on +which he had been labouring, with a peculiar gaze of abstraction, +which he always assumed when trying to invent or discover +anything.</p> + +<p>“What say you to building a boat?” he inquired, +looking up hastily.</p> + +<p>“Take far too long,” was the reply; +“can’t be bothered waiting. I want to begin at +once!”</p> + +<p>Again Jack considered. “I have it!” he +cried. “We’ll fell a large tree and launch the +trunk of it in the water, so that when you want to fish +you’ve nothing to do but to swim out to it.”</p> + +<p>“Would not a small raft do better?” said I.</p> + +<p>“Much better; but we have no ropes to bind it together +with. Perhaps we may find something hereafter that will do +as well, but, in the meantime, let us try the tree.”</p> + +<p>This was agreed on, so we started off to a spot not far +distant, where we knew of a tree that would suit us, which grew +near the water’s edge. As soon as we reached it Jack +threw off his coat, and, wielding the axe with his sturdy arms, +hacked and hewed at it for a quarter of an hour without +stopping. Then he paused, and, while he sat down to rest, I +continued the work. Then Peterkin made a vigorous attack on +it, so that when Jack renewed his powerful blows, a few minutes +cutting brought it down with a terrible crash.</p> + +<p>“Hurrah! now for it,” cried Jack; “let us +off with its head.”</p> + +<p>So saying he began to cut through the stem again, at about six +yards from the thick end. This done, he cut three strong, +short poles or levers from the stout branches, with which to roll +the log down the beach into the sea; for, as it was nearly two +feet thick at the large end, we could not move it without such +helps. With the levers, however, we rolled it slowly into +the sea.</p> + +<p>Having been thus successful in launching our vessel, we next +shaped the levers into rude oars or paddles, and then attempted +to embark. This was easy enough to do; but, after seating +ourselves astride the log, it was with the utmost difficulty we +kept it from rolling round and plunging us into the water. +Not that we minded that much; but we preferred, if possible, to +fish in dry clothes. To be sure, our trousers were +necessarily wet, as our legs were dangling in the water on each +side of the log; but, as they could be easily dried, we did not +care. After half an hour’s practice, we became expert +enough to keep our balance pretty steadily. Then Peterkin +laid down his paddle, and having baited his line with a whole +oyster, dropt it into deep water.</p> + +<p>“Now, then, Jack,” said he, “be cautious; +steer clear o’ that sea-weed. There; that’s it; +gently, now, gently. I see a fellow at least a foot long +down there, coming to—ha! that’s it! Oh! +bother, he’s off.”</p> + +<p>“Did he bite?” said Jack, urging the log onwards a +little with his paddle.</p> + +<p>“Bite? ay! He took it into his mouth, but the +moment I began to haul he opened his jaws and let it out +again.”</p> + +<p>“Let him swallow it next time,” said Jack, +laughing at the melancholy expression of Peterkin’s +visage.</p> + +<p>“There he’s again,” cried Peterkin, his eyes +flashing with excitement. “Look out! Now +then! No! Yes! No! Why, the brute +<i>won’t</i> swallow it!”</p> + +<p>“Try to haul him up by the mouth, then,” cried +Jack. “Do it gently.”</p> + +<p>A heavy sigh and a look of blank despair showed that poor +Peterkin had tried and failed again.</p> + +<p>“Never mind, lad,” said Jack, in a voice of +sympathy; “we’ll move on, and offer it to some other +fish.” So saying, Jack plied his paddle; but scarcely +had he moved from the spot, when a fish with an enormous head and +a little body darted from under a rock and swallowed the bait at +once.</p> + +<p>“Got him this time,—that’s a fact!” +cried Peterkin, hauling in the line. “He’s +swallowed the bait right down to his tail, I declare. Oh +what a thumper!”</p> + +<p>As the fish came struggling to the surface, we leaned forward +to see it, and overbalanced the log. Peterkin threw his +arms round the fish’s neck; and, in another instant, we +were all floundering in the water!</p> + +<p>A shout of laughter burst from us as we rose to the surface +like three drowned rats, and seized hold of the log. We +soon recovered our position, and sat more warily, while Peterkin +secured the fish, which had well-nigh escaped in the midst of our +struggles. It was little worth having, however; but, as +Peterkin remarked, it was better than the smouts he had been +catching for the last two or three days; so we laid it on the log +before us, and having re-baited the line, dropt it in again for +another.</p> + +<p>Now, while we were thus intent upon our sport, our attention +was suddenly attracted by a ripple on the sea, just a few yards +away from us. Peterkin shouted to us to paddle in that +direction, as he thought it was a big fish, and we might have a +chance of catching it. But Jack, instead of complying, +said, in a deep, earnest tone of voice, which I never before +heard him use,—</p> + +<p>“Haul up your line, Peterkin; seize your paddle; +quick,—it’s a shark!”</p> + +<p>The horror with which we heard this may well be imagined, for +it must be remembered that our legs were hanging down in the +water, and we could not venture to pull them up without upsetting +the log. Peterkin instantly hauled up the line; and, +grasping his paddle, exerted himself to the utmost, while we also +did our best to make for shore. But we were a good way off, +and the log being, as I have before said, very heavy, moved but +slowly through the water. We now saw the shark quite +distinctly swimming round and round us, its sharp fin every now +and then protruding above the water. From its active and +unsteady motions, Jack knew it was making up its mind to attack +us, so he urged us vehemently to paddle for our lives, while he +himself set us the example. Suddenly he shouted “Look +out!—there he comes!” and in a second we saw the +monstrous fish dive close under us, and turn half over on his +side. But we all made a great commotion with our paddles, +which no doubt frightened it away for that time, as we saw it +immediately after circling round us as before.</p> + +<p>“Throw the fish to him,” cried Jack, in a quick, +suppressed voice; “we’ll make the shore in time yet +if we can keep him off for a few minutes.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin stopped one instant to obey the command, and then +plied his paddle again with all his might. No sooner had +the fish fallen on the water than we observed the shark to +sink. In another second we saw its white breast rising; for +sharks always turn over on their sides when about to seize their +prey, their mouths being not at the point of their heads like +those of other fish, but, as it were, under their chins. In +another moment his snout rose above the water,—his wide +jaws, armed with a terrific double row of teeth, appeared. +The dead fish was engulfed, and the shark sank out of +sight. But Jack was mistaken in supposing that it would be +satisfied. In a very few minutes it returned to us, and its +quick motions led us to fear that it would attack us at once.</p> + +<p>“Stop paddling,” cried Jack suddenly. +“I see it coming up behind us. Now, obey my orders +quickly. Our lives may depend on it Ralph. Peterkin, +do your best to <i>balance the log</i>. Don’t look +out for the shark. Don’t glance behind you. Do +nothing but balance the log.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p77b.jpg"> +<img alt="A dreadful adventure" src="images/p77s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>Peterkin and I instantly did as we were ordered, being only +too glad to do anything that afforded us a chance or a hope of +escape, for we had implicit confidence in Jack’s courage +and wisdom. For a few seconds, that seemed long minutes to +my mind, we sat thus silently; but I could not resist glancing +backward, despite the orders to the contrary. On doing so, +I saw Jack sitting rigid like a statue, with his paddle raised, +his lips compressed, and his eye-brows bent over his eyes, which +glared savagely from beneath them down into the water. I +also saw the shark, to my horror, quite close under the log, in +the act of darting towards Jack’s foot. I could +scarce suppress a cry on beholding this. In another moment +the shark rose. Jack drew his leg suddenly from the water, +and threw it over the log. The monster’s snout rubbed +against the log as it passed, and revealed its hideous jaws, into +which Jack instantly plunged the paddle, and thrust it down its +throat. So violent was the act that Jack rose to his feet +in performing it; the log was thereby rolled completely over, and +we were once more plunged into the water. We all rose, +spluttering and gasping, in a moment.</p> + +<p>“Now then, strike out for shore,” cried +Jack. “Here, Peterkin, catch hold of my collar, and +kick out with a will.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin did as he was desired, and Jack struck out with such +force that he cut through the water like a boat; while I, being +free from all encumbrance, succeeded in keeping up with +him. As we had by this time drawn pretty near to the shore, +a few minutes more sufficed to carry us into shallow water; and, +finally, we landed in safety, though very much exhausted, and not +a little frightened by our terrible adventure.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The beauties of the bottom of the sea tempt Peterkin to +dive—How he did it—More difficulties +overcome—The water garden—Curious creatures of the +sea—The tank—Candles missed very much, and the +candle-nut tree discovered—Wonderful account of +Peterkin’s first voyage—Cloth found growing on a +tree—A plan projected, and arms prepared for offence and +defence—A dreadful cry.</p> + +<p>Our encounter with the shark was the first great danger that +had befallen us since landing on this island, and we felt very +seriously affected by it, especially when we considered that we +had so often unwittingly incurred the same danger before while +bathing. We were now forced to take to fishing again in the +shallow water, until we should succeed in constructing a +raft. What troubled us most, however, was, that we were +compelled to forego our morning swimming excursions. We +did, indeed, continue to enjoy our bathe in the shallow water, +but Jack and I found that one great source of our enjoyment was +gone, when we could no longer dive down among the beautiful coral +groves at the bottom of the lagoon. We had come to be so +fond of this exercise, and to take such an interest in watching +the formations of coral and the gambols of the many beautiful +fish amongst the forests of red and green sea-weeds, that we had +become quite familiar with the appearance of the fish and the +localities that they chiefly haunted. We had also become +expert divers. But we made it a rule never to stay long +under water at a time. Jack told me that to do so often was +bad for the lungs, and, instead of affording us enjoyment, would +ere long do us a serious injury. So we never stayed at the +bottom as long as we might have done, but came up frequently to +the top for fresh air, and dived down again immediately. +Sometimes, when Jack happened to be in a humorous frame, he would +seat himself at the bottom of the sea on one of the brain corals, +as if he were seated on a large paddock-stool, and then make +faces at me, in order, if possible, to make me laugh under +water. At first, when he took me unawares, he nearly +succeeded, and I had to shoot to the surface in order to laugh; +but afterwards I became aware of his intentions, and, being +naturally of a grave disposition, I had no difficulty in +restraining myself. I used often to wonder how poor +Peterkin would have liked to be with us; and he sometimes +expressed much regret at being unable to join us. I used to +do my best to gratify him, poor fellow, by relating all the +wonders that we saw; but this, instead of satisfying, seemed only +to whet his curiosity the more, so one day we prevailed on him to +try to go down with us. But, although a brave boy in every +other way, Peterkin was very nervous in the water, and it was +with difficulty we got him to consent to be taken down, for he +could never have managed to push himself down to the bottom +without assistance. But no sooner had we pulled him down a +yard or so into the deep clear water, than he began to struggle +and kick violently, so we were forced to let him go, when he rose +out of the water like a cork, gave a loud gasp and a frightful +roar, and struck out for the land with the utmost possible +haste.</p> + +<p>Now, all this pleasure we were to forego, and when we thought +thereon, Jack and I felt very much depressed in our +spirits. I could see, also, that Peterkin grieved and +sympathized with us, for, when talking about this matter, he +refrained from jesting and bantering us upon it.</p> + +<p>As, however, a man’s difficulties usually set him upon +devising methods to overcome them, whereby he often discovers +better things than those he may have lost, so this our difficulty +induced us to think of searching for a large pool among the +rocks, where the water should be deep enough for diving yet so +surrounded by rocks as to prevent sharks from getting at +us. And such a pool we afterwards found, which proved to be +very much better than our most sanguine hopes anticipated. +It was situated not more than ten minutes’ walk from our +camp, and was in the form of a small deep bay or basin, the +entrance to which, besides being narrow, was so shallow that no +fish so large as a shark could get in, at least not unless he +should be a remarkably thin one.</p> + +<p>Inside of this basin, which we called our Water Garden, the +coral formations were much more wonderful, and the sea-weed +plants far more lovely and vividly coloured, than in the lagoon +itself. And the water was so clear and still, that, +although very deep, you could see the minutest object at the +bottom. Besides this, there was a ledge of rock which +overhung the basin at its deepest part, from which we could dive +pleasantly and whereon Peterkin could sit and see not only all +the wonders I had described to him, but also see Jack and me +creeping amongst the marine shrubbery at the bottom, like, +as—he expressed it,—“two great white +sea-monsters.” During these excursions of ours to the +bottom of the sea, we began to get an insight into the manners +and customs of its inhabitants, and to make discoveries of +wonderful things, the like of which we never before +conceived. Among other things, we were deeply interested +with the operations of the little coral insect which, I was +informed by Jack, is supposed to have entirely constructed many +of the numerous islands in Pacific Ocean. And, certainly, +when we considered the great reef which these insects had formed +round the island on which we were cast, and observed their +ceaseless activity in building their myriad cells, it did at +first seem as if this might be true; but then, again, when I +looked at the mountains of the island, and reflected that there +were thousands of such, many of them much higher, in the South +Seas, I doubted that there must be some mistake here. But +more of this hereafter.</p> + +<p>I also became much taken up with the manners and appearance of +the anemones, and star-fish, and crabs, and sea-urchins, and +such-like creatures; and was not content with watching those I +saw during my dives in the Water Garden, but I must needs scoop +out a hole in the coral rock close to it, which I filled with +salt water, and stocked with sundry specimens of anemones and +shell-fish, in order to watch more closely how they were in the +habit of passing their time. Our burning-glass also now +became a great treasure to me, as it enabled me to magnify, and +so to perceive more clearly the forms and actions of these +curious creatures of the deep.</p> + +<p>Having now got ourselves into a very comfortable condition, we +began to talk of a project which we had long had in +contemplation,—namely, to travel entirely round the island; +in order, first, to ascertain whether it contained any other +productions which might be useful to us; and, second, to see +whether there might be any place more convenient and suitable for +our permanent residence than that on which we were now +encamped. Not that we were in any degree dissatisfied with +it; on the contrary, we entertained quite a home-feeling to our +bower and its neighbourhood; but if a better place did exist, +there was no reason why we should not make use of it. At +any rate, it would be well to know of its existence.</p> + +<p>We had much earnest talk over this matter. But Jack +proposed that, before undertaking such an excursion, we should +supply ourselves with good defensive arms, for, as we intended +not only to go round all the shore, but to ascend most of the +valleys, before returning home, we should be likely to meet in +with, he would not say dangers, but, at least, with everything +that existed on the island, whatever that might be.</p> + +<p>“Besides,” said Jack, “it won’t do for +us to live on cocoa-nuts and oysters always. No doubt they +are very excellent in their way, but I think a little animal +food, now and then, would be agreeable as well as good for us; +and as there are many small birds among the trees, some of which +are probably very good to eat, I think it would be a capital plan +to make bows and arrows, with which we could easily knock them +over.”</p> + +<p>“First rate!” cried Peterkin. “You +will make the bows, Jack, and I’ll try my hand at the +arrows. The fact is, I’m quite tired of throwing +stones at the birds. I began the very day we landed, I +think, and have persevered up to the present time, but I’ve +never hit anything yet.”</p> + +<p>“You forget,” said I, “you hit me one day on +the shin.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, true,” replied Peterkin, “and a +precious shindy you kicked up in consequence. But you were +at least four yards away from the impudent paroquet I aimed at; +so you see what a horribly bad shot I am.”</p> + +<p>“But,” said I, “Jack, you cannot make three +bows and arrows before to-morrow, and would it not be a pity to +waste time, now that we have made up our minds to go on this +expedition? Suppose that you make one bow and arrow for +yourself, and we can take our clubs?”</p> + +<p>“That’s true, Ralph. The day is pretty far +advanced, and I doubt if I can make even one bow before +dark. To be sure I might work by fire-light, after the sun +goes down.”</p> + +<p>We had, up to this time, been in the habit of going to bed +with the sun, as we had no pressing call to work o’ nights; +and, indeed, our work during the day was usually hard +enough,—what between fishing, and improving our bower, and +diving in the Water Garden, and rambling in the woods; so that, +when night came, we were usually very glad to retire to our +beds. But now that we had a desire to work at night, we +felt a wish for candles.</p> + +<p>“Won’t a good blazing fire give you light +enough?” inquired Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Jack, “quite enough; but then +it will give us a great deal more than enough of heat in this +warm climate of ours.”</p> + +<p>“True,” said Peterkin; “I forgot that. +It would roast us.”</p> + +<p>“Well, as you’re always doing that at any +rate,” remarked Jack, “we could scarcely call it a +change. But the fact is, I’ve been thinking over this +subject before. There is a certain nut growing in these +islands which is called the candle-nut, because the natives use +it instead of candles, and I know all about it, and how to +prepare it for burning—”</p> + +<p>“Then why don’t you do it?” interrupted +Peterkin. “Why have you kept us in the dark so long, +you vile philosopher?”</p> + +<p>“Because,” said Jack, “I have not seen the +tree yet, and I’m not sure that I should know either the +tree or the nuts if I did see them. You see, I forget the +description.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s just the way with me,” said +Peterkin with a deep sigh. “I never could keep in my +mind for half an hour the few descriptions I ever attempted to +remember. The very first voyage I ever made was caused by +my mistaking a description, or forgetting it, which is the same +thing. And a horrible voyage it was. I had to fight +with the captain the whole way out, and made the homeward voyage +by swimming!”</p> + +<p>“Come, Peterkin,” said I, “you can’t +get even <i>me</i> to believe that.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not, but it’s true, +notwithstanding,” returned Peterkin, pretending to be hurt +at my doubting his word.</p> + +<p>“Let us hear how it happened,” said Jack, while a +good-natured smile overspread his face.</p> + +<p>“Well, you must know,” began Peterkin, “that +the very day before I went to sea, I was greatly taken up with a +game at hockey, which I was playing with my old school-fellows +for the last time before leaving them. You see I was young +then, Ralph.” Peterkin gazed, in an abstracted and +melancholy manner, out to sea! “Well, in the midst of +the game, my uncle, who had taken all the bother and trouble of +getting me bound ’prentice and rigged out, came and took me +aside, and told me that he was called suddenly away from home, +and would not be able to see me aboard, as he had intended. +‘However,’ said he, ‘the captain knows you are +coming, so that’s not of much consequence; but as +you’ll have to find the ship yourself, you must remember +her name and description. D’ye hear, +boy?’ I certainly did hear, but I’m afraid I +did not understand, for my mind was so taken up with the game, +which I saw my side was losing, that I began to grow impatient, +and the moment my uncle finished his description of the ship, and +bade me good-bye, I bolted back to my game, with only a confused +idea of three masts, and a green painted tafferel, and a gilt +figure-head of Hercules with his club at the bow. Next day +I was so much cast down with everybody saying good-bye, and a lot +o’ my female friends cryin’ horribly over me, that I +did not start for the harbour, where the ship was lying among a +thousand others, till it was almost too late. So I had to +run the whole way. When I reached the pier, there were so +many masts, and so much confusion, that I felt quite +humblebumbled in my faculties. ‘Now,’ said I to +myself, ‘Peterkin, you’re in a fix.’ Then +I fancied I saw a gilt figure-head and three masts, belonging to +a ship just about to start; so I darted on board, but speedily +jumped on shore again, when I found that two of the masts +belonged to another vessel, and the figurehead to a third! +At last I caught sight of what I made sure was it,—a fine +large vessel just casting off her moorings. The tafferel +was green. Three masts,—yes, that must be +it,—and the gilt figure-head of Hercules. To be sure +it had a three-pronged pitchfork in its hand instead of a club; +but that might be my uncle’s mistake; or perhaps Hercules +sometimes varied his weapons. ‘Cast off!’ +roared a voice from the quarter-deck. ‘Hold +on!’ cried I, rushing frantically through the crowd. +‘Hold on! hold on!’ repeated some of the bystanders, +while the men at the ropes delayed for a minute. This threw +the captain into a frightful rage; for some of his friends had +come down to see him off, and having his orders contradicted so +flatly was too much for him. However, the delay was +sufficient. I took a race and a good leap; the ropes were +cast off; the steam-tug gave a puff, and we started. +Suddenly the captain was up to me: ‘Where did you come +from, you scamp, and what do you want here?’</p> + +<p>“‘Please, sir,’ said I, touching my cap, +‘I’m you’re new ’prentice come +aboard.’</p> + +<p>“‘New ’Prentice,’ said he, stamping, +‘I’ve got no new ’prentice. My boys are +all aboard already. This is a trick, you young +blackguard. You’ve run away, you have;’ and the +captain stamped about the deck and swore dreadfully; for, you +see, the thought of having to stop the ship and lower a boat and +lose half an hour, all for the slake of sending a small boy +ashore, seemed to make him very angry. Besides, it was +blowin’ fresh outside the harbour, so that, to have let the +steamer alongside to put me into it was no easy job. Just +as we were passing the pier-head, where several boats were rowing +into harbour, the captain came up to me,—</p> + +<p>“‘You’ve run away, you blackguard,’ he +said, giving me a box on the ear.</p> + +<p>“‘No I haven’t,’ said I, angrily; for +the box was by no means a light one.</p> + +<p>“Hark’ee, boy, can you swim?’</p> + +<p>“‘Yes,’ said I.</p> + +<p>“‘Then do it,’ and, seizing me by my +trousers and the nape of my neck, he tossed me over the side into +the sea. The fellows in the boats at the end of the pier, +backed their oars on seeing this; but observing that I could +swim, they allowed me to make the best of my way to the +pier-head. So, you see, Ralph, that I really did swim my +first homeward voyage.”</p> + +<p>Jack laughed and patted Peterkin on the shoulder. +“But tell us about the candle-nut tree,” said I; +“you were talking about it.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said Jack, “but I fear I can +remember little about it. I believe the nut is about the +size of a walnut; and I think that the leaves are white, but I am +not sure.”</p> + +<p>“Eh! ha! hum!” exclaimed Peterkin, “I saw a +tree answering to that description this very day.”</p> + +<p>“Did you?” cried Jack. “Is it far from +this?”</p> + +<p>“No, not half a mile.”</p> + +<p>“Then lead me to it,” said Jack, seizing his +axe.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes we were all three pushing through the +underwood of the forest, headed by Peterkin.</p> + +<p>We soon came to the tree in question, which, after Jack had +closely examined it, we concluded must be the candle-nut +tree. Its leaves were of a beautiful silvery white, and +formed a fine contrast to the dark-green foliage of the +surrounding trees. We immediately filled our pockets with +the nuts, after which Jack said,—</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin, climb that cocoa-nut tree and cut me one +of the long branches.”</p> + +<p>This was soon done, but it cost some trouble, for the stem was +very high, and as Peterkin usually pulled nuts from the younger +trees, he was not much accustomed to climbing the high +ones. The leaf or branch was a very large one, and we were +surprised at its size and strength. Viewed from a little +distance, the cocoa-nut tree seems to be a tall, straight stem, +without a single branch except at the top, where there is a tuft +of feathery-looking leaves, that seem to wave like soft plumes in +the wind. But when we saw one of these leaves or branches +at our feet, we found it to be a strong stalk, about fifteen feet +long, with a number of narrow, pointed leaflets ranged +alternately on each side. But what seemed to us the most +wonderful thing about it was a curious substance resembling +cloth, which was wrapped round the thick end of the stalk, where +it had been cut from the tree. Peterkin told us that he had +the greatest difficulty in separating the branch from the stem, +on account of this substance, as it was wrapped quite round the +tree, and, he observed, round all the other branches, thus +forming a strong support to the large leaves while exposed to +high winds. When I call this substance cloth I do not +exaggerate. Indeed, with regard to all the things I saw +during my eventful career in the South Seas, I have been +exceedingly careful not to exaggerate, or in any way to mislead +or deceive my readers. This cloth, I say, was remarkably +like to coarse brown cotton cloth. It had a seam or fibre +down the centre of it, from which diverged other fibres, about +the size of a bristle. There were two layers of these +fibres, very long and tough, the one layer crossing the other +obliquely, and the whole was cemented together with a still finer +fibrous and adhesive substance. When we regarded it +attentively, we could with difficulty believe that it had not +been woven by human hands. This remarkable piece of cloth +we stripped carefully off, and found it to be above two feet +long, by a foot broad, and we carried it home with us as a great +prize.</p> + +<p>Jack now took one of the leaflets, and, cutting out the +central spine or stalk, hurried back with it to our camp. +Having made a small fire, he baked the nuts slightly, and then +pealed off the husks. After this he wished to bore a hole +in them, which, not having anything better at hand at the time, +he did with the point of our useless pencil-case. Then he +strung them on the cocoa-nut spine, and on putting a light to the +topmost nut, we found to our joy that it burned with a clear, +beautiful flame; upon seeing which, Peterkin sprang up and danced +round the fire for at least five minutes in the excess of his +satisfaction.</p> + +<p>“Now lads,” said Jack, extinguishing our candle, +the sun will set in an hour, so we have no time to lose. +“I shall go and cut a young tree to make my bow out of, and +you had better each of you go and select good strong sticks for +clubs, and we’ll set to work at them after dark.”</p> + +<p>So saying he shouldered his axe and went off, followed by +Peterkin, while I took up the piece of newly discovered cloth, +and fell to examining its structure. So engrossed was I in +this that I was still sitting in the same attitude and occupation +when my companions returned.</p> + +<p>“I told you so!” cried Peterkin, with a loud +laugh. “Oh, Ralph, you’re incorrigible. +See, there’s a club for you. I was sure, when we left +you looking at that bit of stuff, that we would find you poring +over it when we came back, so I just cut a club for you as well +as for myself.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, Peterkin,” said I. “It was +kind of you to do that, instead of scolding me for a lazy fellow, +as I confess I deserve.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! as to that,” returned Peterkin, +“I’ll blow you up yet, if you wish it—only it +would be of no use if I did, for you’re a perfect +mule!”</p> + +<p>As it was now getting dark we lighted our candle, and placing +it in a holder made of two crossing branches, inside of our +bower, we seated ourselves on our leafy beds and began to +work.</p> + +<p>“I intend to appropriate the bow for my own use,” +said Jack, chipping the piece of wood he had brought with his +axe. “I used to be a pretty fair shot once. But +what’s that you’re doing?” he added, looking at +Peterkin, who had drawn the end of a long pole into the tent, and +was endeavouring to fit a small piece of the hoop-iron to the end +of it.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to enlist into the Lancers,” +answered Peterkin. “You see, Jack, I find the club +rather an unwieldy instrument for my delicately-formed muscles, +and I flatter myself I shall do more execution with a +spear.”</p> + +<p>“Well, if length constitutes power,” said Jack, +“you’ll certainly be invincible.”</p> + +<p>The pole which Peterkin had cut was full twelve feet long, +being a very strong but light and tough young tree, which merely +required thinning at the butt to be a serviceable weapon.</p> + +<p>“That’s a very good idea,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Which—this?” inquired Peterkin, pointing to +the spear.</p> + +<p>“Yes;” I replied.</p> + +<p>“Humph!” said he; “you’d find it a +pretty tough and matter-of-fact idea, if you had it stuck through +your gizzard, old boy!”</p> + +<p>“I mean the idea of making it is a good one,” said +I, laughing. “And, now I think of it, I’ll +change my plan, too. I don’t think much of a club, so +I’ll make me a sling out of this piece of cloth. I +used to be very fond of slinging, ever since I read of David +slaying Goliath the Philistine, and I was once thought to be +expert at it.”</p> + +<p>So I set to work to manufacture a sling. For a long time +we all worked very busily without speaking. At length +Peterkin looked up: “I say, Jack, I’m sorry to say I +must apply to you for another strip of your handkerchief, to tie +on this rascally head with. It’s pretty well torn at +any rate, so you won’t miss it.”</p> + +<p>Jack proceeded to comply with this request when Peterkin +suddenly laid his hand on his arm and arrested him.</p> + +<p>“Hist, man,” said he, “be tender; you should +never be needlessly cruel if you can help it. Do try to +shave past Lord Nelson’s mouth without tearing it, if +possible! Thanks. There are plenty more handkerchiefs +on the cocoa-nut trees.”</p> + +<p>Poor Peterkin! with what pleasant feelings I recall and record +his jests and humorous sayings now!</p> + +<p>While we were thus engaged, we were startled by a distant but +most strange and horrible cry. It seemed to come from the +sea, but was so far away that we could not clearly distinguish +its precise direction. Rushing out of our bower, we +hastened down to the beach and stayed to listen. Again it +came quite loud and distinct on the night air,—a prolonged, +hideous cry, something like the braying of an ass. The moon +had risen, and we could see the islands in and beyond the lagoon +quite plainly, but there was no object visible to account for +such a cry. A strong gust of wind was blowing from the +point whence the sound came, but this died away while we were +gazing out to sea.</p> + +<p>“What can it be?” said Peterkin, in a low whisper, +while we all involuntarily crept closer to each other.</p> + +<p>“Do you know,” said Jack, “I have heard that +mysterious sound twice before, but never so loud as +to-night. Indeed it was so faint that I thought I must have +merely fancied it, so, as I did not wish to alarm you, I said +nothing about it.”</p> + +<p>We listened for a long time for the sound again, but as it did +not come, we returned to the bower and resumed our work.</p> + +<p>“Very strange,” said Peterkin, quite +gravely. “Do you believe in ghosts, Ralph?”</p> + +<p>“No,” I answered, “I do not. +Nevertheless I must confess that strange, unaccountable sounds, +such as we have just heard, make me feel a little +uneasy.”</p> + +<p>“What say you to it, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“I neither believe in ghosts nor feel uneasy,” he +replied. “I never saw a ghost myself, and I never met +with any one who had; and I have generally found that strange and +unaccountable things have almost always been accounted for, and +found to be quite simple, on close examination. I certainly +can’t imagine what <i>that</i> sound is; but I’m +quite sure I shall find out before long,—and if it’s +a ghost I’ll—”</p> + +<p>“Eat it,” cried Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I’ll eat it! Now, then, my bow and two +arrows are finished; so if you’re ready we had better turn +in.”</p> + +<p>By this time Peterkin had thinned down his spear and tied an +iron point very cleverly to the end of it; I had formed a sling, +the lines of which were composed of thin strips of the cocoa-nut +cloth, plaited; and Jack had made a stout bow, nearly five feet +long, with two arrows, feathered with two or three large plumes +which some bird had dropt. They had no barbs, but Jack said +that if arrows were well feathered, they did not require iron +points, but would fly quite well if merely sharpened at the +point; which I did not know before.</p> + +<p>“A feathered arrow without a barb,” said he, +“is a good weapon, but a barbed arrow without feathers is +utterly useless.”</p> + +<p>The string of the bow was formed of our piece of whip-cord, +part of which, as he did not like to cut it, was rolled round the +bow.</p> + +<p>Although thus prepared for a start on the morrow, we thought +it wise to exercise ourselves a little in the use of our weapons +before starting, so we spent the whole of the next day in +practising. And it was well we did so, for we found that +our arms were very imperfect, and that we were far from perfect +in the use of them. First, Jack found that the bow was much +too strong, and he had to thin it. Also the spear was much +too heavy, and so had to be reduced in thickness, although +nothing would induce Peterkin to have it shortened. My +sling answered very well, but I had fallen so much out of +practice that my first stone knocked off Peterkin’s hat, +and narrowly missed making a second Goliath of him. +However, after having spent the whole day in diligent practice, +we began to find some of our former expertness returning—at +least Jack and I did. As for Peterkin, being naturally a +neat-handed boy, he soon handled his spear well, and could run +full tilt at a cocoa nut, and hit it with great precision once +out of every five times.</p> + +<p>But I feel satisfied that we owed much of our rapid success to +the unflagging energy of Jack, who insisted that, since we had +made him Captain, we should obey him; and he kept us at work from +morning till night, perseveringly, at the same thing. +Peterkin wished very much to run about and stick his spear into +everything he passed; but Jack put up a cocoa nut, and would not +let him leave off running at that for a moment, except when he +wanted to rest. We laughed at Jack for this, but we were +both convinced that it did us much good.</p> + +<p>That night we examined and repaired our arms ere we lay down +to rest, although we were much fatigued, in order that we might +be in readiness to set out on our expedition at daylight on the +following morning.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Prepare for a journey round the island—Sagacious +reflections—Mysterious appearances and startling +occurrences.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had the sun shot its first ray across the bosom of +the broad Pacific, when Jack sprang to his feet, and, hallooing +in Peterkin’s ear to awaken him, ran down the beach to take +his customary dip in the sea. We did not, as was our wont, +bathe that morning in our Water Garden, but, in order to save +time, refreshed ourselves in the shallow water just opposite the +bower. Our breakfast was also despatched without loss of +time, and in less than an hour afterwards all our preparations +for the journey were completed.</p> + +<p>In addition to his ordinary dress, Jack tied a belt of +cocoa-nut cloth round his waist, into which he thrust the +axe. I was also advised to put on a belt and carry a short +cudgel or bludgeon in it; for, as Jack truly remarked, the sling +would be of little use if we should chance to come to close +quarters with any wild animal. As for Peterkin, +notwithstanding that he carried such a long, and I must add, +frightful-looking spear over his shoulder, we could not prevail +on him to leave his club behind; “for,” said he, +“a spear at close quarters is not worth a +button.” I must say that it seemed to me that the +club was, to use his own style of language, not worth a +button-hole; for it was all knotted over at the head, something +like the club which I remember to have observed in picture-books +of Jack the Giant Killer, besides being so heavy that he required +to grasp it with both hands in order to wield it at all. +However, he took it with him, and, in this manner we set out upon +our travels.</p> + +<p>We did not consider it necessary to carry any food with us, as +we knew that wherever we went we should be certain to fall in +with cocoa-nut trees; having which, we were amply supplied, as +Peterkin said, with meat and drink and +pocket-handkerchiefs! I took the precaution, however, to +put the burning-glass into my pocket, lest we should want +fire.</p> + +<p>The morning was exceeding lovely. It was one of that +very still and peaceful sort which made the few noises that we +heard seem to be <i>quiet</i> noises. I know no other way +of expressing this idea. Noises which so far from +interrupting the universal tranquillity of earth, sea, and +sky—rather tended to reveal to us how quiet the world +around us really was. Such sounds as I refer to were, the +peculiarly melancholy—yet, it seemed to me, +cheerful—plaint of sea-birds floating on the glassy water, +or sailing in the sky, also the subdued twittering of little +birds among the bushes, the faint ripples on the beach, and the +solemn boom of the surf upon the distant coral reef. We +felt very glad in our hearts as we walked along the sands side by +side. For my part, I felt so deeply overjoyed, that I was +surprised at my own sensations, and fell into a reverie upon the +causes of happiness. I came to the conclusion that a state +of profound peace and repose, both in regard to outward objects +and within the soul, is the happiest condition in which man can +be placed; for, although I had many a time been most joyful and +happy when engaged in bustling, energetic, active pursuits or +amusements, I never found that such joy or satisfaction was so +deep or so pleasant to reflect upon as that which I now +experienced. And I was the more confirmed in this opinion +when I observed, and, indeed, was told by himself, that +Peterkin’s happiness was also very great; yet he did not +express this by dancing, as was his wont, nor did he give so much +as a single shout, but walked quietly between us with his eye +sparkling, and a joyful smile upon his countenance. My +reader must not suppose that I thought all this in the clear and +methodical manner in which I have set it down here. These +thoughts did, indeed, pass through my mind, but they did so in a +very confused and indefinite manner, for I was young at that +time, and not much given to deep reflections. Neither did I +consider that the peace whereof I write is not to be found in +this world—at least in its perfection, although I have +since learned that by religion a man may attain to a very great +degree of it.</p> + +<p>I have said that Peterkin walked along the sands between +us. We had two ways of walking together about our +island. When we travelled through the woods, we always did +so in single file, as by this method we advanced with greater +facility, the one treading in the other’s footsteps. +In such cases Jack always took the lead, Peterkin followed, and I +brought up the rear. But when we travelled along the sands, +which extended almost in an unbroken line of glistening white +round the island, we marched abreast, as we found this method +more sociable, and every way more pleasant. Jack, being the +tallest, walked next the sea, and Peterkin marched between us, as +by this arrangement either of us could talk to him or he to us, +while if Jack and I happened to wish to converse together, we +could conveniently do so over Peterkin’s head. +Peterkin used to say, in reference to this arrangement, that had +he been as tall as either of us, our order of march might have +been the same, for, as Jack often used to scold him for letting +everything we said to him pass in at one ear and out at the +other, his head could of course form no interruption to our +discourse.</p> + +<p>We were now fairly started. Half a mile’s walk +conveyed us round a bend in the land which shut out our bower +from view, and for some time we advanced at a brisk pace without +speaking, though our eyes were not idle, but noted everything, in +the woods, on the shore, or in the sea, that was +interesting. After passing the ridge of land that formed +one side of our valley—the Valley of the Wreck—we +beheld another small vale lying before us in all the luxuriant +loveliness of tropical vegetation. We had, indeed, seen it +before from the mountain-top, but we had no idea that it would +turn out to be so much more lovely when we were close to +it. We were about to commence the exploration of this +valley, when Peterkin stopped us, and directed our attention to a +very remarkable appearance in advance along the shore.</p> + +<p>“What’s yon, think you?” said he, levelling +his spear, as if he expected an immediate attack from the object +in question, though it was full half a mile distant.</p> + +<p>As he spoke, there appeared a white column above the rocks, as +if of steam or spray. It rose upwards to a height of +several feet, and then disappeared. Had this been near the +sea, we would not have been so greatly surprised, as it might in +that case have been the surf, for at this part of the coast the +coral reef approached so near to the island that in some parts it +almost joined it. There was therefore no lagoon between, +and the heavy surf of the ocean beat almost up to the +rocks. But this white column appeared about fifty yards +inland. The rocks at the place were rugged, and they +stretched across the sandy beach into the sea. Scarce had +we ceased expressing our surprise at this sight, when another +column flew upwards for a few seconds, not far from the spot +where the first had been seen, and disappeared; and so, at long +irregular intervals, these strange sights recurred. We were +now quite sure that the columns were watery or composed of spray, +but what caused them we could not guess, so we determined to go +and see.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes we gained the spot, which was very rugged and +precipitous, and, moreover, quite damp with the falling of the +spray. We had much ado to pass over dry-shod. The +ground also was full of holes here and there. Now, while we +stood anxiously waiting for the re-appearance of these +water-spouts, we heard a low, rumbling sound near us, which +quickly increased to a gargling and hissing noise, and a moment +afterwards a thick spout of water burst upwards from a hole in +the rock, and spouted into the air with much violence, and so +close to where Jack and I were standing that it nearly touched +us. We sprang to one side, but not before a cloud of spray +descended, and drenched us both to the skin.</p> + +<p>Peterkin, who was standing farther off, escaped with a few +drops, and burst into an uncontrollable fit of laughter on +beholding our miserable plight.</p> + +<p>“Mind your eye!” he shouted eagerly, “there +goes another!” The words were scarcely out of his +mouth when there came up a spout from another hole, which served +us exactly in the same manner as before.</p> + +<p>Peterkin now shrieked with laughter; but his merriment was +abruptly put a stop to by the gurgling noise occurring close to +where he stood.</p> + +<p>“Where’ll it spout this time, I wonder?” he +said, looking about with some anxiety, and preparing to +run. Suddenly there came a loud hiss or snort; a fierce +spout of water burst up between Peterkin’s legs, blew him +off his feet, enveloped him in its spray, and hurled him to the +ground. He fell with so much violence that we feared he +must have broken some of his bones, and ran anxiously to his +assistance; but fortunately he had fallen on a clump of tangled +herbage, in which he lay sprawling in a most deplorable +condition.</p> + +<p>It was now our turn to laugh; but as we were not yet quite +sure that he was unhurt, and as we knew not when or where the +next spout might arise, we assisted him hastily to jump up and +hurry from the spot.</p> + +<p>I may here add, that although I am quite certain that the +spout of water was very strong, and that it blew Peterkin +completely off his legs, I am not quite certain of the exact +height to which it lifted him, being somewhat startled by the +event, and blinded partially by the spray, so that my power of +observation was somewhat impaired for the moment.</p> + +<p>“What’s to be done now?” inquired Peterkin +ruefully.</p> + +<p>“Make a fire, lad, and dry ourselves,” replied +Jack.</p> + +<p>“And here is material ready to our hand,” said I, +picking up a dried branch of a tree, as we hurried up to the +woods.</p> + +<p>In about an hour after this mishap our clothes were again +dried. While they were hanging up before the fire, we +walked down to the beach, and soon observed that these curious +spouts took place immediately after the fall of a huge wave, +never before it; and, moreover, that the spouts did not take +place excepting when the billow was an extremely large one. +From this we concluded that there must be a subterraneous channel +in the rock into which the water was driven by the larger waves, +and finding no way of escape except through these small holes, +was thus forced up violently through them. At any rate, we +could not conceive any other reason for these strange +water-spouts, and as this seemed a very simple and probable one, +we forthwith adopted it.</p> + +<p>“I say, Ralph, what’s that in the water? is it a +shark?” said Jack, just as we were about to quit the +place.</p> + +<p>I immediately ran to the overhanging ledge of rock, from which +he was looking down into the sea, and bent over it. There I +saw a very faint pale object of a greenish colour, which seemed +to move slightly while I looked at it.</p> + +<p>“It’s like a fish of some sort,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Hallo, Peterkin!” cried Jack, “fetch your +spear; here’s work for it.”</p> + +<p>But when we tried to reach the object, the spear proved to be +too short.</p> + +<p>“There, now,” said Peterkin with a sneer, +“you were always telling me it was too long.”</p> + +<p>Jack now drove the spear forcibly towards the object, and let +go his hold; but, although it seemed to be well aimed, he must +have missed, for the handle soon rose again; and when the spear +was drawn up, there was the pale green object in exactly the same +spot, slowly moving its tail.</p> + +<p>“Very odd,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>But although it was undoubtedly very odd, and, although Jack +and all of us plunged the spear at it repeatedly, we could +neither hit it nor drive it away, so we were compelled to +continue our journey without discovering what it was. I was +very much perplexed at this strange appearance in the water, and +could not get it out of my mind for a long time afterwards. +However, I quieted myself by resolving that I would pay a visit +to it again at some more convenient season.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Make discovery of many excellent roots and fruits—The +resources of the Coral Island gradually unfolded—The +banian-tree—Another tree which is supported by natural +planks—Water-fowl found—A very remarkable discovery, +and a very peculiar murder—We luxuriate on the fat of the +land.</p> + +<p>Our examination of the little valley proved to be altogether +most satisfactory. We found in it not only similar trees to +those we had already seen in our own valley, but also one or two +others of a different species. We had also the satisfaction +of discovering a peculiar vegetable, which Jack concluded must +certainly be that of which he had read as being very common among +the South Sea islanders, and which was named <i>taro</i>. +Also we found a large supply of yams, and another root like a +potato in appearance. As these were all quite new to us, we +regarded our lot as a most fortunate one, in being thus cast on +an island which was so prolific and so well stored with all the +necessaries of life. Long afterwards we found out that this +island of ours was no better in these respects than thousands of +other islands in those seas. Indeed, many of them were much +richer and more productive; but that did not render us the less +grateful for our present good fortune. We each put one of +these roots in our pocket, intending to use them for our supper; +of which more hereafter. We also saw many beautiful birds +here, and traces of some four-footed animal again. +Meanwhile the sun began to descend, so we returned to the shore, +and pushed on round the spouting rocks into the next +valley. This was that valley of which I have spoken as +running across the entire island. It was by far the largest +and most beautiful that we had yet looked upon. Here were +trees of every shape and size and hue which it is possible to +conceive of, many of which we had not seen in the other valleys; +for, the stream in this valley being larger, and the mould much +richer than in the Valley of the Wreck, it was clothed with a +more luxuriant growth of trees and plants. Some trees were +dark glossy green, others of a rich and warm hue, contrasting +well with those of a pale light green, which were everywhere +abundant. Among these we recognised the broad dark heads of +the bread-fruit, with its golden fruit; the pure, silvery foliage +of the candle-nut, and several species which bore a strong +resemblance to the pine; while here and there, in groups and in +single trees, rose the tall forms of the cocoa-nut palms, +spreading abroad, and waving their graceful plumes high above all +the rest, as if they were a superior race of stately giants +keeping guard over these luxuriant forests. Oh! it was a +most enchanting scene, and I thanked God for having created such +delightful spots for the use of man.</p> + +<p>Now, while we were gazing around us in silent admiration, Jack +uttered an exclamation of surprise, and, pointing to an object a +little to one side of us, said,—</p> + +<p>“That’s a banian-tree.”</p> + +<p>“And what’s a banian-tree?” inquired +Peterkin, as we walked towards it.</p> + +<p>“A very curious one, as you shall see presently,” +replied Jack. “It is called the <i>aoa</i> here, if I +recollect rightly, and has a wonderful peculiarity about +it. What an enormous one it is, to be sure.”</p> + +<p>“<i>It</i>!” repeated Peterkin; “why, there +are dozens of banians here! What do you mean by talking bad +grammar? Is your philosophy deserting you, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“There is but one tree here of this kind,” +returned Jack, “as you will perceive if you will examine +it.” And, sure enough, we did find that what we had +supposed was a forest of trees was in reality only one. Its +bark was of a light colour, and had a shining appearance, the +leaves being lance-shaped, small, and of a beautiful +pea-green. But the wonderful thing about it was, that the +branches, which grew out from the stem horizontally, sent down +long shoots or fibres to the ground, which, taking root, had +themselves become trees, and were covered with bark like the tree +itself. Many of these fibres had descended from the +branches at various distances, and thus supported them on natural +pillars, some of which were so large and strong, that it was not +easy at first to distinguish the offspring from the parent +stem. The fibres were of all sizes and in all states of +advancement, from the pillars we have just mentioned to small +cords which hung down and were about to take root, and thin brown +threads still far from the ground, which swayed about with every +motion of wind. In short, it seemed to us that, if there +were only space afforded to it, this single tree would at length +cover the whole island.</p> + +<p>Shortly after this we came upon another remarkable tree, +which, as its peculiar formation afterwards proved extremely +useful to us, merits description. It was a splendid +chestnut, but its proper name Jack did not know. However, +there were quantities of fine nuts upon it, some of which we put +in our pockets. But its stem was the wonderful part of +it. It rose to about twelve feet without a branch, and was +not of great thickness; on the contrary, it was remarkably +slender for the size of the tree; but, to make up for this, there +were four or five wonderful projections in this stem, which I +cannot better describe than by asking the reader to suppose that +five planks of two inches thick and three feet broad had been +placed round the trunk of the tree, with their <i>edges</i> +closely fixed to it, from the ground up to the branches, and that +these planks had been covered over with the bark of the tree and +incorporated with it. In short, they were just natural +buttresses, without which the stem could not have supported its +heavy and umbrageous top. We found these chestnuts to be +very numerous. They grew chiefly on the banks of the +stream, and were of all sizes.</p> + +<p>While we were examining a small tree of this kind, Jack +chipped a piece off a buttress with his axe, and found the wood +to be firm and easily cut. He then struck the axe into it +with all his force, and very soon split it off close to the tree, +first, however, having cut it across transversely above and +below. By this means he satisfied himself that we could now +obtain short planks, as it were all ready sawn, of any size and +thickness that we desired; which was a very great discovery +indeed, perhaps the most important we had yet made.</p> + +<p>We now wended our way back to the coast, intending to encamp +near the beach, as we found that the mosquitoes were troublesome +in the forest. On our way we could not help admiring the +birds which flew and chirped around us. Among them we +observed a pretty kind of paroquet, with a green body, a blue +head, and a red breast; also a few beautiful turtledoves, and +several flocks of wood-pigeons. The hues of many of these +birds were extremely vivid,—bright green, blue, and +scarlet, being the prevailing tints. We made several +attempts throughout the day to bring down one of these, both with +the bow and the sling,—not for mere sport, but to ascertain +whether they were good for food. But we invariably missed, +although once or twice we were very near hitting. As +evening drew on, however, a flock of pigeons flew past. I +slung a stone into the midst of them at a venture, and had the +good fortune to kill one. We were startled, soon after, by +a loud whistling noise above our heads; and on looking up, saw a +flock of wild ducks making for the coast. We watched these, +and, observing where they alighted, followed them up until we +came upon a most lovely blue lake, not more than two hundred +yards long, imbosomed in verdant trees. Its placid surface, +which reflected every leaf and stem, as if in a mirror, was +covered with various species of wild ducks, feeding among the +sedges and broad-leaved water-plants which floated on it, while +numerous birds like water-hens ran to and fro most busily on its +margin. These all with one accord flew tumultuously away +the instant we made our appearance. While walking along the +margin we observed fish in the water, but of what sort we could +not tell.</p> + +<p>Now, as we neared the shore, Jack and I said we would go a +little out of our way to see if we could procure one of those +ducks; so, directing Peterkin to go straight to the shore and +kindle a fire, we separated, promising to rejoin him +speedily. But we did not find the ducks, although we made a +diligent search for half an hour. We were about to retrace +our steps, when we were arrested by one of the strangest sights +that we had yet beheld.</p> + +<p>Just in front of us, at the distance of about ten yards, grew +a superb tree, which certainly was the largest we had yet seen on +the island. Its trunk was at least five feet in diameter, +with a smooth gray bark; above this the spreading branches were +clothed with light green leaves, amid which were clusters of +bright yellow fruit, so numerous as to weigh down the boughs with +their great weight. This fruit seemed to be of the plum +species, of an oblong form, and a good deal larger than the +magnum bonum plum. The ground at the foot of this tree was +thickly strewn with the fallen fruit, in the midst of which lay +sleeping, in every possible attitude, at least twenty hogs of all +ages and sizes, apparently quite surfeited with a recent +banquet.</p> + +<p>Jack and I could scarce restrain our laughter as we gazed at +these coarse, fat, ill-looking animals, while they lay groaning +and snoring heavily amid the remains of their supper.</p> + +<p>“Now, Ralph,” said Jack, in a low whisper, +“put a stone in your sling,—a good big one,—and +let fly at that fat fellow with his back toward you. +I’ll try to put an arrow into yon little pig.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you think we had better put them up +first?” I whispered; “it seems cruel to kill them +while asleep.”</p> + +<p>“If I wanted <i>sport</i>, Ralph, I would certainly set +them up; but as we only want <i>pork</i>, we’ll let them +lie. Besides, we’re not sure of killing them; so, +fire away.”</p> + +<p>Thus admonished, I slung my stone with so good aim that it +went bang against the hog’s flank as if against the head of +a drum; but it had no other effect than that of causing the +animal to start to its feet, with a frightful yell of surprise, +and scamper away. At the same instant Jack’s bow +twanged, and the arrow pinned the little pig to the ground by the +ear.</p> + +<p>“I’ve missed, after all,” cried Jack, +darting forward with uplifted axe, while the little pig uttered a +loud squeal, tore the arrow from the ground, and ran away with +it, along with the whole drove, into the bushes and disappeared, +though we heard them screaming long afterwards in the +distance.</p> + +<p>“That’s very provoking, now,” said Jack, +rubbing the point of his nose.</p> + +<p>“Very,” I replied, stroking my chin.</p> + +<p>“Well, we must make haste and rejoin Peterkin,” +said Jack. “It’s getting late.” +And, without further remark, we threaded our way quickly through +the woods towards the shore.</p> + +<p>When we reached it, we found wood laid out, the fire lighted +and beginning to kindle up, with other signs of preparation for +our encampment, but Peterkin was nowhere to be found. We +wondered very much at this; but Jack suggested that he might have +gone to fetch water; so he gave a shout to let him know that we +had arrived, and sat down upon a rock, while I threw off my +jacket and seized the axe, intending to split up one or two +billets of wood. But I had scarce moved from the spot when, +in the distance, we heard a most appalling shriek, which was +followed up by a chorus of yells from the hogs, and a loud +“hurrah!”</p> + +<p>“I do believe,” said I, “that Peterkin has +met with the hogs.”</p> + +<p>“When Greek meets Greek,” said Jack, +soliloquizing, “then comes the tug of—”</p> + +<p>“Hurrah!” shouted Peterkin in the distance.</p> + +<p>We turned hastily towards the direction whence the sound came, +and soon descried Peterkin walking along the beach towards us +with a little pig transfixed on the end of his long spear!</p> + +<p>“Well done, my boy!” exclaimed Jack, slapping him +on the shoulder when he came up, “you’re the best +shot amongst us.”</p> + +<p>“Look here Jack!” cried Peterkin, as he disengaged +the animal from his spear. “Do you recognise that +hole?” said he, pointing to the pig’s ear; “and +are you familiar with this arrow, eh?”</p> + +<p>“Well, I declare!” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Of course you do,” interrupted Peterkin; +“but, pray, restrain your declarations at this time, and +let’s have supper, for I’m uncommonly hungry, I can +tell you; and it’s no joke to charge a whole herd of swine +with their great-grandmother bristling like a giant porcupine at +the head of them!”</p> + +<p>We now set about preparing supper; and, truly, a good display +of viands we made, when all was laid out on a flat rock in the +light of the blazing fire. There was, first of all, the +little pig; then there was the taro-root, and the yam, and the +potato, and six plums; and, lastly, the wood-pigeon. To +these Peterkin added a bit of sugar-cane, which he had cut from a +little patch of that plant which he had found not long after +separating from us; “and,” said he, “the patch +was somewhat in a square form, which convinces me it must have +been planted by man.”</p> + +<p>“Very likely,” replied Jack. “From all +we have seen, I’m inclined to think that some of the +savages must have dwelt here long ago.”</p> + +<p>We found no small difficulty in making up our minds how we +were to cook the pig. None of us had ever cut up one +before, and we did not know exactly how to begin; besides, we had +nothing but the axe to do it with, our knife having been +forgotten. At last Jack started up and said,—</p> + +<p>“Don’t let us waste more time talking about it, +boys. Hold it up, Peterkin. There, lay the hind leg +on this block of wood, so;” and he cut it off, with a large +portion of the haunch, at a single blow of the axe. +“Now the other,—that’s it.” And +having thus cut off the two hind legs, he made several deep +gashes in them, thrust a sharp-pointed stick through each, and +stuck them up before the blaze to roast. The wood-pigeon +was then split open, quite flat, washed clean in salt water, and +treated in a similar manner. While these were cooking, we +scraped a hole in the sand and ashes under the fire, into which +we put our vegetables, and covered them up.</p> + +<p>The taro-root was of an oval shape, about ten inches long and +four or five thick. It was of a mottled-gray colour, and +had a thick rind. We found it somewhat like an Irish +potato, and exceedingly good. The yam was roundish, and had +a rough brown skin. It was very sweet and +well-flavoured. The potato, we were surprised to find, was +quite sweet and exceedingly palatable, as also were the plums; +and, indeed, the pork and pigeon too, when we came to taste +them. Altogether this was decidedly the most luxurious +supper we had enjoyed for many a day; and Jack said it was +out-of-sight better than we ever got on board ship; and Peterkin +said he feared that if we should remain long on the island he +would infallibly become a glutton or an epicure: whereat Jack +remarked that he need not fear that, for he was <i>both</i> +already! And so, having eaten our fill, not forgetting to +finish off with a plum, we laid ourselves comfortably down to +sleep upon a couch of branches under the overhanging ledge of a +coral rock.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Effects of over-eating, and reflections thereon—Humble +advice regarding cold water—The “horrible cry” +accounted for—The curious birds called +penguins—Peculiarity of the cocoa nut palm—Questions +on the formation of coral islands—Mysterious +footsteps—Strange discoveries and sad sights.</p> + +<p>When we awoke on the following morning, we found that the sun +was already a good way above the horizon, so I came to the +conclusion that a heavy supper is not conducive to early +rising. Nevertheless, we felt remarkably strong and well, +and much disposed to have our breakfast. First, however, we +had our customary morning bathe, which refreshed us greatly.</p> + +<p>I have often wondered very much in after years that the +inhabitants of my own dear land did not make more frequent use of +this most charming element, water. I mean in the way of +cold bathing. Of course, I have perceived that it is not +convenient for them to go into the sea or the rivers in winter, +as we used to do on the Coral Island; but then, I knew from +experience that a large washing-tub and a sponge do form a most +pleasant substitute. The feelings of freshness, of +cleanliness, of vigour, and extreme hilarity, that always +followed my bathes in the sea, and even, when in England, my +ablutions in the wash-tub, were so delightful, that I would +sooner have gone without my breakfast than without my bathe in +cold water. My readers will forgive me for asking whether +they are in the habit of bathing thus every morning; and if they +answer “No,” they will pardon me for recommending +them to begin at once. Of late years, since retiring from +the stirring life of adventure which I have led so long in +foreign climes, I have heard of a system called the +cold-water-cure. Now, I do not know much about that system, +so I do not mean to uphold it, neither do I intend to run it +down. Perhaps, in reference to it, I may just hint that +there may be too much of a good thing. I know not; but of +this I am quite certain, that there may also be too little of a +good thing; and the great delight I have had in cold bathing +during the course of my adventurous career inclines me to think +that it is better to risk taking too much than to content +one’s self with too little. Such is my opinion, +derived from much experience; but I put it before my readers with +the utmost diffidence and with profound modesty, knowing that it +may possibly jar with their feelings of confidence in their own +ability to know and judge as to what is best and fittest in +reference to their own affairs. But, to return from this +digression, for which I humbly crave forgiveness.</p> + +<p>We had not advanced on our journey much above a mile or so, +and were just beginning to feel the pleasant glow that usually +accompanies vigorous exercise, when, on turning a point that +revealed to us a new and beautiful cluster of islands, we were +suddenly arrested by the appalling cry which had so alarmed us a +few nights before. But this time we were by no means so +much alarmed as on the previous occasion, because, whereas at +that time it was night, now it was day; and I have always found, +though I am unable to account for it, that daylight banishes many +of the fears that are apt to assail us in the dark.</p> + +<p>On hearing the sound, Peterkin instantly threw forward his +spear.</p> + +<p>“Now, what can it be?” said he, looking round at +Jack. “I tell you what it is, if we are to go on +being pulled up in a constant state of horror and astonishment, +as we have been for the last week, the sooner we’re out +o’ this island the better, notwithstanding the yams and +lemonade, and pork and plums!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s remark was followed by a repetition of the +cry, louder than before.</p> + +<p>“It comes from one of these islands,” said +Jack.</p> + +<p>“It must be the ghost of a jackass, then,” said +Peterkin, “for I never heard anything so like.”</p> + +<p>We all turned our eyes towards the cluster of islands, where, +on the largest, we observed curious objects moving on the +shore.</p> + +<p>“Soldiers they are,—that’s flat!” +cried Peterkin, gazing at them in the utmost amazement.</p> + +<p>And, in truth, Peterkin’s remark seemed to me to be +correct; for, at the distance from which we saw them, they +appeared to be an army of soldiers. There they stood, rank +and file, in lines and in squares, marching and countermarching, +with blue coats and white trousers. While we were looking +at them, the dreadful cry came again over the water, and Peterkin +suggested that it must be a regiment sent out to massacre the +natives in cold blood. At this remark Jack laughed and +said,—</p> + +<p>“Why, Peterkin, they are penguins!”</p> + +<p>“Penguins?” repeated Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Ay, penguins, Peterkin, penguins,—nothing more or +less than big sea-birds, as you shall see one of these days, when +we pay them a visit in our boat, which I mean to set about +building the moment we return to our bower.”</p> + +<p>“So, then, our dreadful yelling ghosts and our murdering +army of soldiers,” remarked Peterkin, “have dwindled +down to penguins,—big sea-birds! Very good. +Then I propose that we continue our journey as fast as possible, +lest our island should be converted into a dream before we get +completely round it.”</p> + +<p>Now, as we continued on our way, I pondered much over this new +discovery, and the singular appearance of these birds, of which +Jack could only give us a very slight and vague account; and I +began to long to commence to our boat, in order that we might go +and inspect them more narrowly. But by degrees these +thoughts left me, and I began to be much taken up again with the +interesting peculiarities of the country which we were passing +through.</p> + +<p>The second night we passed in a manner somewhat similar to the +first, at about two-thirds of the way round the island, as we +calculated, and we hoped to sleep on the night following at our +bower. I will not here note so particularly all that we +said and saw during the course of this second day, as we did not +make any further discoveries of great importance. The shore +along which we travelled, and the various parts of the woods +through which we passed, were similar to those which have been +already treated of. There were one or two observations that +we made, however, and these were as follows:—</p> + +<p>We saw that, while many of the large fruit-bearing trees grew +only in the valleys, and some of them only near the banks of the +streams, where the soil was peculiarly rich, the cocoa-nut palm +grew in every place whatsoever,—not only on the hill sides, +but also on the sea shore, and even, as has been already stated, +on the coral reef itself, where the soil, if we may use the name, +was nothing better than loose sand mingled with broken shells and +coral rock. So near to the sea, too, did this useful tree +grow, that in many places its roots were washed by the spray from +the breakers. Yet we found the trees growing thus on the +sands to be quite as luxuriant as those growing in the valleys, +and the fruit as good and refreshing also. Besides this, I +noticed that, on the summit of the high mountain, which we once +more ascended at a different point from our first ascent, were +found abundance of shells and broken coral formations, which Jack +and I agreed proved either that this island must have once been +under the sea, or that the sea must once have been above the +island. In other words, that as shells and coral could not +possibly climb to the mountain top, they must have been washed +upon it while the mountain top was on a level with the sea. +We pondered this very much; and we put to ourselves the question, +“What raised the island to its present height above the +sea?” But to this we could by no means give to +ourselves a satisfactory reply. Jack thought it might have +been blown up by a volcano; and Peterkin said he thought it must +have jumped up of its own accord! We also noticed, what had +escaped us before, that the solid rocks of which the island was +formed were quite different from the live coral rocks on the +shore, where the wonderful little insects were continually +working. They seemed, indeed, to be of the same +material,—a substance like limestone; but, while the coral +rocks were quite full of minute cells in which the insects lived, +the other rocks inland were hard and solid, without the +appearance of cells at all. Our thoughts and conversations +on this subject were sometimes so profound that Peterkin said we +should certainly get drowned in them at last, even although we +were such good divers! Nevertheless we did not allow his +pleasantry on this and similar points to deter us from making our +notes and observations as we went along.</p> + +<p>We found several more droves of hogs in the woods, but +abstained from killing any of them, having more than sufficient +for our present necessities. We saw also many of their +foot-prints in this neighbourhood. Among these we also +observed the footprints of a smaller animal, which we examined +with much care, but could form no certain opinion as to +them. Peterkin thought they were those of a little dog, but +Jack and I thought differently. We became very curious on +this matter, the more so that we observed these foot-prints to +lie scattered about in one locality, as if the animal which had +made them was wandering round about in a very irregular manner, +and without any object in view. Early in the forenoon of +our third day we observed these footprints to be much more +numerous than ever, and in one particular spot they diverged off +into the woods in a regular beaten track, which was, however, so +closely beset with bushes, that we pushed through it with +difficulty. We had now become so anxious to find out what +animal this was, and where it went to, that we determined to +follow the track, and, if possible, clear up the mystery. +Peterkin said, in a bantering tone, that he was sure it would be +cleared up as usual in some frightfully simple way, and prove to +be no mystery at all!</p> + +<p>The beaten track seemed much too large to have been formed by +the animal itself, and we concluded that some larger animal had +made it, and that the smaller one made use of it. But +everywhere the creeping plants and tangled bushes crossed our +path, so that we forced our way along with some difficulty. +Suddenly, as we came upon an open space, we heard a faint cry, +and observed a black animal standing in the track before us.</p> + +<p>“A wild-cat!” cried Jack, fitting an arrow to his +bow, and discharging it so hastily that he missed the animal, and +hit the earth about half a foot to one side of it. To our +surprise the wild-cat did not fly, but walked slowly towards the +arrow, and snuffed at it.</p> + +<p>“That’s the most comical wild-cat I ever +saw!” cried Jack.</p> + +<p>“It’s a tame wild-cat, I think,” said +Peterkin, levelling his spear to make a charge.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” cried I, laying my hand on his shoulder; +“I do believe the poor beast is blind. See, it +strikes against the branches as it walks along. It must be +a very old one;” and I hastened towards it.</p> + +<p>“Only think,” said Peterkin, with a suppressed +laugh, “of a superannuated wild-cat!”</p> + +<p>We now found that the poor cat was not only blind, or nearly +so, but extremely deaf, as it did not hear our footsteps until we +were quite close behind it. Then it sprang round, and, +putting up its back and tail, while the black hair stood all on +end, uttered a hoarse mew and a fuff.</p> + +<p>“Poor thing,” said Peterkin, gently extending his +hand, and endeavouring to pat the cat’s head. +“Poor pussy; chee, chee, chee; puss, puss, puss; cheetie +pussy!”</p> + +<p>No sooner did the cat hear these sounds than all signs of +anger fled, and, advancing eagerly to Peterkin, it allowed itself +to be stroked, and rubbed itself against his legs, purring loudly +all the time, and showing every symptom of the most extreme +delight.</p> + +<p>“It’s no more a wild cat than I am!” cried +Peterkin, taking it in his arms. “It’s quite +tame. Poor pussy, cheetie pussy!”</p> + +<p>We now crowded around Peterkin, and were not a little +surprised, and, to say truth, a good deal affected, by the sight +of the poor animal’s excessive joy. It rubbed its +head against Peterkin’s cheek, licked his chin, and thrust +its head almost violently into his neck, while it purred more +loudly than I ever heard a cat purr before, and appeared to be so +much overpowered by its feelings, that it occasionally mewed and +purred almost in the same breath. Such demonstrations of +joy and affection led us at once to conclude that this poor cat +must have known man before, and we conjectured that it had been +left either accidentally or by design on the island many years +ago, and was now evincing its extreme joy at meeting once more +with human beings. While we were fondling the cat and +talking about it, Jack glanced round the open space in the midst +of which we stood.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” exclaimed he; “this looks something +like a clearing. The axe has been at work here. Just +look at these tree-stumps.”</p> + +<p>We now turned to examine these, and, without doubt, we found +trees that had been cut down here and there, also stumps and +broken branches; all of which, however, were completely covered +over with moss, and bore evidence of having been in this +condition for some years. No human foot-prints were to be +seen, either on the track or among the bushes; but those of the +cat were found everywhere. We now determined to follow up +the track as far as it went, and Peterkin put the cat down; but +it seemed to be so weak, and mewed so very pitifully, that he +took it up again and carried it in his arms, where, in a few +minutes, it fell sound asleep.</p> + +<p>About ten yards farther on, the felled trees became more +numerous, and the track, diverging to the right, followed for a +short space the banks of a stream. Suddenly we came to a +spot where once must have been a rude bridge, the stones of which +were scattered in the stream, and those on each bank entirely +covered over with moss. In silent surprise and expectancy +we continued to advance, and, a few yards farther on, beheld, +under the shelter of some bread-fruit trees, a small hut or +cottage. I cannot hope to convey to my readers a very +correct idea of the feelings that affected us on witnessing this +unexpected sight. We stood for a long time in silent +wonder, for there was a deep and most melancholy stillness about +the place that quite overpowered us; and when we did at length +speak, it was in subdued whispers, as if we were surrounded by +some awful or supernatural influence. Even Peterkin’s +voice, usually so quick and lively on all occasions, was hushed +now; for there was a dreariness about this silent, lonely, +uninhabited cottage,—so strange in its appearance, so far +away from the usual dwellings of man, so old, decayed, and +deserted in its aspect,—that fell upon our spirits like a +thick cloud, and blotted out as with a pall the cheerful sunshine +that had filled us since the commencement of our tour round the +island.</p> + +<p>The hut or cottage was rude and simple in its +construction. It was not more than twelve feet long by ten +feet broad, and about seven or eight feet high. It had one +window, or rather a small frame in which a window might, perhaps, +once have been, but which was now empty. The door was +exceedingly low, and formed of rough boards, and the roof was +covered with broad cocoa-nut and plantain leaves. But every +part of it was in a state of the utmost decay. Moss and +green matter grew in spots all over it. The woodwork was +quite perforated with holes; the roof had nearly fallen in, and +appeared to be prevented from doing so altogether by the thick +matting of creeping-plants and the interlaced branches which +years of neglect had allowed to cover it almost entirely; while +the thick, luxuriant branches of the bread-fruit and other trees +spread above it, and flung a deep, sombre shadow over the spot, +as if to guard it from the heat and the light of day. We +conversed long and in whispers about this strange habitation ere +we ventured to approach it; and when at length we did so it was, +at least on my part, with feelings of awe.</p> + +<p>At first Jack endeavoured to peep in at the window, but from +the deep shadow of the trees already mentioned, and the gloom +within, he could not clearly discern objects; so we lifted the +latch and pushed open the door. We observed that the latch +was made of iron, and almost eaten away with rust. In the +like condition were also the hinges, which creaked as the door +swung back. On entering, we stood still and gazed around +us, while we were much impressed with the dreary stillness of the +room. But what we saw there surprised and shocked us not a +little. There was no furniture in the apartment save a +little wooden stool and an iron pot, the latter almost eaten +through with rust. In the corner farthest from the door was +a low bedstead, on which lay two skeletons, imbedded in a little +heap of dry dust. With beating hearts we went forward to +examine them. One was the skeleton of a man, the other that +of a dog, which was extended close beside that of the man, with +its head resting on his bosom</p> + +<p>Now we were very much concerned about this discovery, and +could scarce refrain from tears on beholding these sad +remains. After some time, we began to talk about what we +had seen, and to examine in and around the hut, in order to +discover some clue to the name or history of this poor man, who +had thus died in solitude, with none to mourn his loss save his +cat and his faithful dog. But we found +nothing,—neither a book nor a scrap of paper. We +found, however, the decayed remnants of what appeared to have +been clothing, and an old axe. But none of these things +bore marks of any kind; and, indeed, they were so much decayed as +to convince us that they had lain in the condition in which we +found them for many years.</p> + +<p>This discovery now accounted to us for the tree stump at the +top of the mountain with the initials cut on it; also for the +patch of sugar-cane and other traces of man which we had met with +in the course of our rambles over the island. And we were +much saddened by the reflection that the lot of this poor +wanderer might possibly be our own, after many years’ +residence on the island, unless we should be rescued by the visit +of some vessel or the arrival of natives. Having no clue +whatever to account for the presence of this poor human being in +such a lonely spot, we fell to conjecturing what could have +brought him there. I was inclined to think that he must +have been a shipwrecked sailor, whose vessel had been lost here, +and all the crew been drowned except himself and his dog and +cat. But Jack thought it more likely that he had run away +from his vessel, and had taken the dog and cat to keep him +company. We were also much occupied in our minds with the +wonderful difference between the cat and the dog. For here +we saw that while the one perished, like a loving friend, by its +master’s side, with its head resting on his bosom, the +other had sought to sustain itself by prowling abroad in the +forest, and had lived in solitude to a good old age. +However, we did not conclude from this that the cat was destitute +of affection, for we could not forget its emotions on first +meeting with us; but we saw from this, that the dog had a great +deal more of generous love in its nature than the cat, because it +not only found it impossible to live after the death of its +master, but it must needs, when it came to die, crawl to his side +and rest its head upon his lifeless breast.</p> + +<p>While we were thinking on these things, and examining into +everything about the room, we were attracted by an exclamation +from Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“I say, Jack,” said he, “here is something +that will be of use to us.”</p> + +<p>“What is it?” said Jack, hastening across the +room.</p> + +<p>“An old pistol,” replied Peterkin, holding up the +weapon, which he had just pulled from under a heap of broken wood +and rubbish that lay in a corner.</p> + +<p>“That, indeed, might have been useful,” said Jack, +examining it, “if we had any powder; but I suspect the bow +and the sling will prove more serviceable.”</p> + +<p>“True, I forgot that,” said Peterkin; “but +we may as well take it with us, for the flint will serve to +strike fire with when the sun does not shine.”</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p136b.jpg"> +<img alt="A saddening discovery" src="images/p136s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>After having spent more than an hour at this place without +discovering anything of further interest, Peterkin took up the +old cat, which had lain very contentedly asleep on the stool +whereon he had placed it, and we prepared to take our +departure. In leaving the hut, Jack stumbled heavily +against the door-post, which was so much decayed as to break +across, and the whole fabric of the hut seemed ready to tumble +about our ears. This put into our heads that we might as +well pull it down, and so form a mound over the skeleton. +Jack, therefore, with his axe, cut down the other door-post, +which, when it was done, brought the whole hut in ruins to the +ground, and thus formed a grave to the bones of the poor recluse +and his dog. Then we left the spot, having brought away the +iron pot, the pistol, and the old axe, as they might be of much +use to us hereafter.</p> + +<p>During the rest of this day we pursued our journey, and +examined the other end of the large valley, which we found to be +so much alike to the parts already described, that I shall not +recount the particulars of what we saw in this place. I +may, however, remark, that we did not quite recover our former +cheerful spirits until we arrived at our bower, which we did late +in the evening, and found everything just in the same condition +as we had left it three days before.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Something wrong with the tank—Jack’s wisdom and +Peterkin’s impertinence—Wonderful behaviour of a +crab—Good wishes for those who dwell far from the +sea—Jack commences to build a little boat.</p> + +<p>Rest is sweet as well for the body as for the mind. +During my long experience, amid the vicissitudes of a chequered +life, I have found that periods of profound rest at certain +intervals, in addition to the ordinary hours of repose, are +necessary to the wellbeing of man. And the nature as well +as the period of this rest varies, according to the different +temperaments of individuals, and the peculiar circumstances in +which they may chance to be placed. To those who work with +their minds, bodily labour is rest. To those who labour +with the body, deep sleep is rest. To the downcast, the +weary, and the sorrowful, joy and peace are rest. Nay, +further, I think that to the gay, the frivolous, the reckless, +when sated with pleasures that cannot last, even sorrow proves to +be rest of a kind, although, perchance, it were better that I +should call it relief than rest. There is, indeed, but one +class of men to whom rest is denied. There is no rest to +the wicked. At this I do but hint, however, as I treat not +of that rest which is spiritual, but, more particularly, of that +which applies to the mind and to the body.</p> + +<p>Of this rest we stood much in need on our return home, and we +found it exceedingly sweet, when we indulged in it, after +completing the journey just related. It had not, indeed, +been a very long journey, nevertheless we had pursued it so +diligently that our frames were not a little prostrated. +Our minds were also very much exhausted in consequence of the +many surprises, frequent alarms, and much profound thought, to +which they had been subjected; so that when we lay down on the +night of our return under the shelter of the bower, we fell +immediately into very deep repose. I can state this with +much certainty, for Jack afterwards admitted the fact, and +Peterkin, although he stoutly denied it, I heard snoring loudly +at least two minutes after lying down. In this condition we +remained all night and the whole of the following day without +awaking once, or so much as moving our positions. When we +did awake it was near sunset, and we were all in such a state of +lassitude that we merely rose to swallow a mouthful of +food. As Peterkin remarked, in the midst of a yawn, we took +breakfast at tea-time, and then went to bed again, where we lay +till the following forenoon.</p> + +<p>After this we arose very greatly refreshed, but much alarmed +lest we had lost count of a day. I say we were much alarmed +on this head, for we had carefully kept count of the days since +we were cast upon our island, in order that we might remember the +Sabbath-day, which day we had hitherto with one accord kept as a +day of rest, and refrained from all work whatsoever. +However, on considering the subject, we all three entertained the +same opinion as to how long we had slept, and so our minds were +put at ease.</p> + +<p>We now hastened to our Water Garden to enjoy a bathe, and to +see how did the animals which I had placed in the tank. We +found the garden more charming, pelucid, and inviting than ever, +and Jack and I plunged into its depth, and gambolled among its +radiant coral groves; while Peterkin wallowed at the surface, and +tried occasionally to kick us as we passed below. Having +dressed, I then hastened to the tank; but what was my surprise +and grief to find nearly all the animals dead, and the water in a +putrid condition! I was greatly distressed at this, and +wondered what could be the cause of it.</p> + +<p>“Why, you precious humbug,” said Peterkin, coming +up to me, “how could you expect it to be otherwise? +When fishes are accustomed to live in the Pacific Ocean, how can +you expect them to exist in a hole like that?”</p> + +<p>“Indeed, Peterkin,” I replied, “there seems +to be truth in what you say. Nevertheless, now I think of +it, there must be some error in your reasoning; for, if I put in +but a few very small animals, they will bear the same proportion +to this pond that the millions of fish bear to the +ocean.”</p> + +<p>“I say, Jack,” cried Peterkin, waving his hand, +“come here, like a good fellow. Ralph is actually +talking philosophy. Do come to our assistance, for +he’s out o’ sight beyond me already!”</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” inquired Jack, coming +up, while he endeavoured to scrub his long hair dry with a towel +of cocoa-nut cloth.</p> + +<p>I repeated my thoughts to Jack, who, I was happy to find, +quite agreed with me. “Your best plan,” he +said, “will be to put very few animals at first into your +tank, and add more as you find it will bear them. And look +here,” he added, pointing to the sides of the tank, which, +for the space of two inches above the water-level, were incrusted +with salt, “you must carry your philosophy a little +farther, Ralph. That water has evaporated so much that it +is too salt for anything to live in. You will require to +add <i>fresh</i> water now and then, in order to keep it at the +same degree of saltness as the sea.”</p> + +<p>“Very true, Jack, that never struck me before,” +said I.</p> + +<p>“And, now I think of it,” continued Jack, +“it seems to me that the surest way of arranging your tank +so as to get it to keep pure and in good condition, will be to +imitate the ocean in it. In fact make it a miniature +Pacific. I don’t see how you can hope to succeed +unless you do that.”</p> + +<p>“Most true,” said I, pondering what my companion +said. “But I fear that that will be very +difficult.”</p> + +<p>“Not at all,” cried Jack, rolling his towel up +into a ball, and throwing it into the face of Peterkin, who had +been grinning and winking at him during the last five +minutes. “Not at all. Look here. There is +water of a certain saltness in the sea; well, fill your tank with +sea water, and keep it at that saltness by marking the height at +which the water stands on the sides. When it evaporates a +little, pour in <i>fresh</i> water from the brook till it comes +up to the mark, and then it will be right, for the salt does not +evaporate with the water. Then, there’s lots of +sea-weed in the sea;—well, go and get one or two bits of +sea-weed, and put them into your tank. Of course the weed +must be alive, and growing to little stones; or you can chip a +bit off the rocks with the weed sticking to it. Then, if +you like, you can throw a little sand and gravel into your tank, +and the thing’s complete.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, not quite,” said Peterkin, who had been +gravely attentive to this off-hand advice, “not quite; you +must first make three little men to dive in it before it can be +said to be perfect, and that would be rather difficult, I fear, +for two of them would require to be philosophers. But +hallo! what’s this? I say, Ralph, look here. +There’s one o’ your crabs up to something +uncommon. It’s performing the most remarkable +operation for a crab I ever saw,—taking off its coat, I do +believe, before going to bed!”</p> + +<p>We hastily stooped over the tank, and certainly were not a +little amused at the conduct of one of the crabs which still +survived it companions. It was one of the common small +crabs, like to those that are found running about everywhere on +the coasts of England. While we gazed at it, we observed +its back to split away from the lower part of its body, and out +of the gap thus formed came a soft lump which moved and writhed +unceasingly. This lump continued to increase in size until +it appeared like a bunch of crab’s legs: and, indeed, such +it proved in a very few minutes to be; for the points of the toes +were at length extricated from this hole in its back, the legs +spread out, the body followed, and the crab walked away quite +entire, even to the points of its nipper-claws, leaving a +perfectly entire shell behind it, so that, when we looked, it +seemed as though there were two complete crabs instead of +one!</p> + +<p>“Well!” exclaimed Peterkin, drawing a long breath, +“I’ve <i>heard</i> of a man jumping out of his skin +and sitting down in his skeleton in order to cool himself, but I +never expected to <i>see</i> a crab do it!”</p> + +<p>We were, in truth, much amazed at this spectacle, and the more +so when we observed that the new crab was larger than the crab +that it came out of. It was also quite soft, but by next +morning its skin had hardened into a good shell. We came +thus to know that crabs grow in this way, and not by the growing +of their shells, as we had always thought before we saw this +wonderful operation.</p> + +<p>Now I considered well the advice which Jack had given me about +preparing my tank, and the more I thought of it, the more I came +to regard it as very sound and worthy of being acted on. So +I forthwith put his plan in execution, and found it to answer +excellently well, indeed much beyond my expectation; for I found +that after a little experience had taught me the proper +proportion of sea-weed and animals to put into a certain amount +of water, the tank needed no farther attendance; and, moreover, I +did not require ever afterwards to renew or change the sea-water, +but only to add a very little fresh water from the brook, now and +then, as the other evaporated. I therefore concluded that +if I had been suddenly conveyed, along with my tank, into some +region where there was no salt sea at all, my little sea and my +sea-fish would have continued to thrive and to prosper +notwithstanding. This made me greatly to desire that those +people in the world who live far inland might know of my +wonderful tank, and, by having materials like to those of which +it was made conveyed to them, thus be enabled to watch the habits +of those most mysterious animals that reside in the sea, and +examine with their own eyes the wonders of the great deep.</p> + +<p>For many days after this, while Peterkin and Jack were busily +employed in building a little boat out of the curious natural +planks of the chestnut tree, I spent much of my time in examining +with the burning-glass the marvellous operations that were +constantly going on in my tank. Here I saw those anemones +which cling, like little red, yellow, and green blobs of jelly, +to the rocks, put forth, as it were, a multitude of arms and wait +till little fish or other small animalcules unwarily touched +them, when they would instantly seize them, fold arm after arm +around their victims, and so engulf them in their stomachs. +Here I saw the ceaseless working of those little coral insects +whose efforts have encrusted the islands of the Pacific with vast +rocks, and surrounded them with enormous reefs. And I +observed that many of these insects, though extremely minute, +were very beautiful, coming out of their holes in a circle of +fine threads, and having the form of a shuttle-cock. Here I +saw curious little barnacles opening a hole in their backs and +constantly putting out a thin feathery hand, with which, I doubt +not, they dragged their food into their mouths. Here, also, +I saw those crabs which have shells only on the front of their +bodies, but no shell whatever on their remarkably tender tails, +so that, in order to find a protection to them, they thrust them +into the empty shells of wilks, or some such fish, and when they +grow too big for one, change into another. But, most +curious of all, I saw an animal which had the wonderful power, +when it became ill, of casting its stomach and its teeth away +from it, and getting an entirely new set in the course of a few +months! All this I saw, and a great deal more, by means of +my tank and my burning-glass, but I refrain from setting down +more particulars here, as I have still much to tell of the +adventures that befell us while we remained on this island.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Notable discovery at the spouting cliffs—The mysterious +green monster explained—We are thrown into unutterable +terror by the idea that Jack is drowned—The Diamond +Cave.</p> + +<p>“Come, Jack,” cried Peterkin, one morning about +three weeks after our return from our long excursion, +“let’s be jolly to-day, and do something +vigorous. I’m quite tired of hammering and hammering, +hewing and screwing, cutting and butting, at that little boat of +ours, that seems as hard to build as Noah’s ark; let us go +on an excursion to the mountain top, or have a hunt after the +wild ducks, or make a dash at the pigs. I’m quite +flat—flat as bad ginger-beer—flat as a pancake; in +fact, I want something to rouse me, to toss me up, as it +were. Eh! what do you say to it?”</p> + +<p>“Well,” answered Jack, throwing down the axe with +which he was just about to proceed towards the boat, “if +that’s what you want, I would recommend you to make an +excursion to the water-spouts; the last one we had to do with +tossed you up a considerable height, perhaps the next will send +you higher, who knows, if you’re at all reasonable or +moderate in your expectations!”</p> + +<p>“Jack, my dear boy,” said Peterkin, gravely, +“you are really becoming too fond of jesting. +It’s a thing I don’t at all approve of, and if you +don’t give it up, I fear that, for our mutual good, we +shall have to part.”</p> + +<p>“Well, then, Peterkin,” replied Jack, with a +smile, “what would you have?”</p> + +<p>“Have?” said Peterkin, “I would <i>have</i> +nothing. I didn’t say I wanted to <i>have</i>; I said +that I wanted to <i>do</i>.”</p> + +<p>“By the by,” said I, interrupting their +conversation, “I am reminded by this that we have not yet +discovered the nature of yon curious appearance that we saw near +the water-spouts, on our journey round the island. Perhaps +it would be well to go for that purpose.”</p> + +<p>“Humph!” ejaculated Peterkin, “I know the +nature of it well enough.”</p> + +<p>“What was it?” said I.</p> + +<p>“It was of a <i>mysterious</i> nature to be sure!” +said he, with a wave of his hand, while he rose from the log on +which he had been sitting, and buckled on his belt, into which he +thrust his enormous club.</p> + +<p>“Well then, let us away to the water-spouts,” +cried Jack, going up to the bower for his bow and arrows; +“and bring your spear, Peterkin. It may be +useful.”</p> + +<p>We now, having made up our minds to examine into this matter, +sallied forth eagerly in the direction of the water-spout rocks, +which, as I have before mentioned, were not far from our present +place of abode. On arriving there we hastened down to the +edge of the rocks, and gazed over into the sea, where we observed +the pale-green object still distinctly visible, moving its tail +slowly to and fro in the water.</p> + +<p>“Most remarkable!” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Exceedingly curious,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Beats everything!” said Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Now, Jack,” he added, “you made such a poor +figure in your last attempt to stick that object, that I would +advise you to let me try it. If it has got a heart at all, +I’ll engage to send my spear right through the core of it; +if it hasn’t got a heart, I’ll send it through the +spot where its heart ought to be.”</p> + +<p>“Fire away, then, my boy,” replied Jack with a +laugh.</p> + +<p>Peterkin immediately took the spear, poised it for a second or +two above his head, then darted it like an arrow into the +sea. Down it went straight into the centre of the green +object, passed quite through it, and came up immediately +afterwards, pure and unsullied, while the mysterious tail moved +quietly as before!</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Peterkin, gravely, “that brute +is a heartless monster; I’ll have nothing more to do with +it.”</p> + +<p>“I’m pretty sure now,” said Jack, +“that it is merely a phosphoric light; but I must say +I’m puzzled at its staying always in that exact +spot.”</p> + +<p>I also was much puzzled, and inclined to think with Jack that +it must be phosphoric light; of which luminous appearance we had +seen much while on our voyage to these seas. +“But,” said I, “there is nothing to hinder us +from diving down to it, now that we are sure it is not a +shark.”</p> + +<p>“True,” returned Jack, stripping off his clothes; +“I’ll go down, Ralph, as I’m better at diving +than you are. Now then, Peterkin, out o’ the +road!” Jack stepped forward, joined his hands above +his head, bent over the rocks, and plunged into the sea. +For a second or two the spray caused by his dive hid him from +view, then the water became still, and we saw him swimming far +down in the midst of the green object. Suddenly he sank +below it, and vanished altogether from our sight! We gazed +anxiously down at the spot where he had disappeared, for nearly a +minute, expecting every moment to see him rise again for breath; +but fully a minute passed, and still he did not reappear. +Two minutes passed! and then a flood of alarm rushed in upon my +soul, when I considered that during all my acquaintance with him, +Jack had never stayed underwater more than a minute at a time; +indeed seldom so long.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Peterkin!” I said, in a voice that trembled +with increasing anxiety, “something has happened. It +is more than three minutes now!” But Peterkin did not +answer and I observed that he was gazing down into the water with +a look of intense fear mingled with anxiety, while his face was +overspread with a deadly paleness. Suddenly he sprang to +his feet and rushed about in a frantic state, wringing his hands, +and exclaiming, “Oh, Jack, Jack! he is gone! It must +have been a shark, and he is gone for ever!”</p> + +<p>For the next five minutes I know not what I did. The +intensity of my feelings almost bereft me of my senses. But +I was recalled to myself by Peterkin seizing me by the shoulder +and staring wildly into my face, while he exclaimed, +“Ralph! Ralph! perhaps he has only fainted. Dive for +him, Ralph!”</p> + +<p>It seemed strange that this did not occur to me sooner. +In a moment I rushed to the edge of the rocks, and, without +waiting to throw off my garments, was on the point to spring into +the waves, when I observed something black rising up through the +green object. In another moment Jack’s head rose to +the surface, and he gave a wild shout, flinging back the spray +from his locks, as was his wont after a dive. Now we were +almost as much amazed at seeing him reappear, well and strong, as +we had been at first at his non-appearance; for, to the best of +our judgment, he had been nearly ten minutes under water, perhaps +longer, and it required no exertion of our reason to convince us +that this was utterly impossible for mortal man to do and retain +his strength and faculties. It was therefore with a feeling +akin to superstitious awe that I held down my hand and assisted +him to clamber up the steep rocks. But no such feeling +affected Peterkin. No sooner did Jack gain the rocks and +seat himself on one, panting for breath, than he threw his arms +round his neck, and burst into a flood of tears. “Oh, +Jack, Jack!” said he, “where were you? What +kept you so long?”</p> + +<p>After a few moments Peterkin became composed enough to sit +still and listen to Jack’s explanation, although he could +not restrain himself from attempting to wink every two minutes at +me, in order to express his joy at Jack’s safety. I +say he attempted to wink, but I am bound to add that he did not +succeed, for his eyes were so much swollen with weeping, that his +frequent attempts only resulted in a series of violent and +altogether idiotical contortions of the face, that were very far +from expressing what he intended. However, I knew what the +poor fellow meant by it, so I smiled to him in return, and +endeavoured to make believe that he was winking.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, when we were composed +enough to listen to him, “yon green object is not a shark; +it is a stream of light issuing from a cave in the rocks. +Just after I made my dive, I observed that this light came from +the side of the rock above which we are now sitting; so I struck +out for it, and saw an opening into some place or other that +appeared to be luminous within. For one instant I paused to +think whether I ought to venture. Then I made up my mind, +and dashed into it. For you see, Peterkin, although I take +some time to tell this, it happened in the space of a few +seconds, so that I knew I had wind enough in me to serve to bring +me out o’ the hole and up to the surface again. Well, +I was just on the point of turning,—for I began to feel a +little uncomfortable in such a place,—when it seemed to me +as if there was a faint light right above me. I darted +upwards, and found my head out of water. This relieved me +greatly, for I now felt that I could take in air enough to enable +me to return the way I came. Then it all at once occurred +to me that I might not be able to find the way out again; but, on +glancing downwards, my mind was put quite at rest by seeing the +green light below me streaming into the cave, just like the light +that we had seen streaming out of it, only what I now saw was +much brighter.</p> + +<p>“At first I could scarcely see anything as I gazed +around me, it was so dark; but gradually my eyes became +accustomed to it, and I found that I was in a huge cave, part of +the walls of which I observed on each side of me. The +ceiling just above me was also visible, and I fancied that I +could perceive beautiful glittering objects there, but the +farther end of the cave was shrouded in darkness. While I +was looking around me in great wonder, it came into my head that +you two would think I was drowned; so I plunged down through the +passage again in a great hurry, rose to the surface, +and—here I am!”</p> + +<p>When Jack concluded his recital of what he had seen in this +remarkable cave, I could not rest satisfied till I had dived down +to see it; which I did, but found it so dark, as Jack had said, +that I could scarcely see anything. When I returned, we had +a long conversation about it, during which I observed that +Peterkin had a most lugubrious expression on his countenance.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter, Peterkin?” said I.</p> + +<p>“The matter?” he replied. “It’s +all very well for you two to be talking away like mermaids about +the wonders of this cave, but you know I must be content to hear +about it, while you are enjoying yourselves down there like mad +dolphins. It’s really too bad.”</p> + +<p>“I’m very sorry for you, Peterkin, indeed I +am,” said Jack, “but we cannot help you. If you +would only learn to dive—”</p> + +<p>“Learn to fly, you might as well say!” retorted +Peterkin, in a very sulky tone.</p> + +<p>“If you would only consent to keep still,” said I, +“we would take you down with us in ten seconds.”</p> + +<p>“Hum!” returned Peterkin; “suppose a +salamander was to propose to you ‘only to keep +still,’ and he would carry you through a blazing fire in a +few seconds, what would you say?”</p> + +<p>We both laughed and shook our heads, for it was evident that +nothing was to be made of Peterkin in the water. But we +could not rest satisfied till we had seen more of this cave; so, +after further consultation, Jack and I determined to try if we +could take down a torch with us, and set fire to it in the +cavern. This we found to be an undertaking of no small +difficulty; but we accomplished it at last by the following +means:—First, we made a torch of a very inflammable nature +out of the bark of a certain tree, which we cut into strips, and, +after twisting, cemented together with a kind of resin or gum, +which we also obtained from another tree; neither of which trees, +however, was known by name to Jack. This, when prepared, we +wrapped up in a great number of plies of cocoa-nut cloth, so that +we were confident it could not get wet during the short time it +should be under water. Then we took a small piece of the +tinder, which we had carefully treasured up lest we should +require it, as before said, when the sun should fail us; also, we +rolled up some dry grass and a few chips, which, with a little +bow and drill, like those described before, we made into another +bundle, and wrapped it up in cocoa-nut cloth. When all was +ready we laid aside our garments, with the exception of our +trousers, which, as we did not know what rough scraping against +the rocks we might be subjected to, we kept on.</p> + +<p>Then we advanced to the edge of the rocks, Jack carrying one +bundle, with the torch; I the other, with the things for +producing fire.</p> + +<p>“Now don’t weary for us, Peterkin, should we be +gone some time,” said Jack; “we’ll be sure to +return in half-an-hour at the very latest, however interesting +the cave should be, that we may relieve your mind.”</p> + +<p>“Farewell!” said Peterkin, coming up to us with a +look of deep but pretended solemnity, while he shook hands and +kissed each of us on the cheek. “Farewell! and while +you are gone I shall repose my weary limbs under the shelter of +this bush, and meditate on the changefulness of all things +earthly, with special reference to the forsaken condition of a +poor ship-wrecked sailor boy!” So saying, Peterkin +waved his hand, turned from us, and cast himself upon the ground +with a look of melancholy resignation, which was so well feigned, +that I would have thought it genuine had he not accompanied it +with a gentle wink. We both laughed, and, springing from +the rocks together, plunged head first into the sea.</p> + +<p>We gained the interior of the submarine cave without +difficulty, and, on emerging from the waves, supported ourselves +for some time by treading-water, while we held the two bundles +above our heads. This we did in order to let our eyes +become accustomed to the obscurity. Then, when we could see +sufficiently, we swam to a shelving rock, and landed in +safety. Having wrung the water from our trousers, and dried +ourselves as well as we could under the circumstances, we +proceeded to ignite the torch. This we accomplished without +difficulty in a few minutes; and no sooner did it flare up than +we were struck dumb with the wonderful objects that were revealed +to our gaze. The roof of the cavern just above us seemed to +be about ten feet high, but grew higher as it receded into the +distance, until it was lost in darkness. It seemed to be +made of coral, and was supported by massive columns of the same +material. Immense icicles (as they appeared to us) hung +from it in various places. These, however, were formed, not +of ice, but of a species of limestone, which seemed to flow in a +liquid form towards the point of each, where it became +solid. A good many drops fell, however, to the rock below, +and these formed little cones, which rose to meet the points +above. Some of them had already met, and thus we saw how +the pillars were formed, which at first seemed to us as if they +had been placed there by some human architect to support the +roof. As we advanced farther in, we saw that the floor was +composed of the same material as the pillars; and it presented +the curious appearance of ripples, such as are formed on water +when gently ruffled by the wind. There were several +openings on either hand in the walls, that seemed to lead into +other caverns; but these we did not explore at this time. +We also observed that the ceiling was curiously marked in many +places, as if it were the fret-work of a noble cathedral; and the +walls, as well as the roof, sparkled in the light of our torch, +and threw back gleams and flashes, as if they were covered with +precious stones. Although we proceeded far into this +cavern, we did not come to the end of it; and we were obliged to +return more speedily than we would otherwise have done, as our +torch was nearly expended. We did not observe any openings +in the roof, or any indications of places whereby light might +enter; but near the entrance to the cavern stood an immense mass +of pure white coral rock, which caught and threw back the little +light that found an entrance through the cave’s mouth, and +thus produced, we conjectured, the pale-green object which had +first attracted our attention. We concluded, also, that the +reflecting power of this rock was that which gave forth the dim +light that faintly illumined the first part of the cave.</p> + +<p>Before diving through the passage again we extinguished the +small piece of our torch that remained, and left it in a dry +spot; conceiving that we might possibly stand in need of it, if +at any future time we should chance to wet our torch while diving +into the cavern. As we stood for a few minutes after it was +out, waiting till our eyes became accustomed to the gloom, we +could not help remarking the deep, intense stillness and the +unutterable gloom of all around us; and, as I thought of the +stupendous dome above, and the countless gems that had sparkled +in the torch-light a few minutes before, it came into my mind to +consider how strange it is that God should make such wonderful +and exquisitely beautiful works never to be seen at all, except, +indeed, by chance visitors such as ourselves.</p> + +<p>I afterwards found that there were many such caverns among the +islands of the South Seas, some of them larger and more beautiful +than the one I have just described.</p> + +<p>“Now, Ralph, are you ready?” said Jack, in a low +voice, that seemed to echo up into the dome above.</p> + +<p>“Quite ready.”</p> + +<p>“Come along, then,” said he; and, plunging off the +ledge of the rock into the water, we dived through the narrow +entrance. In a few seconds we were panting on the rocks +above, and receiving the congratulations of our friend +Peterkin.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Strange peculiarity of the tides—Also of the +twilight—Peterkin’s remarkable conduct in embracing a +little pig and killing a big sow—Sage remarks on +jesting—Also on love.</p> + +<p>It was quite a relief to us to breathe the pure air and to +enjoy the glad sunshine after our long ramble in the Diamond +Cave, as we named it; for, although we did not stay more than +half an hour away, it seemed to us much longer. While we +were dressing, and during our walk home, we did our best to +satisfy the curiosity of poor Peterkin, who seemed to regret, +with lively sincerity, his inability to dive.</p> + +<p>There was no help for it, however, so we condoled with him as +we best could. Had there been any great rise or fall in the +tide of these seas, we might perhaps have found it possible to +take him down with us at low water; but as the tide never rose or +fell more than eighteen inches or two feet, this was +impossible.</p> + +<p>This peculiarity of the tide—its slight rise and +fall—had not attracted our observation till some time after +our residence on the island. Neither had we observed +another curious circumstance until we had been some time +there. This was the fact, that the tide rose and fell with +constant regularity, instead of being affected by the changes of +the moon as in our own country, and as it is in most other parts +of the world,—at least in all those parts with which I am +acquainted. Every day and every night, at twelve +o’clock precisely, the tide is at the full; and at six +o’clock every morning and evening it is ebb. I can +speak with much confidence on this singular circumstance, as we +took particular note of it, and never found it to alter. Of +course, I must admit, we had to guess the hour of twelve +midnight, and I think we could do this pretty correctly; but in +regard to twelve noon we are quite positive, because we easily +found the highest point that the sun reached in the sky by +placing ourselves at a certain spot whence we observed the sharp +summit of a cliff resting against the sky, just where the sun +passed.</p> + +<p>Jack and I were surprised that we had not noticed this the +first few days of our residence here, and could only account for +it by our being so much taken up with the more obvious wonders of +our novel situation. I have since learned, however, that +this want of observation is a sad and very common infirmity of +human nature, there being hundreds of persons before whose eyes +the most wonderful things are passing every day, who nevertheless +are totally ignorant of them. I therefore have to record my +sympathy with such persons, and to recommend to them a course of +conduct which I have now for a long time myself +adopted,—namely, the habit of forcing my attention upon +<i>all</i> things that go on around me, and of taking some degree +of interest in them, whether I feel it naturally or not. I +suggest this the more earnestly, though humbly, because I have +very frequently come to know that my indifference to a thing has +generally been caused by my ignorance in regard to it.</p> + +<p>We had much serious conversation on this subject of the tides; +and Jack told us, in his own quiet, philosophical way, that these +tides did great good to the world in many ways, particularly in +the way of cleansing the shores of the land, and carrying off the +filth that was constantly poured into the sea there-from; which, +Peterkin suggested, was remarkably <i>tidy</i> of it to do. +Poor Peterkin could never let slip an opportunity to joke, +however inopportune it might be: which at first we found rather a +disagreeable propensity, as it often interrupted the flow of very +agreeable conversation; and, indeed, I cannot too strongly record +my disapprobation of this tendency in general: but we became so +used to it at last that we found it no interruption whatever; +indeed, strange to say, we came to feel that it was a necessary +part of our enjoyment (such is the force of habit), and found the +sudden outbursts of mirth, resulting from his humorous +disposition, quite natural and refreshing to us in the midst of +our more serious conversations. But I must not misrepresent +Peterkin. We often found, to our surprise, that he knew +many things which we did not; and I also observed that those +things which he learned from experience were never +forgotten. From all these things I came at length to +understand that things very opposite and dissimilar in +themselves, when united, do make an agreeable whole; as, for +example, we three on this our island, although most unlike in +many things, when united, made a trio so harmonious that I +question if there ever met before such an agreeable +triumvirate. There was, indeed, no note of discord whatever +in the symphony we played together on that sweet Coral Island; +and I am now persuaded that this was owing to our having been all +tuned to the same key, namely, that of <i>love</i>! Yes, we +loved one another with much fervency while we lived on that +island; and, for the matter of that, we love each other +still.</p> + +<p>And while I am on this subject, or rather the subject that +just preceded it—namely, the tides—I may here remark +on another curious natural phenomenon. We found that there +was little or no twilight in this island. We had a distinct +remembrance of the charming long twilight at home, which some +people think the most delightful part of the day, though for my +part I have always preferred sunrise; and when we first landed, +we used to sit down on some rocky point or eminence, at the close +of our day’s work, to enjoy the evening breeze; but no +sooner had the sun sunk below the horizon than all became +suddenly dark. This rendered it necessary that we should +watch the sun when we happened to be out hunting, for to be +suddenly left in the dark while in the woods was very perplexing, +as, although the stars shone with great beauty and brilliancy, +they could not pierce through the thick umbrageous boughs that +interlaced above our heads.</p> + +<p>But, to return: After having told all we could to Peterkin +about the Diamond Cave under Spouting Cliff, as we named the +locality, we were wending our way rapidly homewards, when a grunt +and a squeal were borne down by the land breeze to our ears.</p> + +<p>“That’s the ticket!” was Peterkin’s +remarkable exclamation, as he started convulsively, and levelled +his spear.</p> + +<p>“Hist!” cried Jack; “these are your friends, +Peterkin. They must have come over expressly to pay you a +friendly visit, for it is the first time we have seen them on +this side the island.”</p> + +<p>“Come along!” cried Peterkin, hurrying towards the +wood, while Jack and I followed, smiling at his impatience.</p> + +<p>Another grunt and half a dozen squeals, much louder than +before, came down the valley. At this time we were just +opposite the small vale which lay between the Valley of the Wreck +and Spouting Cliff.</p> + +<p>“I say, Peterkin,” cried Jack, in a hoarse +whisper.</p> + +<p>“Well, what is’t?”</p> + +<p>“Stay a bit, man. These grunters are just up there +on the hill side. If you go and stand with Ralph in the lee +of yon cliff, I’ll cut round behind and drive them through +the gorge, so that you’ll have a better chance of picking +out a good one. Now, mind you pitch into a fat young pig, +Peterkin,” added Jack, as he sprang into the bushes.</p> + +<p>“Won’t I, just!” said Peterkin, licking his +lips, as we took our station beside the cliff. “I +feel quite a tender affection for young pigs in my heart. +Perhaps it would be more correct to say in my +s—.”</p> + +<p>“There they come!” cried I, as a terrific yell +from Jack sent the whole herd screaming down the hill. Now, +Peterkin, being unable to hold back, crept a short way up a very +steep grassy mound, in order to get a better view of the hogs +before they came up; and just as he raised his head above its +summit, two little pigs, which had outrun their companions, +rushed over the top with the utmost precipitation. One of +these brushed close past Peterkin’s ear; the other, unable +to arrest its headlong flight, went, as Peterkin himself +afterwards expressed it, “bash” into his arms with a +sudden squeal, which was caused more by the force of the blow +than the will of the animal, and both of them rolled violently +down to the foot of the mound. No sooner was this reached +than the little pig recovered its feet, tossed up its tail, and +fled shrieking from the spot. But I slang a large stone +after it, which, being fortunately well aimed, hit it behind the +ear, and felled it to the earth.</p> + +<p>“Capital, Ralph! that’s your sort!” cried +Peterkin, who, to my surprise and great relief, had risen to his +feet. Apparently unhurt, though much dishevelled, he rushed +franticly towards the gorge, which the yells of the hogs told us +they were now approaching. I had made up my mind that I +would abstain from killing another, as, if Peterkin should be +successful, two were more than sufficient for our wants at the +present time. Suddenly they all burst forth,—two or +three little round ones in advance, and an enormous old sow with +a drove of hogs at her heels.</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin,” said I, “there’s a +nice little fat one; just spear it.”</p> + +<p>But Peterkin did not move; he allowed it to pass +unharmed. I looked at him in surprise, and saw that his +lips were compressed and his eyebrows knitted, as if he were +about to fight with some awful enemy.</p> + +<p>“What is it?” I inquired, with some +trepidation.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he levelled his spear, darted forward, and, with a +yell that nearly froze the blood in my veins, stabbed the old sow +to the heart. Nay, so vigorously was it done that the spear +went in at one side and came out at the other!</p> + +<p>“Oh, Peterkin!” said I, going up to him, +“what have you done?”</p> + +<p>“Done? I’ve killed their +great-great-grandmother, that’s all,” said he, +looking with a somewhat awe-struck expression at the transfixed +animal.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! what’s this?” said Jack, as he came +up. “Why, Peterkin, you must be fond of a tough +chop. If you mean to eat this old hog, she’ll try +your jaws, I warrant. What possessed you to stick +<i>her</i>, Peterkin?”</p> + +<p>“Why, the fact is I want a pair of shoes.”</p> + +<p>“What have your shoes to do with the old hog?’ +said I, smiling.</p> + +<p>“My present shoes have certainly nothing to do with +her,” replied Peterkin; “nevertheless she will have a +good deal to do with my future shoes. The fact is, when I +saw you floor that pig so neatly, Ralph, it struck me that there +was little use in killing another. Then I remembered all at +once that I had long wanted some leather or tough substance to +make shoes of, and this old grandmother seemed so tough that I +just made up my mind to stick her, and you see I’ve done +it!”</p> + +<p>“That you certainly have, Peterkin,” said Jack, as +he was examining the transfixed animal.</p> + +<p>We now considered how we were to carry our game home, for, +although the distance was short, the hog was very heavy. At +length we hit on the plan of tying its four feet together, and +passing the spear handle between them. Jack took one end on +his shoulder, I took the other on mine, and Peterkin carried the +small pig.</p> + +<p>Thus we returned in triumph to our bower, laden, as Peterkin +remarked, with the glorious spoils of a noble hunt. As he +afterwards spoke in similarly glowing terms in reference to the +supper that followed, there is every reason to believe that we +retired that night to our leafy beds in a high state of +satisfaction.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Boat-building extraordinary—Peterkin tries his hand at +cookery and fails most signally—The boat +finished—Curious conversation with the cat, and other +matters.</p> + +<p>For many days after this Jack applied himself with unremitting +assiduity to the construction of our boat, which at length began +to look somewhat like one. But those only who have had the +thing to do can entertain a right idea of the difficulty involved +in such an undertaking, with no other implements than an axe, a +bit of hoop-iron, a sail-needle, and a broken pen-knife. +But Jack did it. He was of, that disposition which +<i>will</i> not be conquered. When he believed himself to +be acting rightly, he overcame all obstacles. I have seen +Jack, when doubtful whether what he was about to do were right or +wrong, as timid and vacillating as a little girl,—and I +honour him for it!</p> + +<p>As this boat was a curiosity in its way, a few words here +relative to the manner of its construction may not be amiss.</p> + +<p>I have already mentioned the chestnut tree with its wonderful +buttresses or planks. This tree, then, furnished us with +the chief part of our material. First of all Jack sought +out a limb of a tree of such a form and size as, while it should +form the keel a bend at either end should form the stem and stern +posts. Such a piece, however, was not easy to obtain, but +at last he procured it, by rooting up a small tree which had a +branch growing at the proper angle about ten feet up its stem, +with two strong roots growing in such a form as enabled him to +make a flat-sterned boat. This placed, he procured three +branching roots of suitable size, which he fitted to the keel at +equal distances, thus forming three strong ribs. Now, the +squaring and shaping of these, and the cutting of the grooves in +the keel, was an easy enough matter, as it was all work for the +axe, in the use of which Jack was become wonderfully expert; but +it was quite a different affair when he came to nailing the ribs +to the keel, for we had no instrument capable of boring a large +hole, and no nails to fasten them with. We were, indeed, +much perplexed here; but Jack at length devised an instrument +that served very well. He took the remainder of our +hoop-iron and beat it into the form of a pipe or cylinder, about +as thick as a man’s finger. This he did by means of +our axe and the old rusty axe we had found at the house of the +poor man at the other side of the island. This, when made +red hot, bored slowly though the timbers; and, the better to +retain the heat, Jack shut up one end of it and filled it with +sand. True, the work was very slowly done, but it mattered +not—we had little else to do. Two holes were bored in +each timber, about an inch and a half apart, and also down into +the keel, but not quite through. Into these were placed +stout pegs made of a tree called iron-wood; and, when they were +hammered well home, the timbers were as firmly fixed as if they +had been nailed with iron. The gunwales, which were very +stout, were fixed in a similar manner. But, besides the +wooden nails, they were firmly lashed to the stem and stern posts +and ribs by means of a species of cordage which we had contrived +to make out of the fibrous husk of the cocoa nut. This husk +was very tough, and when a number of the threads were joined +together they formed excellent cordage. At first we tied +the different lengths together, but this was such a clumsy and +awkward complication of knots, that we contrived, by careful +interlacing of the ends together before twisting, to make good +cordage of any size or length we chose. Of course it cost +us much time and infinite labour, but Jack kept up our spirits +when we grew weary, and so all that we required was at last +constructed.</p> + +<p>Planks were now cut off the chestnut trees of about an inch +thick. These were dressed with the axe,—but clumsily, +for an axe is ill adapted for such work. Five of these +planks on each side were sufficient, and we formed the boat in a +very rounded, barrel-like shape, in order to have as little +twisting of the planks as possible; for, although we could easily +bend them, we could not easily twist them. Having no nails +to rivet the planks with, we threw aside the ordinary fashion of +boat building and adopted one of our own. The planks were +therefore placed on each other’s edges, and sewed together +with the tough cordage already mentioned. They were also +thus sewed to the stem, the stern, and the keel. Each +stitch or tie was six inches apart, and was formed thus: Three +holes were bored in the upper plank and three in the +lower,—the holes being above each other, that is, in a +vertical line. Through these holes the cord was passed, +and, when tied, formed a powerful stitch of three ply. +Besides this, we placed between the edges of the planks, layers +of cocoa-nut fibre, which, as it swelled when wetted, would, we +hoped, make our little vessel water-tight. But in order +further to secure this end, we collected a large quantity of +pitch from the bread-fruit tree, with which, when boiled in our +old iron pot, we payed the whole of the inside of the boat, and, +while it was yet hot, placed large pieces of cocoa-nut cloth on +it, and then gave it another coat above that. Thus the +interior was covered with a tough water-tight material; while the +exterior, being uncovered, and so exposed to the swelling action +of the water, was we hoped, likely to keep the boat quite +dry. I may add that our hopes were not disappointed.</p> + +<p>While Jack was thus engaged, Peterkin and I sometimes assisted +him, but, as our assistance was not much required, we more +frequently went a-hunting on the extensive mud-flats at the +entrance of the long valley which lay nearest to our bower. +Here we found large flocks of ducks of various kinds, some of +them bearing so much resemblance to the wild ducks of our own +country that I think they must have been the same. On these +occasions we took the bow and the sling, with both of which we +were often successful, though I must confess I was the least +so. Our suppers were thus pleasantly varied, and sometimes +we had such a profusion spread out before us that we frequently +knew not with which of the dainties to begin.</p> + +<p>I must also add, that the poor old cat which we had brought +home had always a liberal share of our good things, and so well +was it looked after, especially by Peterkin, that it recovered +much of its former strength, and seemed to improve in sight as +well as hearing.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p175b.jpg"> +<img alt="Leaving for the “mud-flats”" +src="images/p175s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>The large flat stone, or rock of coral, which stood just in +front of the entrance to our bower, was our table. On this +rock we had spread out the few articles we possessed the day we +were shipwrecked; and on the same rock, during many a day +afterwards, we spread out the bountiful supply with which we had +been blessed on our Coral Island. Sometimes we sat down at +this table to a feast consisting of hot rolls,—as Peterkin +called the newly baked bread fruit,—a roast pig, roast +duck, boiled and roasted yams, cocoa nuts, taro, and sweet +potatoes; which we followed up with a dessert of plums, apples, +and plantains,—the last being a large-sized and delightful +fruit, which grew on a large shrub or tree not more than twelve +feet high, with light-green leaves of enormous length and +breadth. These luxurious feasts were usually washed down +with cocoa-nut lemonade.</p> + +<p>Occasionally Peterkin tried to devise some new +dish,—“a conglomerate,” as he used to say; but +these generally turned out such atrocious compounds that he was +ultimately induced to give up his attempts in extreme +disgust. Not forgetting, however, to point out to Jack that +his failure was a direct contradiction to the proverb which he, +Jack, was constantly thrusting down his throat, namely, that +“where there’s a will there’s a +way.” For he had a great will to become a cook, but +could by no means find a way to accomplish that end.</p> + +<p>One day, while Peterkin and I were seated beside our table on +which dinner was spread, Jack came up from the beach, and, +flinging down his axe, exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“There, lads, the boat’s finished at last! so +we’ve nothing to do now but shape two pair of oars, and +then we may put to sea as soon as we like.”</p> + +<p>This piece of news threw us into a state of great joy; for +although we were aware that the boat had been gradually getting +near its completion, it had taken so long that we did not expect +it to be quite ready for at least two or three weeks. But +Jack had wrought hard and said nothing, in order to surprise +us.</p> + +<p>“My dear fellow,” cried Peterkin, +“you’re a perfect trump. But why did you not +tell us it was so nearly ready? won’t we have a jolly sail +to-morrow? eh?”</p> + +<p>“Don’t talk so much, Peterkin,” said Jack; +“and, pray, hand me a bit of that pig.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly, my dear,” cried Peterkin, seizing the +axe; “what part will you have? a leg, or a wing, or a piece +of the breast; which?”</p> + +<p>“A hind leg, if you please,” answered Jack; +“and, pray, be so good as to include the tail.”</p> + +<p>“With all my heart,” said Peterkin, exchanging the +axe for his hoop-iron knife, with which he cut off the desired +portion. “I’m only too glad, my dear boy, to +see that your appetite is so wholesale; and there’s no +chance whatever of its dwindling down into re-tail again, at +least in so far as this pig is concerned. Ralph, lad, why +don’t you laugh?—eh?” he added turning suddenly +to me with a severe look of inquiry.</p> + +<p>“Laugh?” said I; “what at, Peterkin? why +should I laugh?”</p> + +<p>Both Jack and Peterkin answered this inquiry by themselves +laughing so immoderately that I was induced to believe I had +missed noticing some good joke, so I begged that it might be +explained to me; but as this only produced repeated roars of +laughter, I smiled and helped myself to another slice of +plantain.</p> + +<p>“Well, but,” continued Peterkin, “I was +talking of a sail to-morrow. Can’t we have one, +Jack?”</p> + +<p>“No,” replied Jack, “we can’t have a +sail, but I hope we shall have a row, as I intend to work hard at +the oars this afternoon, and, if we can’t get them finished +by sunset we’ll light our candle-nuts, and turn them out of +hands before we turn into bed.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” said Peterkin, tossing a lump of pork +to the cat, who received it with a mew of satisfaction. +“I’ll help you, if I can.”</p> + +<p>“Afterwards,” continued Jack, “we will make +a sail out of the cocoa-nut cloth, and rig up a mast, and then we +shall be able to sail to some of the other islands, and visit our +old friends the penguins.”</p> + +<p>The prospect of being so soon in a position to extend our +observations to the other islands, and enjoy a sail over the +beautiful sea, afforded us much delight, and, after dinner, we +set about making the oars in good earnest. Jack went into +the woods and blocked them roughly out with the axe, and I +smoothed them down with the knife, while Peterkin remained in the +bower, spinning, or, rather, twisting some strong thick cordage +with which to fasten them to the boat.</p> + +<p>We worked hard and rapidly, so that, when the sun went down, +Jack and I returned to the bower with four stout oars, which +required little to be done to them save a slight degree of +polishing with the knife. As we drew near we were suddenly +arrested by the sound of a voice! We were not a little +surprised at this—indeed I may almost say +alarmed—for, although Peterkin was undoubtedly fond of +talking, we had never, up to this time, found him talking to +himself. We listened intently, and still heard the sound of +a voice as if in conversation. Jack motioned me to be +silent, and, advancing to the bower on tip-toe, we peeped in.</p> + +<p>The sight that met our gaze was certainly not a little +amusing. On the top of a log which we sometimes used as a +table, sat the black cat, with a very demure expression on its +countenance; and in front of it, sitting on the ground, with his +legs extended on either side of the log, was Peterkin. At +the moment we saw him he was gazing intently into the cat’s +face, with his nose about four inches from it,—his hands +being thrust into his breeches pockets.</p> + +<p>“Cat,” said Peterkin, turning his head a little on +one side, “I love you!”</p> + +<p>There was a pause, as if Peterkin awaited a reply to this +affectionate declaration but the cat said nothing.</p> + +<p>“Do you hear me?” cried Peterkin, sharply. +“I love you—I do. Don’t you love +me?”</p> + +<p>To this touching appeal the cat said “Mew,” +faintly.</p> + +<p>“Ah! that’s right. You’re a jolly old +rascal. Why did you not speak at once? eh?” and +Peterkin put forward his mouth and kissed the cat on the +nose!</p> + +<p>“Yes,” continued Peterkin, after a pause, “I +love you. D’you think I’d say so if I +didn’t, you black villain? I love you because +I’ve got to take care of you, and to look after you, and to +think about you, and to see that you don’t +die—”</p> + +<p>“Mew, me-a-w!” said the cat.</p> + +<p>“Very good,” continued Peterkin, “quite +true, I have no doubt; but you’ve no right to interrupt me, +sir. Hold your tongue till I have done speaking. +Moreover, cat, I love you because you came to me the first time +you ever saw me, and didn’t seem to be afraid, and appeared +to be fond of me, though you didn’t know that I +wasn’t going to kill you. Now, that was brave, that +was bold, and very jolly, old boy, and I love you for it—I +do!”</p> + +<p>Again there was a pause of a few minutes, during which the cat +looked placid, and Peterkin dropped his eyes upon its toes as if +in contemplation. Suddenly he looked up.</p> + +<p>“Well, cat, what are you thinking about now? won’t +speak? eh? Now, tell me; don’t you think it’s a +monstrous shame that these two scoundrels, Jack and Ralph, should +keep us waiting for our supper so long?”</p> + +<p>Here the cat arose, put up its back and stretched itself; +yawned slightly, and licked the point of Peterkin’s +nose!</p> + +<p>“Just so, old boy, you’re a clever fellow,—I +really do believe the brute understands me!” said Peterkin, +while a broad grin overspread his face, as he drew back and +surveyed the cat.</p> + +<p>At this point Jack burst into a loud fit of laughter. +The cat uttered an angry fuff and fled, while Peterkin sprang up +and exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“Bad luck to you, Jack! you’ve nearly made the +heart jump out of my body, you have.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I have,” replied Jack, laughing, as we +entered the bower, “but, as I don’t intend to keep +you or the cat any longer from your supper, I hope that +you’ll both forgive me.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin endeavoured to turn this affair off with a laugh, but +I observed that he blushed very deeply at the time we discovered +ourselves, and he did not seem to relish any allusion to the +subject afterwards; so we refrained from remarking on it ever +after,—though it tickled us not a little at the time.</p> + +<p>After supper we retired to rest and to dream of wonderful +adventures in our little boat, and distant voyages upon the +sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The boat launched—We visit the coral reef—The +great breaker that never goes down—Coral insects—The +way in which coral islands are made—The boat’s +sail—We tax our ingenuity to form fish-hooks—Some of +the fish we saw—And a monstrous whale—Wonderful +shower of little fish—Water-spouts.</p> + +<p>It was a bright, clear, beautiful morning, when we first +launched our little boat and rowed out upon the placid waters of +the lagoon. Not a breath of wind ruffled the surface of the +deep. Not a cloud spotted the deep blue sky. Not a +sound that was discordant broke the stillness of the morning, +although there were many sounds, sweet, tiny, and melodious, that +mingled in the universal harmony of nature. The sun was +just rising from the Pacific’s ample bosom and tipping the +mountain tops with a red glow. The sea was shining like a +sheet of glass, yet heaving with the long deep swell that, all +the world round, indicates the life of ocean; and the bright +sea-weeds and the brilliant corals shone in the depths of that +pellucid water, as we rowed over it, like rare and precious +gems. Oh! it was a sight fitted to stir the soul of man to +its profoundest depths, and, if he owned a heart at all, to lift +that heart in adoration and gratitude to the great Creator of +this magnificent and glorious universe.</p> + +<p>At first, in the strength of our delight, we rowed hither and +thither without aim or object. But after the effervescence +of our spirits was abated, we began to look about us and to +consider what we should do.</p> + +<p>“I vote that we row to the reef,” cried +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“And I vote that we visit the islands within the +lagoon,” said I.</p> + +<p>“And I vote we do both,” cried Jack, “so +pull away, boys.”</p> + +<p>As I have already said, we had made four oars, but our boat +was so small that only two were necessary. The extra pair +were reserved in case any accident should happen to the +others. It was therefore only needful that two of us should +row, while the third steered, by means of an oar, and relieved +the rowers occasionally.</p> + +<p>First we landed on one of the small islands and ran all over +it, but saw nothing worthy of particular notice. Then we +landed on a larger island, on which were growing a few cocoa-nut +trees. Not having eaten anything that morning, we gathered +a few of the nuts and breakfasted. After this we pulled +straight out to sea and landed on the coral reef.</p> + +<p>This was indeed a novel and interesting sight to us. We +had now been so long on shore that we had almost forgotten the +appearance of breakers, for there were none within the lagoon; +but now, as we stood beside the foam-crested billow of the open +sea, all the enthusiasm of the sailor was awakened in our +breasts; and, as we gazed on the wide-spread ruin of that single +magnificent breaker that burst in thunder at our feet, we forgot +the Coral Island behind us; we forgot our bower and the calm +repose of the scented woods; we forgot all that had passed during +the last few months, and remembered nothing but the storms, the +calms, the fresh breezes and the surging billows of the open +sea.</p> + +<p>This huge, ceaseless breaker, to which I have so often +alluded, was a much larger and more sublime object than we had at +all imagined it to be. It rose many yards above the level +of the sea, and could be seen approaching at some distance from +the reef. Slowly and majestically it came on, acquiring +greater volume and velocity as it advanced, until it assumed the +form of a clear watery arch, which sparkled in the bright +sun. On it came with resistless and solemn +majesty,—the upper edge lipped gently over, and it fell +with a roar that seemed as though the heart of Ocean were broken +in the crash of tumultuous water, while the foam-clad coral reef +appeared to tremble beneath the mighty shock!</p> + +<p>We gazed long and wonderingly at this great sight, and it was +with difficulty we could tear ourselves away from it. As I +have once before mentioned, this wave broke in many places over +the reef and scattered some of its spray into the lagoon, but in +most places the reef was sufficiently broad and elevated to +receive and check its entire force. In many places the +coral rocks were covered with vegetation,—the beginning, as +it appeared to us, of future islands. Thus, on this reef, +we came to perceive how most of the small islands of those seas +are formed. On one part we saw the spray of the breaker +washing over the rocks, and millions of little, active, busy +creatures continuing the work of building up this living +rampart. At another place, which was just a little too high +for the waves to wash over it, the coral insects were all dead; +for we found that they never did their work above water. +They had faithfully completed the mighty work which their Creator +had given them to do, and they were now all dead. Again, in +other spots the ceaseless lashing of the sea had broken the dead +coral in pieces, and cast it up in the form of sand. Here +sea-birds had alighted, little pieces of sea-weed and stray bits +of wood had been washed up, seeds of plants had been carried by +the wind and a few lovely blades of bright green had already +sprung up, which, when they died, would increase the size and +fertility of these emeralds of Ocean. At other places these +islets had grown apace, and were shaded by one or two cocoa-nut +trees, which grew, literally, in the sand, and were constantly +washed by the ocean spray; yet, as I have before remarked, their +fruit was most refreshing and sweet to our taste.</p> + +<p>Again at this time Jack and I pondered the formation of the +large coral islands. We could now understand how the low +ones were formed, but the larger islands cost us much +consideration, yet we could arrive at no certain conclusion on +the subject.</p> + +<p>Having satisfied our curiosity and enjoyed ourselves during +the whole day, in our little boat, we returned, somewhat wearied, +and, withal, rather hungry, to our bower.</p> + +<p>“Now,” said Jack, “as our boat answers so +well, we will get a mast and sail made immediately.”</p> + +<p>“So we will,” cried Peterkin, as we all assisted +to drag the boat above high-water mark; “we’ll light +our candle and set about it this very night. Hurrah, my +boys, pull away!”</p> + +<p>As we dragged our boat, we observed that she grated heavily on +her keel; and, as the sands were in this place mingled with +broken coral rocks, we saw portions of the wood being scraped +off.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” cried Jack, on seeing this. +“That won’t do. Our keel will be worn off in no +time at this rate.”</p> + +<p>“So it will,” said I, pondering deeply as to how +this might be prevented. But I am not of a mechanical turn, +naturally, so I could conceive no remedy save that of putting a +plate of iron on the keel, but as we had no iron I knew not what +was to be done. “It seems to me, Jack,” I +added, “that it is impossible to prevent the keel being +worn off thus.”</p> + +<p>“Impossible!” cried Peterkin, “my dear +Ralph, you are mistaken, there is nothing so +easy—”</p> + +<p>“How?” I inquired, in some surprise.</p> + +<p>“Why, by not using the boat at all!” replied +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Hold your impudent tongue, Peterkin,” said Jack, +as he shouldered the oars, “come along with me and +I’ll give you work to do. In the first place, you +will go and collect cocoa-nut fibre, and set to work to make +sewing twine with it—”</p> + +<p>“Please, captain,” interrupted Peterkin, +“I’ve got lots of it made already,—more than +enough, as a little friend of mine used to be in the habit of +saying every day after dinner.”</p> + +<p>“Very well,” continued Jack; “then +you’ll help Ralph to collect cocoa-nut cloth, and cut it +into shape, after which we’ll make a sail of it. +I’ll see to getting the mast and the gearing; so +let’s to work.”</p> + +<p>And to work we went right busily, so that in three days from +that time we had set up a mast and sail, with the necessary +rigging, in our little boat. The sail was not, indeed, very +handsome to look at, as it was formed of a number of oblong +patches of cloth; but we had sewed it well by means of our +sail-needle, so that it was strong, which was the chief +point. Jack had also overcome the difficulty about the +keel, by pinning to it a <i>false</i> keel. This was a +piece of tough wood, of the same length and width as the real +keel, and about five inches deep. He made it of this depth +because the boat would be thereby rendered not only much more +safe, but more able to beat against the wind; which, in a sea +where the trade-winds blow so long and so steadily in one +direction, was a matter of great importance. This piece of +wood was pegged very firmly to the keel; and we now launched our +boat with the satisfaction of knowing that when the false keel +should be scraped off we could easily put on another; whereas, +should the real keel have been scraped away, we could not have +renewed it without taking our boat to pieces, which Peterkin said +made his “marrow quake to think upon.”</p> + +<p>The mast and sail answered excellently; and we now sailed +about in the lagoon with great delight, and examined with much +interest the appearance of our island from a distance. +Also, we gazed into the depths of the water, and watched for +hours the gambols of the curious and bright-coloured fish among +the corals and sea-weed. Peterkin also made a fishing line, +and Jack constructed a number of hooks, some of which were very +good, others remarkably bad. Some of these hooks were made +of iron-wood, which did pretty well, the wood being extremely +hard, and Jack made them very thick and large. Fish there +are not particular. Some of the crooked bones in fish-heads +also answered for this purpose pretty well. But that which +formed our best and most serviceable hook was the brass +finger-ring belonging to Jack. It gave him not a little +trouble to manufacture it. First he cut it with the axe; +then twisted it into the form of a hook. The barb took him +several hours to cut. He did it by means of constant sawing +with the broken pen-knife. As for the point, an +hour’s rubbing on a piece of sandstone made an excellent +one.</p> + +<p>It would be a matter of much time and labour to describe the +appearance of the multitudes of fish that were day after day +drawn into our boat by means of the brass hook. Peterkin +always caught them,—for we observed that he derived much +pleasure from fishing,—while Jack and I found ample +amusement in looking on, also in gazing down at the coral groves, +and in baiting the hook. Among the fish that we saw, but +did not catch, were porpoises and sword-fish, whales and +sharks. The porpoises came frequently into our lagoon in +shoals, and amused us not a little by their bold leaps into the +air, and their playful gambols in the sea. The sword-fish +were wonderful creatures; some of them apparently ten feet in +length, with an ivory spear, six or eight feet long, projecting +from their noses. We often saw them darting after other +fish, and no doubt they sometimes killed them with their ivory +swords. Jack remembered having heard once of a sword-fish +attacking a ship,—which seemed strange indeed; but, as they +are often in the habit of attacking whales, perhaps it mistook +the ship for one. This sword-fish ran against the vessel +with such force, that it drove its sword quite through the thick +planks; and when the ship arrived in harbour, long afterwards, +the sword was found still sticking in it!</p> + +<p>Sharks did not often appear; but we took care never again to +bathe in deep water without leaving one of our number in the boat +to give us warning, if he should see a shark approaching. +As for the whales, they never came into our lagoon, but we +frequently saw them spouting in the deep water beyond the +reef. I shall never forget my surprise the first day I saw +one of these huge monsters close to me. We had been +rambling about on the reef during the morning, and were about to +re-embark in our little boat, to return home, when a loud blowing +sound caused us to wheel rapidly round. We were just in +time to see a shower of spray falling, and the flukes or tail of +some monstrous fish disappear in the sea a few hundred yards +off. We waited some time to see if he would rise +again. As we stood, the sea seemed to open up at our very +feet; an immense spout of water was sent with a snort high into +the air, and the huge blunt head of a sperm whale arose before +us. It was so large that it could easily have taken our +little boat, along with ourselves, into its mouth! It +plunged slowly back into the sea, like a large ship foundering, +and struck the water with its tail so forcibly as to cause a +sound like a cannon shot. We also saw a great number of +flying fish, although we caught none; and we noticed that they +never flew out of the water except when followed by their bitter +foe, the dolphin, from whom they thus endeavoured to +escape. But of all the fish that we saw, none surprised us +so much as those that we used to find in shallow pools after a +shower of rain; and this not on account of their appearance, for +they were ordinary-looking and very small, but on account of +their having descended in a shower of rain! We could +account for them in no other way, because the pools in which we +found these fish were quite dry before the shower, and at some +distance above high-water mark. Jack, however, suggested a +cause which seemed to me very probable. We used often to +see water-spouts in the sea. A water-spout is a whirling +body of water, which rises from the sea like a sharp-pointed +pillar. After rising a good way, it is met by a long +tongue, which comes down from the clouds; and when the two have +joined, they look something like an hour-glass. The +water-spout is then carried by the wind, sometimes gently, +sometimes with violence, over the sea, sometimes up into the +clouds, and then, bursting asunder, it descends in a +deluge. This often happens over the land as well as over +the sea; and it sometimes does much damage, but frequently it +passes gently away. Now, Jack thought that the little fish +might perhaps have been carried up in a water-spout, and so sent +down again in a shower of rain. But we could not be certain +as to this point; yet we thought it likely.</p> + +<p>During these delightful fishing and boating excursions we +caught a good many eels, which we found to be very good to +eat. We also found turtles among the coral rocks, and made +excellent soup in our iron kettle. Moreover, we discovered +many shrimps and prawns, so that we had no lack of variety in our +food; and, indeed, we never passed a week without making some new +and interesting discovery of some sort or other, either on the +land or in the sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A monster wave and its consequences—The boat lost and +found—Peterkin’s terrible accident—Supplies of +food for a voyage in the boat—We visit Penguin Island, and +are amazed beyond measure—Account of the penguins.</p> + +<p>One day, not long after our little boat was finished, we were +sitting on the rocks at Spouting Cliff, and talking of an +excursion which we intended to make to Penguin Island the next +day.</p> + +<p>“You see,” said Peterkin, “it might be all +very well for a stupid fellow like me to remain here and leave +the penguins alone, but it would be quite inconsistent with your +characters as philosophers to remain any longer in ignorance of +the habits and customs of these birds; so the sooner we go the +better.”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” said I; “there is nothing I +desire so much as to have a closer inspection of them.”</p> + +<p>“And I think,” said Jack, “that you had +better remain at home, Peterkin, to take care of the cat; for +I’m sure the hogs will be at it in your absence, out of +revenge for your killing their great-grandmother so +recklessly.”</p> + +<p>“Stay at home?” cried Peterkin; “my dear +fellow, you would certainly lose your way, or get upset, if I +were not there to take care of you.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, true,” said Jack, gravely, “that did +not occur to me; no doubt you must go. Our boat does +require a good deal of ballast; and all that you say, Peterkin, +carries so much weight with it, that we won’t need stones +if you go.”</p> + +<p>Now, while my companions were talking, a notable event +occurred, which, as it is not generally known, I shall be +particular in recording here.</p> + +<p>While we were talking, as I have said, we noticed a dark line, +like a low cloud or fog-bank, on the seaward horizon. The +day was a fine one, though cloudy, and a gentle breeze was +blowing, but the sea was not rougher, or the breaker on the reef +higher, than usual. At first we thought that this looked +like a thunder-cloud; and, as we had had a good deal of broken +weather of late, accompanied by occasional peals of thunder, we +supposed that a storm must be approaching. Gradually, +however, this line seemed to draw nearer, without spreading up +over the sky, as would certainly have been the case if it had +been a storm-cloud. Still nearer it came, and soon we saw +that it was moving swiftly towards the island; but there was no +sound till it reached the islands out at sea. As it passed +these islands, we observed, with no little anxiety, that a cloud +of white foam encircled them, and burst in spray into the air: it +was accompanied by a loud roar. This led us to conjecture +that the approaching object was an enormous wave of the sea; but +we had no idea how large it was till it came near to +ourselves. When it approached the outer reef, however, we +were awe-struck with its unusual magnitude; and we sprang to our +feet, and clambered hastily up to the highest point of the +precipice, under an indefinable feeling of fear.</p> + +<p>I have said before that the reef opposite Spouting Cliff was +very near to the shore, while, just in front of the bower, it was +at a considerable distance out to sea. Owing to this +formation, the wave reached the reef at the latter point before +it struck at the foot of Spouting Cliff. The instant it +touched the reef we became aware, for the first time, of its +awful magnitude. It burst completely over the reef at all +points, with a roar that seemed louder to me than thunder; and +this roar continued for some seconds, while the wave rolled +gradually along towards the cliff on which we stood. As its +crest reared before us, we felt that we were in great danger, and +turned to flee; but we were too late. With a crash that +seemed to shake the solid rocks the gigantic billow fell, and +instantly the spouting-holes sent up a gush of water-spouts with +such force that they shrieked on issuing from their narrow +vents. It seemed to us as if the earth had been blown up +with water. We were stunned and confused by the shock, and +so drenched and blinded with spray, that we knew not for a few +moments whither to flee for shelter. At length we all three +gained an eminence beyond the reach of the water; but what a +scene of devastation met our gaze as we looked along the +shore! This enormous wave not only burst over the reef, but +continued its way across the lagoon, and fell on the sandy beach +of the island with such force that passed completely over it and +dashed into the woods, levelling the smaller trees and bushes in +its headlong course!</p> + +<p>On seeing this, Jack said he feared our bower must have been +swept away, and that the boat, which was on the beach, must have +been utterly destroyed. Our hearts sank within us as we +thought of this, and we hastened round through the woods towards +our home. On reaching it we found, to our great relief of +mind, that the force of the wave had been expended just before +reaching the bower; but the entrance to it was almost blocked up +by the torn-up bushes and tangled heaps of sea-weed. Having +satisfied ourselves as to the bower, we hurried to the spot where +the boat had been left; but no boat was there! The spot on +which it had stood was vacant, and no sign of it could we see on +looking around us.</p> + +<p>“It may have been washed up into the woods,” said +Jack, hurrying up the beach as he spoke. Still, no boat was +to be seen, and we were about to give ourselves over to despair, +when Peterkin called to Jack and said,—</p> + +<p>“Jack, my friend, you were once so exceedingly sagacious +and wise as to make me acquainted with the fact that cocoa nuts +grow upon trees; will you now be so good as to inform me what +sort of fruit that is growing on the top of yonder bush? for I +confess to being ignorant, or, at least, doubtful on the +point.”</p> + +<p>We looked towards the bush indicated, and there, to our +surprise, beheld our little boat snugly nestled among the +leaves! We were very much overjoyed at this, for we would +have suffered any loss rather than the loss of our boat. We +found that the wave had actually borne the boat on its crest from +the beach into the woods, and there launched it into the heart of +this bush; which was extremely fortunate, for had it been tossed +against a rock or a tree, it would have been dashed to pieces, +whereas it had not received the smallest injury. It was no +easy matter, however, to get it out of the bush and down to the +sea again. This cost us two days of hard labour to +accomplish.</p> + +<p>We had also much ado to clear away the rubbish from before the +bower, and spent nearly a week in constant labour ere we got the +neighbourhood to look as clean and orderly as before; for the +uprooted bushes and sea-weed that lay on the beach formed a more +dreadfully confused-looking mass than one who had not seen the +place after the inundation could conceive.</p> + +<p>Before leaving the subject I may mention, for the sake of +those who interest themselves in the curious natural phenomena of +our world, that this gigantic wave occurs regularly on some of +the islands of the Pacific, once, and sometimes twice in the +year. I heard this stated by the missionaries during my +career in those seas. They could not tell me whether it +visited all of the islands, but I was certainly assured that it +occurred periodically in some of them.</p> + +<p>After we had got our home put to rights and cleared of the +<i>debris</i> of the inundation, we again turned our thoughts to +paying the penguins a visit. The boat was therefore +overhauled and a few repairs done. Then we prepared a +supply of provisions, for we intended to be absent at least a +night or two, perhaps longer. This took us some time to do, +for while Jack was busy with the boat, Peterkin was sent into the +woods to spear a hog or two, and had to search long, sometimes, +ere he found them. Peterkin was usually sent on this +errand, when we wanted a pork chop (which was not seldom), +because he was so active, and could run so wonderfully fast that +he found no difficulty in overtaking the hogs; but, being +dreadfully reckless, he almost invariably tumbled over stumps and +stones in the course of his wild chase, and seldom returned home +without having knocked the skin off his shins. Once, +indeed, a more serious accident happened to him. He had +been out all morning alone and did not return at the usual time +to dinner. We wondered at this, for Peterkin was always +very punctual at the dinner hour. As supper-time drew near +we began to be anxious about him, and at length sallied forth to +search the woods. For a long time we sought in vain, but a +little before dark we came upon the tracks of the hogs, which we +followed up until we came to the brow of a rather steep bank or +precipice. Looking over this we beheld Peterkin lying in a +state of insensibility at the foot, with his cheek resting on the +snout of a little pig, which was pinned to the earth by the +spear! We were dreadfully alarmed, but hastened to bathe +his forehead with water, and had soon the satisfaction of seeing +him revive. After we had carried him home he related to as +how the thing had happened.</p> + +<p>“You must know,” said he, “I walked about +all the forenoon, till I was as tired as an old donkey, without +seeing a single grunter, not so much as a track of one; but, as I +was determined not to return empty-handed, I resolved to go +without my dinner and—”</p> + +<p>“What!” exclaimed Jack, “did you +<i>really</i> resolve to do that?”</p> + +<p>“Now, Jack, hold your tongue,” returned Peterkin; +“I say that I resolved to forego my dinner and to push to +the head of the small valley, where I felt pretty sure of +discovering the hogs. I soon found that I was on the right +scent, for I had scarcely walked half a mile in the direction of +the small plum tree we found there the other day, when a squeak +fell on my ear. ‘Ho, ho,’ said I, ‘there +you go, my boys;’ and I hurried up the glen. I soon +started them, and singling out a fat pig, ran tilt at him. +In a few seconds I was up with him, and stuck my spear right +through his dumpy body. Just as I did so, I saw that we +were on the edge of a precipice, whether high or low I knew not, +but I had been running at such a pace that I could not stop, so +the pig and I gave a howl in concert and went plunging over +together. I remembered nothing more after that, till I came +to my senses and found you bathing my temples, and Ralph wringing +his hands over me.”</p> + +<p>But although Peterkin was often unfortunate, in the way of +getting tumbles, he was successful on the present occasion in +hunting, and returned before evening with three very nice little +hogs. I, also, was successful in my visit to the mud-flats, +where I killed several ducks. So that, when we launched and +loaded our boat at sunrise the following morning, we found our +store of provisions to be more than sufficient. Part had +been cooked the night before, and, on taking note of the +different items, we found the account to stand thus:—</p> + +<p>10 Bread-fruits, (two baked, eight unbaked.)<br /> +20 Yams, (six roasted, the rest raw.)<br /> +6 Taro roots.<br /> +50 Fine large plums.<br /> +6 Cocoa nuts, ripe.<br /> +6 Ditto green, (for drinking.)<br /> +4 Large ducks and two small ones, raw.<br /> +3 Cold roast pigs, with stuffing.</p> + +<p>I may here remark that the stuffing had been devised by +Peterkin specially for the occasion. He kept the manner of +its compounding a profound secret, so I cannot tell what it was; +but I can say, with much confidence, that we found it to be +atrociously bad, and, after the first tasting, scraped it +carefully out and threw it overboard. We calculated that +this supply would last us for several days, but we afterwards +found that it was much more than we required, especially in +regard to the cocoa nuts, of which we found large supplies +wherever we went. However, as Peterkin remarked, it was +better to have too much than too little, as we knew not to what +straits we might be put during our voyage.</p> + +<p>It was a very calm sunny morning when we launched forth and +rowed over the lagoon towards the outlet in the reef, and passed +between the two green islets that guard the entrance. We +experienced some difficulty and no little danger in passing the +surf of the breaker, and shipped a good deal of water in the +attempt; but, once past the billow, we found ourselves floating +placidly on the long oily swell that rose and fell slowly as it +rolled over the wide ocean.</p> + +<p>Penguin Island lay on the other side of our own island, at +about a mile beyond the outer reef, and we calculated that it +must be at least twenty miles distant by the way we should have +to go. We might, indeed, have shortened the way by coasting +round our island inside of the lagoon, and going out at the +passage in the reef nearly opposite to Penguin Island, but we +preferred to go by the open sea; first, because it was more +adventurous; and, secondly, because we should have the pleasure +of again feeling the motion of the deep, which we all loved very +much, not being liable to sea sickness.</p> + +<p>“I wish we had a breeze,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” cried Peterkin, resting on his oar and +wiping his heated brow; “pulling is hard work. Oh +dear, if we could only catch a hundred or two of these gulls, tie +them to the boat with long strings, and make them fly as we want +them, how capital it would be!”</p> + +<p>“Or bore a hole through a shark’s tail, and reeve +a rope through it, eh?” remarked Jack. “But, I +say, it seems that my wish is going to be granted, for here comes +a breeze. Ship your oar, Peterkin. Up with the mast, +Ralph; I’ll see to the sail. Mind your helm; look out +for squalls!”</p> + +<p>This last speech was caused by the sudden appearance of a dark +blue line on the horizon, which, in an incredibly short space of +time, swept down on us, lashing up the sea in white foam as it +went. We presented the stern of the boat to its first +violence, and, in a few seconds, it moderated into a steady +breeze, to which we spread our sail and flew merrily over the +waves. Although the breeze died away soon afterwards, it +had been so stiff while it lasted, that we were carried over the +greater part of our way before it fell calm again; so that, when +the flapping of the sail against the mast told us that it was +time to resume the oars, we were not much more than a mile from +Penguin Island.</p> + +<p>“There go the soldiers!” cried Peterkin as we came +in sight of it; “how spruce their white trousers look, this +morning! I wonder if they will receive us kindly. +D’you think they are hospitable, Jack?”</p> + +<p>“Don’t talk, Peterkin, but pull away, and you +shall see shortly.”</p> + +<p>As we drew near to the island we were much amused by the +manoeuvres and appearance of these strange birds. They +seemed to be of different species, for some had crests on their +heads while others had none, and while some were about the size +of a goose others appeared nearly as large as a swan. We +also saw a huge albatross soaring above the heads of the +penguins. It was followed and surrounded by numerous flocks +of sea-gulls. Having approached to within a few yards of +the island, which was a low rock, with no other vegetation on it +than a few bushes, we lay on our oars and gazed at the birds with +surprise and pleasure, they returning our gaze with +interest. We now saw that their soldier-like appearance was +owing to the stiff, erect manner in which they sat on their short +legs,—“Bolt-up-right,” as Peterkin expressed +it. They had black heads, long sharp beaks, white breasts, +and bluish backs. Their wings were so short that they +looked more like the fins of a fish, and, indeed, we soon saw +that they used them for the purpose of swimming under +water. There were no quills on these wings, but a sort of +scaly feathers; which also thickly covered their bodies. +Their legs were short, and placed so far back that the birds, +while on land, were obliged to stand quite upright in order to +keep their balance; but in the water they floated like other +water-fowl. At first we were so stunned with the clamour +which they and other sea-birds kept up around us, that we knew +not which way to look,—for they covered the rocks in +thousands; but, as we continued to gaze, we observed several +quadrupeds (as we thought) walking in the midst of the +penguins.</p> + +<p>“Pull in a bit,” cried Peterkin, “and +let’s see what these are. They must be fond of noisy +company, to consort with such creatures.”</p> + +<p>To our surprise we found that these were no other than +penguins which had gone down on all fours, and were crawling +among the bushes on their feet and wings, just like +quadrupeds. Suddenly one big old bird, that had been +sitting on a point very near to us, gazing in mute astonishment, +became alarmed, and, scuttling down the rocks, plumped or fell, +rather than ran, into the sea. It dived in a moment, and, a +few seconds afterwards, came out of the water far a-head, with +such a spring, and such a dive back into the sea again, that we +could scarcely believe it was not a fish that had leaped in +sport.</p> + +<p>“That beats everything,” said Peterkin, rubbing +his nose, and screwing up his face with an expression of +exasperated amazement. “I’ve heard of a thing +being neither fish, flesh, nor fowl, but I never did expect to +live to see a brute that was all three together,—at +once—in one! But look there!” he continued, +pointing with a look of resignation to the shore, “look +there! there’s no end to it. What <i>has</i> that +brute got under its tail?”</p> + +<p>We turned to look in the direction pointed out, and there saw +a penguin walking slowly and very sedately along the shore with +an egg under its tail. There were several others, we +observed, burdened in the same way; and we found afterwards that +these were a species of penguins that always carried their eggs +so. Indeed, they had a most convenient cavity for the +purpose, just between the tail and the legs. We were very +much impressed with the regularity and order of this +colony. The island seemed to be apportioned out into +squares, of which each penguin possessed one, and sat in stiff +solemnity in the middle of it, or took a slow march up and down +the spaces between. Some were hatching their eggs, but +others were feeding their young ones in a manner that caused us +to laugh not a little. The mother stood on a mound or +raised rock, while the young one stood patiently below her on the +ground. Suddenly the mother raised her head and uttered a +series of the most discordant cackling sounds.</p> + +<p>“She’s going to choke,” cried Peterkin.</p> + +<p>But this was not the case, although, I confess, she looked +like it. In a few seconds she put down her head and opened +her mouth, into which the young one thrust its beak and seemed to +suck something from her throat. Then the cackling was +renewed, the sucking continued, and so the operation of feeding +was carried on till the young one was satisfied; but what she fed +her little one with, we could not tell.</p> + +<p>“Now, just look yonder!” said Peterkin, in an +excited tone; “if that isn’t the most abominable +piece of maternal deception I ever saw. That rascally old +lady penguin has just pitched her young one into the sea, and +there’s another about to follow her example.”</p> + +<p>This indeed seemed to be the cue, for, on the top of a steep +rock close to the edge of the sea, we observed an old penguin +endeavouring to entice her young one into the water; but the +young one seemed very unwilling to go, and, notwithstanding the +enticements of its mother, moved very slowly towards her. +At last she went gently behind the young bird and pushed it a +little towards the water, but with great tenderness, as much as +to say, ‘Don’t be afraid, darling! I +won’t hurt you, my pet!’ but no sooner did she get it +to the edge of the rock, where it stood looking pensively down at +the sea, than she gave it a sudden and violent push, sending it +headlong down the slope into the water, where its mother left it +to scramble ashore as it best could. We observed many of +them employed in doing this, and we came to the conclusion that +this is the way in which old penguins teach their children to +swim.</p> + +<p>Scarcely had we finished making our remarks on this, when we +were startled by about a dozen of the old birds hopping in the +most clumsy and ludicrous manner towards the sea. The +beach, here, was a sloping rock, and when they came to it, some +of them succeeded in hopping down in safety, but others lost +their balance and rolled and scrambled down the slope in the most +helpless manner. The instant they reached the water, +however, they seemed to be in their proper element. They +dived and bounded out of it and into it again with the utmost +agility; and so, diving and bounding and spluttering, for they +could not fly, they went rapidly out to sea.</p> + +<p>On seeing this, Peterkin turned with a grave face to us and +said, “It’s my opinion that these birds are all +stark, staring mad, and that this is an enchanted island. I +therefore propose that we should either put about ship and fly in +terror from the spot, or land valorously on the island, and sell +our lives as dearly as we can.”</p> + +<p>“I vote for landing, so pull in, lads,” said Jack, +giving a stroke with his oar that made the boat spin. In a +few seconds we ran the boat into a little creek where we made her +fast to a projecting piece of coral, and, running up the beach, +entered the ranks of the penguins armed with our cudgels and our +spear. We were greatly surprised to find that, instead of +attacking us or showing signs of fear at our approach, these +curious birds did not move from their places until we laid hands +on them, and merely turned their eyes on us in solemn, stupid +wonder as we passed. There was one old penguin, however, +that began to walk slowly toward the sea, and Peterkin took it +into his head that he would try to interrupt its progress, so he +ran between it and the sea and brandished his cudgel in its +face. But this proved to be a resolute old bird. It +would not retreat; nay, more, it would not cease to advance, but +battled with Peterkin bravely and drove him before it until it +reached the sea. Had Peterkin used his club he could easily +have felled it, no doubt; but, as he had no wish to do so cruel +an act merely out of sport, he let the bird escape.</p> + +<p>We spent fully three hours on this island in watching the +habits of these curious birds, and, when we finally left them, we +all three concluded, after much consultation, that they were the +most wonderful creatures we had ever seen; and further, we +thought it probable that they were the most wonderful creatures +in the world!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An awful storm and its consequences—Narrow +escape—A rock proves a sure foundation—A fearful +night and a bright morning—Deliverance from danger.</p> + +<p>It was evening before we left the island of the +penguins. As we had made up our minds to encamp for the +night on a small island, whereon grew a few cocoa-nut trees, +which was about two miles off, we lay to our oars with some +energy. But a danger was in store for us which we had not +anticipated. The wind, which had carried us so quickly to +Penguin Island, freshened as evening drew on, to a stiff breeze, +and, before we had made half the distance to the small island, it +became a regular gale. Although it was not so directly +against us as to prevent our rowing in the course we wished to +go, yet it checked us very much; and although the force of the +sea was somewhat broken by the island, the waves soon began to +rise, and to roll their broken crests against our small craft, so +that she began to take in water, and we had much ado to keep +ourselves afloat. At last the wind and sea together became +so violent that we found it impossible to make the island, so +Jack suddenly put the head of the boat round and ordered Peterkin +and me to hoist a corner of the sail, intending to run back to +Penguin Island.</p> + +<p>“We shall at least have the shelter of the +bushes,” he said, as the boat flew before the wind, +“and the penguins will keep us company.”</p> + +<p>As Jack spoke, the wind suddenly shifted, and blew so much +against us that we were forced to hoist more of the sail in order +to beat up for the island, being by this change thrown much to +leeward of it. What made matters worse was, that the gale +came in squalls, so that we were more than once nearly upset.</p> + +<p>“Stand by, both of you,” cried Jack, in a quick, +earnest tone; “be ready to dowse the sail. I very +much fear we won’t make the island after all.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin and I were so much in the habit of trusting +everything to Jack that we had fallen into the way of not +considering things, especially such things as were under +Jack’s care. We had, therefore, never doubted for a +moment that all was going well, so that it was with no little +anxiety that we heard him make the above remark. However, +we had no time for question or surmise, for, at the moment he +spoke, a heavy squall was bearing down upon us, and, as we were +then flying with our lee gunwale dipping occasionally under the +waves, it was evident that we should have to lower our sail +altogether. In a few seconds the squall struck the boat, +but Peterkin and I had the sail down in a moment, so that it did +not upset us; but, when it was past, we were more than half full +of water. This I soon baled out, while Peterkin again +hoisted a corner of the sail; but the evil which Jack had feared +came upon us. We found it quite impossible to make Penguin +Island. The gale carried us quickly past it towards the +open sea, and the terrible truth flashed upon us that we should +be swept out and left to perish miserably in a small boat in the +midst of the wide ocean.</p> + +<p>This idea was forced very strongly upon us because we saw +nothing in the direction whither the wind was blowing us save the +raging billows of the sea; and, indeed, we trembled as we gazed +around us, for we were now beyond the shelter of the islands, and +it seemed as though any of the huge billows, which curled over in +masses of foam, might swallow us up in a moment. The water, +also, began to wash in over our sides, and I had to keep +constantly baling, for Jack could not quit the helm nor Peterkin +the sail for an instant, without endangering our lives. In +the midst of this distress Jack uttered an exclamation of hope, +and pointed towards a low island or rock which lay directly +ahead. It had been hitherto unobserved, owing to the dark +clouds that obscured the sky and the blinding spray that seemed +to fill the whole atmosphere.</p> + +<p>As we neared this rock we observed that it was quite destitute +of trees and verdure, and so low that the sea broke completely +over it. In fact it was nothing more than the summit of one +of the coral formations, which rose only a few feet above the +level of the water, and was, in stormy weather, all but +invisible. Over this island the waves were breaking in the +utmost fury, and our hearts sank within us as we saw that there +was not a spot where we could thrust our little boat without its +being dashed to pieces.</p> + +<p>“Show a little bit more sail,” cried Jack, as we +swept past the weather side of the rock with fearful speed.</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay,” answered Peterkin, hoisting about a foot +more of our sail.</p> + +<p>Little though the addition was it caused the boat to lie over +and creak so loudly, as we cleft the foaming waves, that I +expected to be upset every instant; and I blamed Jack in my heart +for his rashness. But I did him injustice, for, although +during two seconds the water rushed in-board in a torrent, he +succeeded in steering us sharply round to the leeward side of the +rock, where the water was comparatively calm, and the force of +the breeze broken.</p> + +<p>“Out your oars now, lads; that’s well done. +Give way!” We obeyed instantly. The oars +splashed into the waves together. One good hearty pull, and +we were floating in a comparatively calm creek that was so narrow +as to be barely able to admit our boat. Here we were in +perfect safety, and, as we leaped on shore and fastened our cable +to the rocks, I thanked God in my heart for our deliverance from +so great danger. But, although I have said we were now in +safety, I suspect that few of my readers would have envied our +position. It is true we had no lack of food, but we were +drenched to the skin; the sea was foaming round us and the spray +flying over our heads, so that we were completely enveloped, as +it were, in water; the spot on which we had landed was not more +than twelve yards in diameter, and from this spot we could not +move without the risk of being swept away by the storm. At +the upper end of the creek was a small hollow or cave in the +rock, which sheltered us from the fury of the winds and waves; +and as the rock extended in a sort of ledge over our heads, it +prevented the spray from falling upon us.</p> + +<p>“Why,” said Peterkin, beginning to feel cheery +again, “it seems to me that we have got into a +mermaid’s cave, for there is nothing but water all round +us; and as for earth or sky, they are things of the +past.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s idea was not inappropriate, for, what with +the sea roaring in white foam up to our very feet, and the spray +flying in white sheets continually over our heads, and the water +dripping heavily from the ledge above like a curtain in front of +our cave, it did seem to us very much more like being below than +above water.</p> + +<p>“Now, boys,” cried Jack, “bestir yourselves, +and let’s make ourselves comfortable. Toss out our +provisions, Peterkin; and here, Ralph, lend a hand to haul up the +boat. Look sharp.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, captain,” we cried, as we hastened to +obey, much cheered by the hearty manner of our comrade.</p> + +<p>Fortunately the cave, although not very deep, was quite dry, +so that we succeeded in making ourselves much more comfortable +than could have been expected. We landed our provisions, +wrung the water out of our garments, spread our sail below us for +a carpet, and, after having eaten a hearty meal, began to feel +quite cheerful. But as night drew on, our spirits sank +again, for with the daylight all evidence of our security +vanished away. We could no longer see the firm rock on +which we lay, while we were stunned with the violence of the +tempest that raged around us. The night grew pitchy dark, +as it advanced, so that we could not see our hands when we held +them up before our eyes, and were obliged to feel each other +occasionally to make sure that we were safe, for the storm at +last became so terrible that it was difficult to make our voices +audible. A slight variation of the wind, as we supposed, +caused a few drops of spray ever and anon to blow into our faces; +and the eddy of the sea, in its mad boiling, washed up into our +little creek until it reached our feet and threatened to tear +away our boat. In order to prevent this latter calamity, we +hauled the boat farther up and held the cable in our hands. +Occasional flashes of lightning shone with a ghastly glare +through the watery curtains around us, and lent additional horror +to the scene. Yet we longed for those dismal flashes, for +they were less appalling than the thick blackness that succeeded +them. Crashing peals of thunder seemed to tear the skies in +twain, and fell upon our ears through the wild yelling of the +hurricane as if it had been but a gentle summer breeze; while the +billows burst upon the weather side of the island until we +fancied that the solid rock was giving way, and, in our agony, we +clung to the bare ground, expecting every moment to be whirled +away and whelmed in the black howling sea! Oh! it was a +night of terrible anxiety, and no one can conceive the feelings +of intense gratitude and relief with which we at last saw the +dawn of day break through the vapory mists around us.</p> + +<p>For three days and three nights we remained on this rock, +while the storm continued to rage with unabated fury. On +the morning of the fourth day it suddenly ceased, and the wind +fell altogether; but the waves still ran so high that we did not +dare to put off in our boat. During the greater part of +this period we scarcely slept above a few minutes at a time, but +on the third night we slept soundly and awoke early on the fourth +morning to find the sea very much down, and the sun shining +brightly again in the clear blue sky.</p> + +<p>It was with light hearts that we launched forth once more in +our little boat and steered away for our island home, which, we +were overjoyed to find, was quite visible on the horizon, for we +had feared that we had been blown out of sight of it +altogether. As it was a dead calm we had to row during the +greater part of the day; but towards the afternoon a fair breeze +sprang up, which enabled us to hoist our sail. We soon +passed Penguin Island, and the other island which we had failed +to reach on the day the storm commenced; but as we had still +enough of provisions, and were anxious to get home, we did not +land, to the great disappointment of Peterkin, who seemed to +entertain quite an affection for the penguins.</p> + +<p>Although the breeze was pretty fresh for several hours, we did +not reach the outer reef of our island till night-fall, and +before we had sailed more than a hundred yards into the lagoon, +the wind died away altogether, so that we had to take to our oars +again. It was late and the moon and stars were shining +brightly when we arrived opposite the bower and leaped upon the +strand. So glad were we to be safe back again on our +beloved island, that we scarcely took time to drag the boat a +short way up the beach, and then ran up to see that all was right +at the bower. I must confess, however, that my joy was +mingled with a vague sort of fear lest our home had been visited +and destroyed during our absence; but on reaching it we found +everything just as it had been left, and the poor black cat +curled up, sound asleep, on the coral table in front of our +humble dwelling.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Shoemaking—The even tenor of our way suddenly +interrupted—An unexpected visit and an appalling +battle—We all become warriors, and Jack proves himself be a +hero.</p> + +<p>For many months after this we continued to live on our island +in uninterrupted harmony and happiness. Sometimes we went +out a-fishing in the lagoon, and sometimes went a-hunting in the +woods, or ascended to the mountain top, by way of variety, +although Peterkin always asserted that we went for the purpose of +hailing any ship that might chance to heave in sight. But I +am certain that none of us wished to be delivered from our +captivity, for we were extremely happy, and Peterkin used to say +that as we were very young we should not feel the loss of a year +or two. Peterkin, as I have said before, was thirteen years +of age, Jack eighteen, and I fifteen. But Jack was very +tall, strong, and manly for his age, and might easily have been +mistaken for twenty.</p> + +<p>The climate was so beautiful that it seemed to be a perpetual +summer, and as many of the fruit-trees continued to bear fruit +and blossom all the year round, we never wanted for a plentiful +supply of food. The hogs, too, seemed rather to increase +than diminish, although Peterkin was very frequent in his attacks +on them with his spear. If at any time we failed in finding +a drove, we had only to pay a visit to the plum-tree before +mentioned, where we always found a large family of them asleep +under its branches.</p> + +<p>We employed ourselves very busily during this time in making +various garments of cocoa-nut cloth, as those with which we had +landed were beginning to be very ragged. Peterkin also +succeeded in making excellent shoes out of the skin of the old +hog, in the following manner:—He first cut a piece of the +hide, of an oblong form, a few inches longer than his foot. +This he soaked in water, and, while it was wet, he sewed up one +end of it, so as to form a rough imitation of that part of the +heel of a shoe where the seam is. This done, he bored a row +of holes all round the edge of the piece of skin, through which a +tough line was passed. Into the sewed-up part of this shoe +he thrust his heel, then, drawing the string tight, the edges +rose up and overlapped his foot all round. It is true there +were a great many ill-looking puckers in these shoes, but we +found them very serviceable notwithstanding, and Jack came at +last to prefer them to his long boots. We ago made various +other useful articles, which added to our comfort, and once or +twice spoke of building us a house, but we had so great an +affection for the bower, and, withal, found it so serviceable, +that we determined not to leave it, nor to attempt the building +of a house, which, in such a climate, might turn out to be rather +disagreeable than useful.</p> + +<p>We often examined the pistol that we had found in the house on +the other side of the island, and Peterkin wished much that we +had powder and shot, as it would render pig-killing much easier; +but, after all, we had become so expert in the use of our sling +and bow and spear, that we were independent of more deadly +weapons.</p> + +<p>Diving in the Water Garden also continued to afford us as much +pleasure as ever; and Peterkin began to be a little more expert +in the water from constant practice. As for Jack and I, we +began to feel as if water were our native element, and revelled +in it with so much confidence and comfort that Peterkin said he +feared we would turn into fish some day, and swim off and leave +him; adding, that he had been for a long time observing that Jack +was becoming more and more like a shark every day. +Whereupon Jack remarked, that if he, Peterkin, were changed into +a fish, he would certainly turn into nothing better or bigger +than a shrimp. Poor Peterkin did not envy us our delightful +excursions under water, except, indeed, when Jack would dive down +to the bottom of the Water Garden, sit down on a rock and look up +and make faces at him. Peterkin did feel envious then, and +often said he would give anything to be able to do that. I +was much amused when Peterkin said this; for if he could only +have seen his own face when he happened to take a short dive, he +would have seen that Jack’s was far surpassed by it. +The great difference being, however, that Jack made faces on +purpose—Peterkin couldn’t help it!</p> + +<p>Now, while we were engaged with these occupations and +amusements, an event occurred one day which was as unexpected as +it was exceedingly alarming and very horrible.</p> + +<p>Jack and I were sitting, as we were often wont to do, on the +rocks at Spouting Cliff, and Peterkin was wringing the water from +his garments, having recently fallen by accident into the +sea,—a thing he was constantly doing,—when our +attention was suddenly arrested by two objects which appeared on +the horizon.</p> + +<p>“What are yon, think you?” I said, addressing +Jack.</p> + +<p>“I can’t imagine,” answered he; +“I’ve noticed them for some time, and fancied they +were black sea-gulls, but the more I look at them the more I feel +convinced they are much larger than gulls.”</p> + +<p>“They seem to be coming towards us,” said I.</p> + +<p>“Hallo! what’s wrong?” inquired Peterkin, +coming up.</p> + +<p>“Look there,” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Whales!” cried Peterkin, shading his eyes with +his hand. “No! eh! can they be boats, +Jack?”</p> + +<p>Our hearts beat with excitement at the very thought of seeing +human faces again.</p> + +<p>“I think you are about right, Peterkin;—but they +seem to me to move strangely for boats,” said Jack, in a +low tone, as if he were talking to himself.</p> + +<p>I noticed that a shade of anxiety crossed Jack’s +countenance as he gazed long and intently at the two objects, +which were now nearing us fast. At last he sprang to his +feet. “They are canoes, Ralph! whether war-canoes or +not I cannot tell, but this I know, that all the natives of the +South Sea Islands are fierce cannibals, and they have little +respect for strangers. We must hide if they land here, +which I earnestly hope they will not do.”</p> + +<p>I was greatly alarmed at Jack’s speech, but I confess I +thought less of what he said than of the earnest, anxious manner +in which he said it, and it was with very uncomfortable feelings +that Peterkin and I followed him quickly into the woods.</p> + +<p>“How unfortunate,” said I, as we gained the +shelter of the bushes, “that we have forgotten our +arms.”</p> + +<p>“It matters not,” said Jack; “here are clubs +enough and to spare.” As he spoke, he laid his hand +on a bundle of stout poles of various sizes, which +Peterkin’s ever-busy hands had formed, during our frequent +visits to the cliff, for no other purpose, apparently, than that +of having something to do.</p> + +<p>We each selected a stout club according to our several tastes, +and lay down behind a rock, whence we could see the canoes +approach, without ourselves being seen. At first we made an +occasional remark on their appearance, but after they entered the +lagoon, and drew near the beach, we ceased to speak, and gazed +with intense interest at the scene before us.</p> + +<p>We now observed that the foremost canoe was being chased by +the other, and that it contained a few women and children, as +well as men,—perhaps forty souls altogether; while the +canoe which pursued it contained only men. They seemed to +be about the same in number, but were better armed, and had the +appearance of being a war party. Both crews were paddling +with all their might, and it seemed as if the pursuers exerted +themselves to overtake the natives ere they could land. In +this, however, they failed. The foremost canoe made for the +beach close beneath the rocks behind which we were +concealed. Their short paddles flashed like meteors in the +water, and sent up a constant shower of spray. The foam +curled from the prow, and the eyes of the rowers glistened in +their black faces as they strained every muscle of their naked +bodies; nor did they relax their efforts till the canoe struck +the beach with a violent shock; then, with a shout of defiance, +the whole party sprang, as if by magic, from the canoe to the +shore. Three women, two of whom carried infants in their +arms, rushed into the woods; and the men crowded to the +water’s edge, with stones in their hands, spears levelled, +and clubs brandished, to resist the landing of their enemies.</p> + +<p>The distance between the two canoes had been about half a +mile, and, at the great speed they were going, this was soon +passed. As the pursuers neared the shore, no sign of fear +or hesitation was noticeable. On they came like a wild +charger,—received but recked not of a shower of +stones. The canoe struck, and, with a yell that seemed to +issue from the throats of incarnate fiends, they leaped into the +water, and drove their enemies up the beach.</p> + +<p>The battle that immediately ensued was frightful to +behold. Most of the men wielded clubs of enormous size and +curious shapes, with which they dashed out each other’s +brains. As they were almost entirely naked, and had to +bound, stoop, leap, and run, in their terrible hand-to-hand +encounters, they looked more like demons than human beings. +I felt my heart grow sick at the sight of this bloody battle, and +would fain have turned away, but a species of fascination seemed +to hold me down and glue my eyes upon the combatants. I +observed that the attacking party was led by a most extraordinary +being, who, from his size and peculiarity, I concluded was a +chief. His hair was frizzed out to an enormous extent, so +that it resembled a large turban. It was of a light-yellow +hue, which surprised me much, for the man’s body was as +black as coal, and I felt convinced that the hair must have been +dyed. He was tattooed from head to foot; and his face, +besides being tattooed, was besmeared with red paint, and +streaked with white. Altogether, with his yellow +turban-like hair, his Herculean black frame, his glittering eyes +and white teeth, he seemed the most terrible monster I ever +beheld. He was very active in the fight, and had already +killed four men.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the yellow-haired chief was attacked by a man quite +as strong and large as himself. He flourished a heavy club +something like an eagle’s beak at the point. For a +second or two these giants eyed each other warily, moving round +and round, as if to catch each other at a disadvantage, but +seeing that nothing was to be gained by this caution, and that +the loss of time might effectually turn the tide of battle either +way, they apparently made up their minds to attack at the same +instant, for, with a wild shout and simultaneous spring, they +swung their heavy clubs, which met with a loud report. +Suddenly the yellow-haired savage tripped, his enemy sprang +forward, the ponderous club was swung, but it did not descend, +for at that moment the savage was felled to the ground by a stone +from the hand of one who had witnessed his chief’s +danger. This was the turning-point in the battle. The +savages who landed first turned and fled towards the bush, on +seeing the fall of their chief. But not one escaped. +They were all overtaken and felled to the earth. I saw, +however, that they were not all killed. Indeed, their +enemies, now that they were conquered, seemed anxious to take +them alive; and they succeeded in securing fifteen, whom they +bound hand and foot with cords, and, carrying them up into the +woods, laid them down among the bushes. Here they left +them, for what purpose I knew not, and returned to the scene of +the late battle, where the remnant of the party were bathing +their wounds.</p> + +<p>Out of the forty blacks that composed the attacking party, +only twenty-eight remained alive, two of whom were sent into the +bush to hunt for the women and children. Of the other +party, as I have said, only ten survived, and these were lying +bound and helpless on the grass.</p> + +<p>Jack and Peterkin and I now looked at each other, and +whispered our fears that the savages might clamber up the rocks +to search for fresh water, and so discover our place of +concealment; but we were so much interested in watching their +movements that we agreed to remain where we were; and, indeed, we +could not easily have risen without exposing ourselves to +detection. One of the savages now went up to the wood and +soon returned with a bundle of fire-wood, and we were not a +little surprised to see him set fire to it by the very same means +used by Jack the time we made our first fire,—namely, with +the bow and drill. When the fire was kindled, two of the +party went again to the woods and returned with one of the bound +men. A dreadful feeling of horror crept over my heart, as +the thought flashed upon me that they were going to burn their +enemies. As they bore him to the fire my feelings almost +overpowered me. I gasped for breath, and seizing my club, +endeavoured to spring to my feet; but Jack’s powerful arm +pinned me to the earth. Next moment one of the savages +raised his club, and fractured the wretched creature’s +skull. He must have died instantly, and, strange though it +may seem, I confess to a feeling of relief when the deed was +done, because I now knew that the poor savage could not be burned +alive. Scarcely had his limbs ceased to quiver when the +monsters cut slices of flesh from his body, and, after roasting +them slightly over the fire, devoured them.</p> + +<p>Suddenly there arose a cry from the woods, and, in a few +seconds, the two savages hastened towards the fire dragging the +three women and their two infants along with them. One of +those women was much younger than her companions, and we were +struck with the modesty of her demeanour and the gentle +expression of her face, which, although she had the flattish nose +and thick lips of the others, was of a light-brown colour, and we +conjectured that she must be of a different race. She and +her companions wore short petticoats and a kind of tippet on +their shoulders. Their hair was jet black, but instead of +being long, was short and curly,—though not +woolly—somewhat like the hair of a young boy. While +we gazed with interest and some anxiety at these poor creatures, +the big chief advanced to one of the elder females and laid his +hand upon the child. But the mother shrank from him, and +clasping the little one to her bosom, uttered a wail of +fear. With a savage laugh, the chief tore the child from +her arms and tossed it into the sea. A low groan burst from +Jack’s lips as we witnessed this atrocious act and heard +the mother’s shriek, as she fell insensible on the +sand. The rippling waves rolled the child on the beach, as +if they refused to be a party in such a foul murder, and we could +observe that the little one still lived.</p> + +<p>The young girl was now brought forward, and the chief +addressed her; but although we heard his voice, and even the +words distinctly, of course we could not understand what he +said. The girl made no answer to his fierce questions, and +we saw by the way in which he pointed to the fire that he +threatened her life.</p> + +<p>“Peterkin,” said Jack in a hoarse whisper, +“have you got your knife?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Peterkin, whose face was pale as +death.</p> + +<p>“That will do. Listen to me, and do my bidding +quick. Here is the small knife, Ralph. Fly both of +you through the bush, cut the cords that bind the prisoners and +set them free. There! quick, ere it be too +late.” Jack sprang up, and seized a heavy but short +bludgeon, while his strong frame trembled with emotion, and large +drops rolled down his forehead.</p> + +<p>At this moment the man who had butchered the savage a few +minutes before advanced towards the girl with his heavy +club. Jack uttered a yell that rang like a death-shriek +among the rocks. With one bound he leaped over a precipice +full fifteen feet high, and, before the savages had recovered +from their surprise, was in the midst of them; while Peterkin and +I dashed through the bushes towards the prisoners. With one +blow of his staff Jack felled the man with the club, then, +turning round with a look of fury, he rushed upon the big chief +with the yellow hair. Had the blow which Jack aimed at his +head taken effect, the huge savage would have needed no second +stroke; but he was agile as a cat, and avoided it by springing to +one side, while, at the same time, he swung his ponderous club at +the head of his foe. It was now Jack’s turn to leap +aside, and well was it for him that the first outburst of his +blind fury was over, else he had become an easy prey to his +gigantic antagonist; but Jack was cool now. He darted his +blows rapidly and well, and the superiority of his light weapon +was strikingly proved in this combat, for while he could easily +evade the blows of the chief’s heavy club, the chief could +not so easily evade those of his light one. Nevertheless, +so quick was he, and so frightfully did he fling about the mighty +weapon, that, although Jack struck him almost every blow, the +strokes had to be delivered so quickly that they wanted force to +be very effectual.</p> + +<p>It was lucky for Jack that the other savages considered the +success of their chief in this encounter to be so certain that +they refrained from interfering. Had they doubted it, they +would have probably ended the matter at once by felling +him. But they contented themselves with awaiting the +issue.</p> + +<p>The force which the chief expended in wielding his club now +began to be apparent. His movements became slower, his +breath hissed through his clenched teeth, and the surprised +savages drew nearer in order to render assistance. Jack +observed this movement. He felt that his fate was sealed, +and resolved to cast his life upon the next blow. The +chiefs club was again about to descend on his head. He +might have evaded it easily, but instead of doing so, he suddenly +shortened his grasp of his own club, rushed in under the blow, +struck his adversary right between the eyes with all his force +and fell to the earth, crushed beneath the senseless body of the +chief. A dozen clubs flew high in air ready to descend on +the head of Jack, but they hesitated a moment, for the massive +body of the chief completely covered him. That moment saved +his life. Ere the savages could tear the chief’s body +away, seven of their number fell prostrate beneath the clubs of +the prisoners whom Peterkin and I had set free, and two others +fell under our own hand. We could never have accomplished +this had not our enemies been so engrossed with the fight between +Jack and their chief that they had failed to observe us until we +were upon them. They still out-numbered our party by three, +but we were flushed with victory while they were taken by +surprise and dispirited by the fall of their chief. +Moreover, they were awe-struck by the sweeping fury of Jack, who +seemed to have lost his senses altogether, and had no sooner +shaken himself free of the chief’s body than he rushed into +the midst of them, and in three blows equalized our +numbers. Peterkin and I flew to the rescue, the savages +followed us, and, in less than ten minutes, the whole of our +opponents were knocked down or made prisoners, bound hand and +foot, and extended side by side upon the sea shore.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Intercourse with the savages—Cannibalism +prevented—The slain are buried and the survivors depart, +leaving us again alone on our Coral Island.</p> + +<p>After the battle was over, the savages crowded round us and +gazed at us in surprise, while they continued to pour upon us a +flood of questions, which, being wholly unintelligible, of course +we could not answer. However, by way of putting an end to +it, Jack took the chief (who had recovered from the effects of +his wound) by the hand and shook it warmly. No sooner did +the blacks see that this was meant to express good-will than they +shook hands with us all round. After this ceremony was gone +through Jack went up to the girl, who had never once moved from +the rock where she had been left, but had continued an eager +spectator of all that had passed. He made signs to her to +follow him and then, taking the chief by the hand, was about to +conduct him to the bower when his eye fell on the poor infant +which had been thrown into the sea and was still lying on the +shore. Dropping the chief’s hand he hastened towards +it, and, to his great joy, found it to be still alive. We +also found that the mother was beginning to recover slowly.</p> + +<p>“Here, get out o’ the way,” said Jack, +pushing us aside, as we stooped over the poor woman and +endeavoured to restore her, “I’ll soon bring her +round.” So saying, he placed the infant on her bosom +and laid its warm cheek on hers. The effect was +wonderful. The woman opened her eyes, felt the child, +looked at it, and with a cry of joy clasped it in her arms, at +the same time endeavouring to rise, for the purpose, apparently, +of rushing into the woods.</p> + +<p>“There, that’s all right,” said Jack, once +more taking the chief by the hand. “Now Ralph and +Peterkin, make the women and these fellows follow me to the +bower. Well entertain them as hospitably as we +can.”</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the savages were all seated on the ground in +front of the bower making a hearty meal off a cold roast pig, +several ducks, and a variety of cold fish, together with an +unlimited supply of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruits, yams, taro, and +plums; with all of which they seemed to be quite familiar and +perfectly satisfied.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile, we three being thoroughly knocked up with our +day’s work, took a good draught of cocoa-nut lemonade, and +throwing ourselves on our beds fell fast asleep. The +savages it seems followed our example, and in half-an-hour the +whole camp was buried in repose.</p> + +<p>How long we slept I cannot tell, but this I know, that when we +lay down the sun was setting and when we awoke it was high in the +heavens. I awoke Jack, who started up in surprise, being +unable at first to comprehend our situation. “Now, +then,” said he, springing up, “let’s see after +breakfast. Hallo! Peterkin, lazy fellow, how long do +you mean to lie there?”</p> + +<p>Peterkin yawned heavily. “Well!” said he, +opening his eyes and looking up after some trouble, “if it +isn’t to-morrow morning, and me thinking it was to-day all +this time. Hallo! Venus, where did you come from? you +seem tolerably at home, any how. Bah! might as well speak +to the cat as to you—better, in fact, for it understands +me, and you don’t.”</p> + +<p>This remark was called forth by the sight of one of the +elderly females, who had seated herself on the rock in front of +the bower, and, having placed her child at her feet, was busily +engaged in devouring the remains of a roast pig.</p> + +<p>By this time the natives outside were all astir, and breakfast +in an advanced state of preparation. During the course of +it we made sundry attempts to converse with the natives by signs, +but without effect. At last we hit upon a plan of +discovering their names. Jack pointed to his breast and said +“Jack,” very distinctly; then he pointed to Peterkin +and to me, repeating our names at the same time. Then he +pointed to himself again, and said “Jack,” and laying +his finger on the breast of the chief, looked inquiringly into +his face. The chief instantly understood him and said +“Tararo,” twice, distinctly. Jack repeated it +after him, and the chief, nodding his head approvingly, said +“Chuck.” On hearing which, Peterkin exploded +with laughter; but Jack turned and with a frown rebuked him, +saying, “I must look even more indignantly at you than I +feel, Peterkin, you rascal, for these fellows don’t like to +be laughed at.” Then turning towards the youngest of +the women, who was seated at the door of the bower, he pointed to +her; whereupon the chief said, “Avatea;” and pointing +towards the sun, raised his finger slowly towards the zenith, +where it remained steadily for a minute or two.</p> + +<p>“What can that mean, I wonder,” said Jack, looking +puzzled.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “the chief means +she is an angel come down to stay here for a while. If so, +she’s an uncommonly black one!”</p> + +<p>We did not feel quite satisfied with this explanation, so Jack +went up to her and said, “Avatea.” The woman +smiled sadly, and nodded her head, at the same time pointing to +her breast and then to the sun, in the same manner as the chief +had done. We were much puzzled to know what this could +signify, but as there was no way of solving our difficulty we +were obliged to rest content.</p> + +<p>Jack now made signs to the natives to follow him, and, taking +up his axe, he led them to the place where the battle had been +fought. Here we found the prisoners, who had passed the +night on the beach having been totally forgotten by us, as our +minds had been full of our guests, and were ultimately overcome +by sleep. They did not seem the worse for their exposure, +however, as we judged by the hearty appetite with which they +devoured the breakfast that was soon after given to them. +Jack then began to dig a hole in the sand, and, after working a +few seconds, he pointed to it and to the dead bodies that lay +exposed on the beach. The natives immediately perceived +what he wanted, and, running for their paddles, dug a hole in the +course of half an hour that was quite large enough to contain all +the bodies of the slain. When it was finished they tossed +their dead enemies into it with so much indifference that we felt +assured they would not have put themselves to this trouble had we +not asked them to do so. The body of the yellow-haired +chief was the last thrown in. This wretched man would have +recovered from the blow with which Jack felled him, and, indeed, +he did endeavour to rise during the melee that followed his fall, +but one of his enemies, happening to notice the action, dealt him +a blow with his club that killed him on the spot.</p> + +<p>While they were about to throw the sand over this chief, one +of the savages stooped over him, and with a knife, made +apparently of stone, cut a large slice of flesh from his +thigh. We knew at once that he intended to make use of this +for food, and could not repress a cry of horror and disgust.</p> + +<p>“Come, come, you blackguard,” cried Jack, starting +up and seizing the man by the arm, “pitch that into the +hole. Do you hear?”</p> + +<p>The savage of course did not understand the command, but he +perfectly understood the look of disgust with which Jack regarded +the flesh, and his fierce gaze as he pointed towards the +hole. Nevertheless he did not obey. Jack instantly +turned to Tararo and made signs to him to enforce +obedience. The chief seemed to understand the appeal, for +he stepped forward, raised his club, and was on the point of +dashing out the brains of his offending subject, when Jack sprang +forward and caught his uplifted arm.</p> + +<p>“Stop!” he shouted, “you blockhead, I +don’t want you to kill the man.” He then +pointed again to the flesh and to the hole. The chief +uttered a few words, which had the desired effect; for the man +threw the flesh into the hole, which was immediately filled +up. This man was of a morose, sulky disposition, and, +during all the time he remained on the island, regarded us, +especially Jack, with a scowling visage. His name, we +found, was Mahine.</p> + +<p>The next three or four days were spent by the savages in +mending their canoe, which had been damaged by the violent shock +it had sustained on striking the shore. This canoe was a +very curious structure. It was about thirty feet long, and +had a high towering stern. The timbers, of which it was +partly composed, were fastened much in the same way as those of +our little boat were put together; but the part that seemed most +curious to us was a sort of out-rigger, or long plank, which was +attached to the body of the canoe by means of two stout cross +beams. These beams kept the plank parallel with the canoe, +but not in contact with it, for it floated in the water with an +open space between; thus forming a sort of double canoe. +This we found was intended to prevent the upsetting of the canoe, +which was so narrow that it could not have maintained an upright +position without the out-rigger. We could not help +wondering both at the ingenuity and the clumsiness of this +contrivance.</p> + +<p>When the canoe was ready, we assisted the natives to carry the +prisoners into it, and helped them to load it with provisions and +fruit. Peterkin also went to the plum-tree for the purpose +of making a special onslaught upon the hogs, and killed no less +than six of them. These we baked and presented to our +friends on the day of their departure. On that day Tararo +made a great many energetic signs to us, which, after much +consideration, we came to understand were proposals that we +should go away with him to his island; but, having no desire to +do so, we shook our heads very decidedly. However, we +consoled him by presenting him with our rusty axe, which we +thought we could spare, having the excellent one which had been +so providentially washed ashore to us the day we were +wrecked. We also gave him a piece of wood with our names +carved on it, and a piece of string to hang it round his neck as +an ornament.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes more we were all assembled on the +beach. Being unable to speak to the savages, we went +through the ceremony of shaking hands, and expected they would +depart; but, before doing so, Tararo went up to Jack and rubbed +noses with him, after which he did the same with Peterkin and +me! Seeing that this was their mode of salutation, we +determined to conform to their custom, so we rubbed noses +heartily with the whole party, women and all! The only +disagreeable part of the process was, when we came to rub noses +with Mahine, and Peterkin afterwards said, that when he saw his +wolfish eyes glaring so close to his face, he felt much more +inclined to <i>bang</i> than to <i>rub</i> his nose. Avatea +was the last to take leave of us, and we experienced a feeling of +real sorrow when she approached to bid us farewell. Besides +her modest air and gentle manners she was the only one of the +party who exhibited the smallest sign of regret at parting from +us. Going up to Jack, she put out her flat little nose to +be rubbed, and thereafter paid the same compliment to Peterkin +and me.</p> + +<p>An hour later the canoe was out of sight, and we, with an +indefinable feeling of sadness creeping round our hearts, were +seated in silence beneath the shadow of our bower, meditating on +the wonderful events of the last few days.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Sagacious and moral remarks in regard to life—A +sail!—An unexpected salute—The end of the black +cat—A terrible dive—An incautious proceeding and a +frightful catastrophe.</p> + +<p>Life is a strange compound. Peterkin used to say of it, +that it beat a druggist’s shop all to sticks; for, whereas +the first is a compound of good and bad, the other is a horrible +compound of all that is utterly detestable. And indeed the +more I consider it the more I am struck with the strange mixture +of good and evil that exists not only in the material earth but +in our own natures. In our own Coral Island we had +experienced every variety of good that a bountiful Creator could +heap on us. Yet on the night of the storm we had seen how +almost, in our case,—and altogether, no doubt, in the case +of others less fortunate—all this good might be swept away +for ever. We had seen the rich fruit-trees waving in the +soft air, the tender herbs shooting upwards under the benign +influence of the bright sun; and, the next day, we had seen these +good and beautiful trees and plants uprooted by the hurricane, +crushed and hurled to the ground in destructive +devastation. We had lived for many months in a clime for +the most part so beautiful, that we had often wondered whether +Adam and Eve had found Eden more sweet; and we had seen the quiet +solitudes of our paradise suddenly broken in upon by ferocious +savages, and the white sands stained with blood and strewed with +lifeless forms; yet, among these cannibals, we had seen many +symptoms of a kindly nature. I pondered these things much, +and, while I considered them, there recurred to my memory those +words which I had read in my Bible,—the works of God are +wonderful, and his ways past finding out.</p> + +<p>After these poor savages had left us, we used to hold long and +frequent conversations about them, and I noticed that +Peterkin’s manner was now much altered. He did not, +indeed, jest less heartily than before, but he did so less +frequently, and often there was a tone of deep seriousness in his +manner, if not in his words, which made him seem to Jack and me +as if he had grown two years older within a few days. But +indeed I was not surprised at this, when I reflected on the awful +realities which we had witnessed so lately. We could by no +means shake off a tendency to gloom for several weeks afterwards; +but, as time wore away, our usual good spirits returned somewhat, +and we began to think of the visit of the savages with feelings +akin to those with which we recall a terrible dream.</p> + +<p>One day we were all enjoying ourselves in the Water Garden, +preparatory to going on a fishing excursion; for Peterkin had +kept us in such constant supply of hogs that we had become quite +tired of pork, and desired a change. Peterkin was sunning +himself on the ledge of rock, while we were creeping among the +rocks below. Happening to look up, I observed Peterkin +cutting the most extraordinary capers and making violent +gesticulations for us to come up; so I gave Jack a push, and rose +immediately.</p> + +<p>“A sail! a sail! Ralph, look! Jack, away on +the horizon there, just over the entrance to the lagoon!” +cried Peterkin, as we scrambled up the rocks.</p> + +<p>“So it is, and a schooner, too!” said Jack, as he +proceeded hastily to dress.</p> + +<p>Our hearts were thrown into a terrible flutter by this +discovery, for if it should touch at our island we had no doubt +the captain would be happy to give us a passage to some of the +civilized islands, where we could find a ship sailing for +England, or some other part of Europe. Home, with all its +associations, rushed in upon my heart like a flood, and, much +though I loved the Coral Island and the bower which had now been +our home so long, I felt that I could have quitted all at that +moment without a sigh. With joyful anticipations we +hastened to the highest point of rock near our dwelling, and +awaited the arrival of the vessel, for we now perceived that she +was making straight for the island, under a steady breeze.</p> + +<p>In less than an hour she was close to the reef, where she +rounded to, and backed her topsails in order to survey the +coast. Seeing this, and fearing that they might not +perceive us, we all three waved pieces of cocoa-nut cloth in the +air, and soon had the satisfaction of seeing them beginning to +lower a boat and bustle about the decks as if they meant to +land. Suddenly a flag was run up to the peak, a little +cloud of white smoke rose from the schooner’s side, and, +before we could guess their intentions, a cannon-shot came +crashing through the bushes, carried away several cocoa-nut trees +in its passage, and burst in atoms against the cliff a few yards +below the spot on which we stood.</p> + +<p>With feelings of terror we now observed that the flag at the +schooner’s peak was black, with a Death’s head and +cross bones upon it. As we gazed at each other in blank +amazement, the word “pirate” escaped our lips +simultaneously.</p> + +<p>“What is to be done?” cried Peterkin, as we +observed a boat shoot from the vessel’s side, and make for +the entrance of the reef. “If they take us off the +island, it will either be to throw us overboard for sport, or to +make pirates of us.”</p> + +<p>I did not reply, but looked at Jack, as being our only +resource in this emergency. He stood with folded arms, and +his eyes fixed with a grave, anxious expression on the +ground. “There is but one hope,” said he, +turning with a sad expression of countenance to Peterkin; +“perhaps, after all, we may not have to resort to it. +If these villains are anxious to take us, they will soon overrun +the whole island. But come, follow me.”</p> + +<p>Stopping abruptly in his speech, Jack bounded into the woods, +and led us by a circuitous route to Spouting Cliff. Here he +halted, and, advancing cautiously to the rocks, glanced over +their edge. We were soon by his side, and saw the boat, +which was crowded with armed men, just touching the shore. +In an instant the crew landed, formed line, and rushed up to our +bower.</p> + +<p>In a few seconds we saw them hurrying back to the boat, one of +them swinging the poor cat round his head by the tail. On +reaching the water’s edge, he tossed it far into the sea, +and joined his companions, who appeared to be holding a hasty +council.</p> + +<p>“You see what we may expect,” said Jack +bitterly. “The man who will wantonly kill a poor +brute for sport will think little of murdering a +fellow-creature. Now, boys, we have but one chance +left,—the Diamond Cave.”</p> + +<p>“The Diamond Cave!” cried Peterkin, “then my +chance is a poor one, for I could not dive into it if all the +pirates on the Pacific were at my heels.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, but,” said I, “we will take you down, +Peterkin, if you will only trust us.”</p> + +<p>As I spoke, we observed the pirates scatter over the beach, +and radiate, as if from a centre, towards the woods and along +shore.</p> + +<p>“Now, Peterkin,” said Jack, in a solemn tone, +“you must make up your mind to do it, or we must make up +our minds to die in your company.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack, my dear friend,” cried Peterkin, +turning pale, “leave me; I don’t believe +they’ll think it worth while to kill me. Go, you and +Ralph, and dive into the cave.”</p> + +<p>“That will not I,” answered Jack quietly, while he +picked up a stout cudgel from the ground. “So now, +Ralph, we must prepare to meet these fellows. Their motto +is, ‘No quarter.’ If we can manage to floor +those coming in this direction, we may escape into the woods for +a while.”</p> + +<p>“There are five of them,” said I; “we have +no chance.”</p> + +<p>“Come, then,” cried Peterkin, starting up, and +grasping Jack convulsively by the arm, “let us dive; I will +go.”</p> + +<p>Those who are not naturally expert in the water know well the +feelings of horror that overwhelm them, when in it, at the bare +idea of being held down, even for a few seconds,—that +spasmodic, involuntary recoil from compulsory immersion which has +no connection whatever with cowardice; and they will understand +the amount of resolution that it required in Peterkin to allow +himself to be dragged down to a depth of ten feet, and then, +through a narrow tunnel, into an almost pitch-dark cavern. +But there was no alternative. The pirates had already +caught sight of us, and were now within a short distance of the +rocks.</p> + +<p>Jack and I seized Peterkin by the arms.</p> + +<p>“Now, keep quite still, no struggling,” said Jack, +“or we are lost.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin made no reply, but the stern gravity of his marble +features, and the tension of his muscles, satisfied us that he +had fully made up his mind to go through with it. Just as +the pirates gained the foot of the rocks, which hid us for a +moment from their view, we bent over the sea, and plunged down +together head foremost. Peterkin behaved like a hero. +He floated passively between us like a log of wood, and we passed +the tunnel and rose into the cave in a shorter space of time than +I had ever done it before.</p> + +<p>Peterkin drew a long, deep breath on reaching the surface; and +in a few seconds we were all standing on the ledge of rock in +safety. Jack now searched for the tinder and torch, which +always lay in the cave. He soon found them, and, lighting +the torch, revealed to Peterkin’s wondering gaze the +marvels of the place. But we were too wet to waste much +time in looking about us. Our first care was to take off +our clothes, and wring them as dry as we could. This done, +we proceeded to examine into the state of our larder, for, as +Jack truly remarked, there was no knowing how long the pirates +might remain on the island.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps,” said Peterkin, “they may take it +into their heads to stop here altogether, and so we shall be +buried alive in this place.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you think, Peterkin, that it’s the +nearest thing to being drowned alive that you ever felt?” +said Jack with a smile. “But I’ve no fear of +that. These villains never stay long on shore. The +sea is their home, so you may depend upon it that they +won’t stay more than a day or two at the +furthest.”</p> + +<p>We now began to make arrangements for spending the night in +the cavern. At various periods Jack and I had conveyed +cocoa nuts and other fruits, besides rolls of cocoa-nut cloth, to +this submarine cave, partly for amusement, and partly from a +feeling that we might possibly be driven one day to take shelter +here from the savages. Little did we imagine that the first +savages who would drive us into it would be white savages, +perhaps our own countrymen. We found the cocoa-nuts in good +condition, and the cooked yams, but the bread-fruits were +spoiled. We also found the cloth where we had left it; and, +on opening it out, there proved to be sufficient to make a bed; +which was important, as the rock was damp. Having collected +it all together, we spread out our bed, placed our torch in the +midst of us, and ate our supper. It was indeed a strange +chamber to feast in; and we could not help remarking on the cold, +ghastly appearance of the walls, and the black water at our side, +with the thick darkness beyond, and the sullen sound of the drops +that fell at long intervals from the roof of the cavern into the +still water; and the strong contrast between all this and our bed +and supper, which, with our faces, were lit up with the deep red +flame of the torch.</p> + +<p>We sat long over our meal, talking together in subdued voices, +for we did not like the dismal echoes that rang through the vault +above when we happened to raise them. At last the faint +light that came through the opening died away, warning us that it +was night and time for rest. We therefore put out our torch +and lay down to sleep.</p> + +<p>On awaking, it was some time ere we could collect our +faculties so as to remember where we were, and we were in much +uncertainty as to whether it was early or late. We saw by +the faint light that it was day, but could not guess at the hour; +so Jack proposed that he should dive out and reconnoitre.</p> + +<p>“No, Jack,” said I, “do you rest here. +You’ve had enough to do during the last few days. +Rest yourself now, and take care of Peterkin, while I go out to +see what the pirates are about. I’ll be very careful +not to expose myself, and I’ll bring you word again in a +short time.”</p> + +<p>“Very well, Ralph,” answered Jack, “please +yourself, but don’t be long; and if you’ll take my +advice you’ll go in your clothes, for I would like to have +some fresh cocoa nuts, and climbing trees without clothes is +uncomfortable, to say the least of it.”</p> + +<p>“The pirates will be sure to keep a sharp +lookout,” said Peterkin, “so, pray, be +careful.”</p> + +<p>“No fear,” said I; “good-bye.”</p> + +<p>“Good-bye,” answered my comrades.</p> + +<p>And while the words were yet sounding in my ears, I plunged +into the water, and in a few seconds found myself in the open +air. On rising, I was careful to come up gently and to +breathe softly, while I kept close in beside the rocks; but, as I +observed no one near me, I crept slowly out, and ascended the +cliff a step at a time, till I obtained a full view of the +shore. No pirates were to be seen,—even their boat +was gone; but as it was possible they might have hidden +themselves, I did not venture too boldly forward. Then it +occurred to me to look out to sea, when, to my surprise, I saw +the pirate schooner sailing away almost hull-down on the +horizon! On seeing this I uttered a shout of joy. +Then my first impulse was to dive back to tell my companions the +good news; but I checked myself, and ran to the top of the cliff, +in order to make sure that the vessel I saw was indeed the pirate +schooner. I looked long and anxiously at her, and, giving +vent to a deep sigh of relief, said aloud, “Yes, there she +goes; the villains have been baulked of their prey this time at +least.”</p> + +<p>“Not so sure of that!” said a deep voice at my +side; while, at the same moment, a heavy hand grasped my +shoulder, and held it as if in a vice.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +I fall into the hands of pirates—How they treated me, +and what I said to them—The result of the whole ending in a +melancholy separation and in a most unexpected gift.</p> + +<p>My heart seemed to leap into my throat at the words; and, +turning round, I beheld a man of immense stature, and fierce +aspect regarding me with a smile of contempt. He was a +white man,—that is to say, he was a man of European blood, +though his face, from long exposure to the weather, was deeply +bronzed. His dress was that of a common seaman, except that +he had on a Greek skull-cap, and wore a broad shawl of the +richest silk round his waist. In this shawl were placed two +pair of pistols and a heavy cutlass. He wore a beard and +moustache, which, like the locks on his head, were short, curly, +and sprinkled with gray hairs.</p> + +<p>“So, youngster,” he said, with a sardonic smile, +while I felt his grasp tighten on my shoulder, “the +villains have been baulked of their prey, have they? We +shall see, we shall see. Now, you whelp, look +yonder.” As he spoke, the pirate uttered a shrill +whistle. In a second or two it was answered, and the +pirate-boat rowed round the point at the Water Garden, and came +rapidly towards us. “Now, go, make a fire on that +point; and hark’ee, youngster, if you try to run away, +I’ll send a quick and sure messenger after you,” and +he pointed significantly at his pistols.</p> + +<p>I obeyed in silence, and as I happened to have the +burning-glass in my pocket, a fire was speedily kindled, and a +thick smoke ascended into the air. It had scarcely appeared +for two minutes when the boom of a gun rolled over the sea, and, +looking up, I saw that the schooner was making for the island +again. It now flashed across me that this was a ruse on the +part of the pirates, and that they had sent their vessel away, +knowing that it would lead us to suppose that they had left +altogether. But there was no use of regret now. I was +completely in their power, so I stood helplessly beside the +pirate watching the crew of the boat as they landed on the +beach. For an instant I contemplated rushing over the cliff +into the sea, but this I saw I could not now accomplish, as some +of the men were already between me and the water.</p> + +<p>There was a good deal of jesting at the success of their +scheme, as the crew ascended the rocks and addressed the man who +had captured me by the title of captain. They were a +ferocious set of men, with shaggy beards and scowling +brows. All of them were armed with cutlasses and pistols, +and their costumes were, with trifling variations, similar to +that of the captain. As I looked from one to the other, and +observed the low, scowling brows, that never unbent, even when +the men laughed, and the mean, rascally expression that sat on +each face, I felt that my life hung by a hair.</p> + +<p>“But where are the other cubs?” cried one of the +men, with an oath that made me shudder. “I’ll +swear to it there were three, at least, if not more.”</p> + +<p>“You hear what he says, whelp; where are the other +dogs?” said the captain.</p> + +<p>“If you mean my companions,” said I, in a low +voice, “I won’t tell you.”</p> + +<p>A loud laugh burst from the crew at this answer.</p> + +<p>The pirate captain looked at me in surprise. Then +drawing a pistol from his belt, he cocked it and said, +“Now, youngster, listen to me. I’ve no time to +waste here. If you don’t tell me all you know, +I’ll blow your brains out! Where are your +comrades?”</p> + +<p>For an instant I hesitated, not knowing what to do in this +extremity. Suddenly a thought occurred to me.</p> + +<p>“Villain,” said I, shaking my clenched fist in his +face, “to blow my brains out would make short work of me, +and be soon over. Death by drowning is as sure, and the +agony prolonged, yet, I tell you to your face, if you were to +toss me over yonder cliff into the sea, I would not tell you +where my companions are, and I dare you to try me!”</p> + +<p>The pirate captain grew white with rage as I spoke. +“Say you so?” cried he, uttering a fierce oath. +“Here, lads, take him by the legs and heave him +in,—quick!”</p> + +<p>The men, who were utterly silenced with surprise at my +audacity, advanced, and seized me, and, as they carried me +towards the cliff, I congratulated myself not a little on the +success of my scheme, for I knew that once in the water I should +be safe, and could rejoin Jack and Peterkin in the cave. +But my hopes were suddenly blasted by the captain crying out, +“Hold on, lads, hold on. We’ll give him a taste +of the thumb-screws before throwing him to the sharks. Away +with him into the boat. Look alive! the breeze is +freshening.”</p> + +<p>The men instantly raised me shoulder high, and, hurrying down +the rocks, tossed me into the bottom of the boat, where I lay for +some time stunned with the violence of my fall.</p> + +<p>On recovering sufficiently to raise myself on my elbow, I +perceived that we were already outside the coral reef, and close +alongside the schooner, which was of small size and clipper +built. I had only time to observe this much, when I +received a severe kick on the side from one of the men, who +ordered me, in a rough voice, to jump aboard. Rising +hastily I clambered up the side. In a few minutes the boat +was hoisted on deck, the vessel’s head put close to the +wind, and the Coral Island dropped slowly astern as we beat up +against a head sea.</p> + +<p>Immediately after coming aboard, the crew were too busily +engaged in working the ship and getting in the boat to attend to +me, so I remained leaning against the bulwarks close to the +gangway, watching their operations. I was surprised to find +that there were no guns or carronades of any kind in the vessel, +which had more of the appearance of a fast-sailing trader than a +pirate. But I was struck with the neatness of +everything. The brass work of the binnacle and about the +tiller, as well as the copper belaying-pins, were as brightly +polished as if they had just come from the foundry. The +decks were pure white, and smooth. The masts were +clean-scraped and varnished, except at the cross-trees and truck, +which were painted black. The standing and running rigging +was in the most perfect order, and the sails white as snow. +In short, everything, from the single narrow red stripe on her +low black hull to the trucks on her tapering masts, evinced an +amount of care and strict discipline that would have done credit +to a ship of the Royal Navy. There was nothing lumbering or +unseemly about the vessel, excepting, perhaps, a boat, which lay +on the deck with its keel up between the fore and main +masts. It seemed disproportionately large for the schooner; +but, when I saw that the crew amounted to between thirty and +forty men, I concluded that this boat was held in reserve, in +case of any accident compelling the crew to desert the +vessel.</p> + +<p>As I have before said, the costumes of the men were similar to +that of the captain. But in head gear they differed not +only from him but from each other, some wearing the ordinary +straw hat of the merchant service, while others wore cloth caps +and red worsted night-caps. I observed that all their arms +were sent below; the captain only retaining his cutlass and a +single pistol in the folds of his shawl. Although the +captain was the tallest and most powerful man in the ship, he did +not strikingly excel many of his men in this respect, and the +only difference that an ordinary observer would have noticed was, +a certain degree of open candour, straightforward daring, in the +bold, ferocious expression of his face, which rendered him less +repulsive than his low-browed associates, but did not by any +means induce the belief that he was a hero. This look was, +however, the indication of that spirit which gave him the +pre-eminence among the crew of desperadoes who called him +captain. He was a lion-like villain; totally devoid of +personal fear, and utterly reckless of consequences, and, +therefore, a terror to his men, who individually hated him, but +unitedly felt it to be their advantage to have him at their +head.</p> + +<p>But my thoughts soon reverted to the dear companions whom I +had left on shore, and as I turned towards the Coral Island, +which was now far away to leeward, I sighed deeply, and the tears +rolled slowly down my cheeks as I thought that I might never see +them more.</p> + +<p>“So you’re blubbering, are you, you obstinate +whelp?” said the deep voice of the captain, as he came up +and gave me a box on the ear that nearly felled me to the +deck. “I don’t allow any such weakness aboard +o’ this ship. So clap a stopper on your eyes or +I’ll give you something to cry for.”</p> + +<p>I flushed with indignation at this rough and cruel treatment, +but felt that giving way to anger would only make matters worse, +so I made no reply, but took out my handkerchief and dried my +eyes.</p> + +<p>“I thought you were made of better stuff,” +continued the captain, angrily; “I’d rather have a +mad bull-dog aboard than a water-eyed puppy. But I’ll +cure you, lad, or introduce you to the sharks before long. +Now go below, and stay there till I call you.”</p> + +<p>As I walked forward to obey, my eye fell on a small keg +standing by the side of the main-mast, on which the word +<i>gunpowder</i> was written in pencil. It immediately +flashed across me that, as we were beating up against the wind, +anything floating in the sea would be driven on the reef +encircling the Coral Island. I also recollected—for +thought is more rapid than the lightning—that my old +companions had a pistol. Without a moment’s +hesitation, therefore, I lifted the keg from the deck and tossed +it into the sea! An exclamation of surprise burst from the +captain and some of the men who witnessed this act of mine.</p> + +<p>Striding up to me, and uttering fearful imprecations, the +captain raised his hand to strike me, while he shouted, +“Boy! whelp! what mean you by that?”</p> + +<p>“If you lower your hand,” said I, in a loud voice, +while I felt the blood rush to my temples, “I’ll tell +you. Until you do so I’m dumb!”</p> + +<p>The captain stepped back and regarded me with a look of +amazement.</p> + +<p>“Now,” continued I, “I threw that keg into +the sea because the wind and waves will carry it to my friends on +the Coral Island, who happen to have a pistol, but no +powder. I hope that it will reach them soon, and my only +regret is that the keg was not a bigger one. Moreover, +pirate, you said just now that you thought I was made of better +stuff! I don’t know what stuff I am made of,—I +never thought much about that subject; but I’m quite +certain of this, that I am made of such stuff as the like of you +shall never tame, though you should do your worst.”</p> + +<p>To my surprise the captain, instead of flying into a rage, +smiled, and, thrusting his hand into the voluminous shawl that +encircled his waist, turned on his heel and walked aft, while I +went below.</p> + +<p>Here, instead of being rudely handled, as I had expected, the +men received me with a shout of laughter, and one of them, +patting me on the back, said, “Well done, lad! you’re +a brick, and I have no doubt will turn out a rare cove. +Bloody Bill, there, was just such a fellow as you are, and +he’s now the biggest cut-throat of us all.”</p> + +<p>“Take a can of beer, lad,” cried another, +“and wet your whistle after that speech o’ +your’n to the captain. If any one o’ us had +made it, youngster, he would have had no whistle to wet by this +time.”</p> + +<p>“Stop your clapper, Jack,” vociferated a third; +“give the boy a junck o’ meat. Don’t you +see he’s a’most goin’ to kick the +bucket?”</p> + +<p>“And no wonder,” said the first speaker, with an +oath, “after the tumble you gave him into the boat. I +guess it would have broke <i>your</i> neck if you had got +it.”</p> + +<p>I did indeed feel somewhat faint; which was owing, doubtless, +to the combined effects of ill-usage and hunger; for it will be +recollected that I had dived out of the cave that morning before +breakfast, and it was now near mid-day. I therefore gladly +accepted a plate of boiled pork and a yam, which were handed to +me by one of the men from the locker on which some of the crew +were seated eating their dinner. But I must add that the +zest with which I ate my meal was much abated in consequence of +the frightful oaths and the terrible language that flowed from +the lips of these godless men, even in the midst of their +hilarity and good-humour. The man who had been alluded to +as Bloody Bill was seated near me, and I could not help wondering +at the moody silence he maintained among his comrades. He +did indeed reply to their questions in a careless, off-hand tone, +but he never volunteered a remark. The only difference +between him and the others was his taciturnity and his size, for +he was nearly, if not quite, as large a man as the captain.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of the afternoon I was left to my own +reflections, which were anything but agreeable, for I could not +banish from my mind the threat about the thumb-screws, of the +nature and use of which I had a vague but terrible +conception. I was still meditating on my unhappy fate when, +just after night-fall, one of the watch on deck called down the +hatchway,—</p> + +<p>“Hallo there! one o’ you, tumble up and light the +cabin lamp, and send that boy aft to the +captain—sharp!”</p> + +<p>“Now then, do you hear, youngster? the captain wants +you. Look alive,” said Bloody Bill, raising his huge +frame from the locker on which he had been asleep for the last +two hours. He sprang up the ladder and I instantly followed +him, and, going aft, was shown into the cabin by one of the men, +who closed the door after me.</p> + +<p>A small silver lamp which hung from a beam threw a dim soft +light over the cabin, which was a small apartment, and +comfortably but plainly finished. Seated on a camp-stool at +the table, and busily engaged in examining a chart of the +Pacific, was the captain, who looked up as I entered, and, in a +quiet voice, bade me be seated, while he threw down his pencil, +and, rising from the table, stretched himself on a sofa at the +upper end of the cabin.</p> + +<p>“Boy,” said he, looking me full in the face, +“what is your name?”</p> + +<p>“Ralph Rover,” I replied.</p> + +<p>“Where did you come from, and how came you to be on that +island? How many companions had you on it? Answer me, +now, and mind you tell no lies.”</p> + +<p>“I never tell lies,” said I, firmly.</p> + +<p>The captain received this reply with a cold sarcastic smile, +and bade me answer his questions.</p> + +<p>I then told him the history of myself and my companions from +the time we sailed till the day of his visit to the island, +taking care, however, to make no mention of the Diamond +Cave. After I had concluded, he was silent for a few +minutes; then, looking up, he said—“Boy, I believe +you.”</p> + +<p>I was surprised at this remark, for I could not imagine why he +should not believe me. However, I made no reply.</p> + +<p>“And what,” continued the captain, “makes +you think that this schooner is a pirate?”</p> + +<p>“The black flag,” said I, “showed me what +you are; and if any further proof were wanting I have had it in +the brutal treatment I have received at your hands.”</p> + +<p>The captain frowned as I spoke, but subduing his anger he +continued—“Boy, you are too bold. I admit that +we treated you roughly, but that was because you made us lose +time and gave us a good deal of trouble. As to the black +flag, that is merely a joke that my fellows play off upon people +sometimes in order to frighten them. It is their humour, +and does no harm. I am no pirate, boy, but a lawful +trader,—a rough one, I grant you, but one can’t help +that in these seas, where there are so many pirates on the water +and such murderous blackguards on the land. I carry on a +trade in sandal-wood with the Feejee Islands; and if you choose, +Ralph, to behave yourself and be a good boy, I’ll take you +along with me and give you a good share of the profits. You +see I’m in want of an honest boy like you, to look after +the cabin and keep the log, and superintend the traffic on shore +sometimes. What say you, Ralph, would you like to become a +sandal-wood trader?”</p> + +<p>I was much surprised by this explanation, and a good deal +relieved to find that the vessel, after all, was not a pirate; +but instead of replying I said, “If it be as you state, +then why did you take me from my island, and why do you not now +take me back?”</p> + +<p>The captain smiled as he replied, “I took you off in +anger, boy, and I’m sorry for it. I would even now +take you back, but we are too far away from it. See, there +it is,” he added, laying his finger on the chart, +“and we are now here,—fifty miles at least. It +would not be fair to my men to put about now, for they have all +an interest in the trade.”</p> + +<p>I could make no reply to this; so, after a little more +conversation, I agreed to become one of the crew, at least until +we could reach some civilized island where I might be put +ashore. The captain assented to this proposition, and after +thanking him for the promise, I left the cabin and went on deck +with feelings that ought to have been lighter, but which were, I +could not tell why, marvellously heavy and uncomfortable +still.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Bloody Bill—Dark surmises—A strange sail, and a +strange crew, and a still stranger cargo—New reasons for +favouring missionaries—A murderous massacre, and thoughts +thereon.</p> + +<p>Three weeks after the conversation narrated in the last +chapter, I was standing on the quarter-deck of the schooner +watching the gambols of a shoal of porpoises that swam round +us. It was a dead calm. One of those still, hot, +sweltering days, so common in the Pacific, when Nature seems to +have gone to sleep, and the only thing in water or in air that +proves her still alive, is her long, deep breathing, in the swell +of the mighty sea. No cloud floated in the deep blue above; +no ripple broke the reflected blue below. The sun shone +fiercely in the sky, and a ball of fire blazed, with almost equal +power, from out the bosom of the water. So intensely still +was it, and so perfectly transparent was the surface of the deep, +that had it not been for the long swell already alluded to, we +might have believed the surrounding universe to be a huge blue +liquid ball, and our little ship the one solitary material speck +in all creation, floating in the midst of it.</p> + +<p>No sound broke on our ears save the soft puff now and then of +a porpoise, the slow creak of the masts, as we swayed gently on +the swell, the patter of the reef-points, and the occasional flap +of the hanging sails. An awning covered the fore and after +parts of the schooner, under which the men composing the watch on +deck lolled in sleepy indolence, overcome with excessive +heat. Bloody Bill, as the men invariably called him, was +standing at the tiller, but his post for the present was a +sinecure, and he whiled away the time by alternately gazing in +dreamy abstraction at the compass in the binnacle, and by walking +to the taffrail in order to spit into the sea. In one of +these turns he came near to where I was standing, and, leaning +over the side, looked long and earnestly down into the blue +wave.</p> + +<p>This man, although he was always taciturn and often surly, was +the only human being on board with whom I had the slightest +desire to become better acquainted. The other men, seeing +that I did not relish their company, and knowing that I was a +protege of the captain, treated me with total indifference. +Bloody Bill, it is true, did the same; but as this was his +conduct towards every one else, it was not peculiar in reference +to me. Once or twice I tried to draw him into conversation, +but he always turned away after a few cold monosyllables. +As he now leaned over the taffrail close beside me, I said to +him,—</p> + +<p>“Bill, why is it that you are so gloomy? Why do +you never speak to any one?”</p> + +<p>Bill smiled slightly as he replied, “Why, I s’pose +it’s because I haint got nothin’ to say!”</p> + +<p>“That’s strange,” said I, musingly; +“you look like a man that could think, and such men can +usually speak.”</p> + +<p>“So they can, youngster,” rejoined Bill, somewhat +sternly; “and I could speak too if I had a mind to, but +what’s the use o’ speakin’ here! The men +only open their mouths to curse and swear, an’ they seem to +find it entertaining; but I don’t, so I hold my +tongue.”</p> + +<p>“Well, Bill, that’s true, and I would rather not +hear you speak at all than hear you speak like the other men; but +<i>I</i> don’t swear, Bill, so you might talk to me +sometimes, I think. Besides, I’m weary of spending +day after day in this way, without a single soul to say a +pleasant word to. I’ve been used to friendly +conversation, Bill, and I really would take it kind if you would +talk with me a little now and then.”</p> + +<p>Bill looked at me in surprise, and I thought I observed a sad +expression pass across his sun-burnt face.</p> + +<p>“An’ where have you been used to friendly +conversation,” said Bill, looking down again into the sea; +“not on that Coral Island, I take it?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, indeed,” said I energetically; “I have +spent many of the happiest months in my life on that Coral +Island;” and without waiting to be further questioned, I +launched out into a glowing account of the happy life that Jack +and Peterkin and I had spent together, and related minutely every +circumstance that befell us while on the island.</p> + +<p>“Boy, boy,” said Bill, in a voice so deep that it +startled me, “this is no place for you.”</p> + +<p>“That’s true,” said I; “I’m of +little use on board, and I don’t like my comrades; but I +can’t help it, and at anyrate I hope to be free again +soon.”</p> + +<p>“Free?” said Bill, looking at me in surprise.</p> + +<p>“Yes, free,” returned I; “the captain said +he would put me ashore after this trip was over.”</p> + +<p>“<i>This trip</i>! Hark’ee, boy,” said +Bill, lowering his voice, “what said the captain to you the +day you came aboard?”</p> + +<p>“He said that he was a trader in sandal-wood and no +pirate, and told me that if I would join him for this trip he +would give me a good share of the profits or put me on shore in +some civilized island if I chose.”</p> + +<p>Bill’s brows lowered savagely as he muttered, “Ay, +he said truth when he told you he was a sandal-wood trader, but +he lied when—”</p> + +<p>“Sail ho!” shouted the look-out at the +masthead.</p> + +<p>“Where, away?” cried Bill, springing to the +tiller; while the men, startled by the sudden cry jumped up and +gazed round the horizon.</p> + +<p>“On the starboard quarter, hull down, sir,” +answered the look-out.</p> + +<p>At this moment the captain came on deck, and mounting into the +rigging, surveyed the sail through the glass. Then sweeping +his eye round the horizon he gazed steadily at a particular +point.</p> + +<p>“Take in top-sails,” shouted the captain, swinging +himself down on the deck by the main-back stay.</p> + +<p>“Take in top-sails,” roared the first mate.</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, sir-r-r,” answered the men as they sprang +into the rigging and went aloft like cats.</p> + +<p>Instantly all was bustle on board the hitherto quiet +schooner. The top-sails were taken in and stowed, the men +stood by the sheets and halyards, and the captain gazed anxiously +at the breeze which was now rushing towards us like a sheet of +dark blue. In a few seconds it struck us. The +schooner trembled as if in surprise at the sudden onset, while +she fell away, then bending gracefully to the wind, as though in +acknowledgment of her subjection, she cut through the waves with +her sharp prow like a dolphin, while Bill directed her course +towards the strange sail.</p> + +<p>In half an hour we neared her sufficiently to make out that +she was a schooner, and, from the clumsy appearance of her masts +and sails we judged her to be a trader. She evidently did +not like our appearance, for, the instant the breeze reached her, +she crowded all sail and showed us her stern. As the breeze +had moderated a little our top-sails were again shaken out, and +it soon became evident,—despite the proverb, “A stern +chase is a long one,” that we doubled her speed and would +overhaul her speedily. When within a mile we hoisted +British colours, but receiving no acknowledgment, the captain +ordered a shot to be fired across her bows. In a moment, to +my surprise, a large portion of the bottom of the boat amidships +was removed, and in the hole thus exposed appeared an immense +brass gun. It worked on a swivel and was elevated by means +of machinery. It was quickly loaded and fired. The +heavy ball struck the water a few yards ahead of the chase, and, +ricochetting into the air, plunged into the sea a mile beyond +it.</p> + +<p>This produced the desired effect. The strange vessel +backed her top-sails and hove-to, while we ranged up and lay-to, +about a hundred yards off.</p> + +<p>“Lower the boat,” cried the captain.</p> + +<p>In a second the boat was lowered and manned by a part of the +crew, who were all armed with cutlasses and pistols. As the +captain passed me to get into it, he said, “jump into the +stern sheets, Ralph, I may want you.” I obeyed, and +in ten minutes more we were standing on the stranger’s +deck. We were all much surprised at the sight that met our +eyes. Instead of a crew of such sailors as we were +accustomed to see, there were only fifteen blacks standing on the +quarter-deck and regarding us with looks of undisguised +alarm. They were totally unarmed and most of them +unclothed; one or two, however, wore portions of European +attire. One had on a pair of duck trousers which were much +too large for him and stuck out in a most ungainly manner. +Another wore nothing but the common scanty native garment round +the loins, and a black beaver hat. But the most ludicrous +personage of all, and one who seemed to be chief, was a tall +middle-aged man, of a mild, simple expression of countenance, who +wore a white cotton shirt, a swallow-tailed coat, and a straw +hat, while his black brawny legs were totally uncovered below the +knees.</p> + +<p>“Where’s the commander of this ship?” +inquired our captain, stepping up to this individual.</p> + +<p>“I is capin,” he answered, taking off his straw +hat and making a low bow.</p> + +<p>“You!” said our captain, in surprise. +“Where do you come from, and where are you bound? +What cargo have you aboard?”</p> + +<p>“We is come,” answered the man with the +swallow-tail, “from Aitutaki; we was go for +Rarotonga. We is native miss’nary ship; our name is +de <i>Olive Branch</i>; an’ our cargo is two tons +cocoa-nuts, seventy pigs, twenty cats, and de +Gosp’l.”</p> + +<p>This announcement was received by the crew of our vessel with +a shout of laughter, which, however, was peremptorily checked by +the captain, whose expression instantly changed from one of +severity to that of frank urbanity as he advanced towards the +missionary and shook him warmly by the hand.</p> + +<p>“I am very glad to have fallen in with you,” said +he, “and I wish you much success in your missionary +labours. Pray take me to your cabin, as I wish to converse +with you privately.”</p> + +<p>The missionary immediately took him by the hand, and as he led +him away I heard him saying, “Me most glad to find you +trader; we t’ought you be pirate. You very like one +’bout the masts.”</p> + +<p>What conversation the captain had with this man I never heard, +but he came on deck again in a quarter of an hour, and, shaking +hands cordially with the missionary, ordered us into our boat and +returned to the schooner, which was immediately put before the +wind. In a few minutes the <i>Olive Branch</i> was left far +behind us.</p> + +<p>That afternoon, as I was down below at dinner, I heard the men +talking about this curious ship.</p> + +<p>“I wonder,” said one, “why our captain +looked so sweet on yon swallow-tailed super-cargo o’ pigs +and Gospels. If it had been an ordinary trader, now, he +would have taken as many o’ the pigs as he required and +sent the ship with all on board to the bottom.”</p> + +<p>“Why, Dick, you must be new to these seas if you +don’t know that,” cried another. “The +captain cares as much for the gospel as you do (an’ +that’s precious little), but he knows, and everybody knows, +that the only place among the southern islands where a ship can +put in and get what she wants in comfort, is where the gospel has +been sent to. There are hundreds o’ islands, at this +blessed moment, where you might as well jump straight into a +shark’s maw as land without a band o’ thirty comrades +armed to the teeth to back you.”</p> + +<p>“Ay,” said a man with a deep scar over his right +eye, “Dick’s new to the work. But if the +captain takes us for a cargo o’ sandal-wood to the Feejees +he’ll get a taste o’ these black gentry in their +native condition. For my part I don’t know, an’ +I don’t care, what the gospel does to them; but I know that +when any o’ the islands chance to get it, trade goes all +smooth an’ easy; but where they ha’nt got it, +Beelzebub himself could hardly desire better company.”</p> + +<p>“Well, you ought to be a good judge,” cried +another, laughing, “for you’ve never kept any company +but the worst all your life!”</p> + +<p>“Ralph Rover!” shouted a voice down the +hatchway. “Captain wants you, aft.”</p> + +<p>Springing up the ladder I hastened to the cabin, pondering as +I went the strange testimony borne by these men to the effect of +the gospel on savage natures;—testimony which, as it was +perfectly disinterested, I had no doubt whatever was strictly +true.</p> + +<p>On coming again on deck I found Bloody Bill at the helm, and +as we were alone together I tried to draw him into +conversation. After repeating to him the conversation in +the forecastle about the missionaries, I said,—</p> + +<p>“Tell me, Bill, is this schooner really a trader in +sandal-wood?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Ralph, she is; but she’s just as really a +pirate. The black flag you saw flying at the peak was no +deception.”</p> + +<p>“Then how can you say she’s a trader?” asked +I.</p> + +<p>“Why, as to that, she trades when she can’t take +by force, but she takes by force, when she can, in +preference. Ralph,” he added, lowering his voice, +“if you had seen the bloody deeds that I have witnessed +done on these decks you would not need to ask if we were +pirates. But you’ll find it out soon enough. As +for the missionaries, the captain favours them because they are +useful to him. The South-Sea islanders are such incarnate +fiends that they are the better of being tamed, and the +missionaries are the only men who can do it.”</p> + +<p>Our track after this lay through several clusters of small +islets, among which we were becalmed more than once. During +this part of our voyage the watch on deck and the look-out at the +mast-head were more than usually vigilant, as we were not only in +danger of being attacked by the natives, who, I learned from the +captain’s remarks, were a bloody and deceitful tribe at +this group, but we were also exposed to much risk from the +multitudes of coral reefs that rose up in the channels between +the islands, some of them just above the surface, others a few +feet below it. Our precautions against the savages I found +were indeed necessary.</p> + +<p>One day we were becalmed among a group of small islands, most +of which appeared to be uninhabited. As we were in want of +fresh water the captain sent the boat ashore to bring off a cask +or two. But we were mistaken in thinking there were no +natives; for scarcely had we drawn near to the shore when a band +of naked blacks rushed out of the bush and assembled on the +beach, brandishing their clubs and spears in a threatening +manner. Our men were well armed, but refrained from showing +any signs of hostility, and rowed nearer in order to converse +with the natives; and I now found that more than one of the crew +could imperfectly speak dialects of the language peculiar to the +South Sea islanders. When within forty yards of the shore, +we ceased rowing, and the first mate stood up to address the +multitude; but, instead of answering us, they replied with a +shower of stones, some of which cut the men severely. +Instantly our muskets were levelled, and a volley was about to be +fired, when the captain hailed us in a loud voice from the +schooner, which lay not more than five or six hundred yards off +the shore.</p> + +<p>“Don’t fire,” he shouted, angrily. +“Pull off to the point ahead of you.”</p> + +<p>The men looked surprised at this order, and uttered deep +curses as they prepared to obey, for their wrath was roused and +they burned for revenge. Three or four of them hesitated, +and seemed disposed to mutiny.</p> + +<p>“Don’t distress yourselves, lads,” said the +mate, while a bitter smile curled his lip. “Obey +orders. The captain’s not the man to take an insult +tamely. If Long Tom does not speak presently I’ll +give myself to the sharks.”</p> + +<p>The men smiled significantly as they pulled from the shore, +which was now crowded with a dense mass of savages, amounting, +probably, to five or six hundred. We had not rowed off +above a couple of hundred yards when a loud roar thundered over +the sea, and the big brass gun sent a withering shower of grape +point blank into the midst of the living mass, through which a +wide lane was cut, while a yell, the like of which I could not +have imagined, burst from the miserable survivors as they fled to +the woods. Amongst the heaps of dead that lay on the sand, +just where they had fallen, I could distinguish mutilated forms +writhing in agony, while ever and anon one and another rose +convulsively from out the mass, endeavoured to stagger towards +the wood, and ere they had taken a few steps, fell and wallowed +on the bloody sand. My blood curdled within me as I +witnessed this frightful and wanton slaughter; but I had little +time to think, for the captain’s deep voice came again over +the water towards us: “Pull ashore, lads, and fill your +water casks.” The men obeyed in silence, and it +seemed to me as if even their hard hearts were shocked by the +ruthless deed. On gaining the mouth of the rivulet at which +we intended to take in water, we found it flowing with blood, for +the greater part of those who were slain had been standing on the +banks of the stream, a short way above its mouth. Many of +the wretched creatures had fallen into it, and we found one body, +which had been carried down, jammed between two rocks, with the +staring eyeballs turned towards us and his black hair waving in +the ripples of the blood-red stream. No one dared to oppose +our landing now, so we carried our casks to a pool above the +murdered group, and having filled them, returned on board. +Fortunately a breeze sprang up soon afterwards and carried us +away from the dreadful spot; but it could not waft me away from +the memory of what I had seen.</p> + +<p>“And this,” thought I, gazing in horror at the +captain, who, with a quiet look of indifference, leaned upon the +taffrail smoking a cigar and contemplating the fertile green +islets as they passed like a lovely picture before our +eyes—“this is the man who favours the missionaries +because they are useful to him and can tame the savages better +than any one else can do it!” Then I wondered in my +mind whether it were possible for any missionary to tame +<i>him</i>!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Bloody Bill is communicative and sagacious—Unpleasant +prospects—Retrospective meditations interrupted by volcanic +agency—The pirates negotiate with a Feejee +chief—Various etceteras that are calculated to surprise and +horrify.</p> + +<p>It was many days after the events just narrated ere I +recovered a little of my wonted spirits. I could not shake +off the feeling for a long time that I was in a frightful dream, +and the sight of our captain filled me with so much horror that I +kept out of his way as much as my duties about the cabin would +permit. Fortunately he took so little notice of me that he +did not observe my changed feelings towards him, otherwise it +might have been worse for me.</p> + +<p>But I was now resolved that I would run away the very first +island we should land at, and commit myself to the hospitality of +the natives rather than remain an hour longer than I could help +in the pirate schooner. I pondered this subject a good +deal, and at last made up my mind to communicate my intention to +Bloody Bill; for, during several talks I had had with him of +late, I felt assured that he too would willingly escape if +possible. When I told him of my design he shook his +head. “No, no, Ralph,” said he, “you must +not think of running away here. Among some of the groups of +islands you might do so with safety, but if you tried it here you +would find that you had jumped out of the fryin’ pan into +the fire.”</p> + +<p>“How so, Bill?” said I, “would the natives +not receive me?”</p> + +<p>“That they would, lad; but they would eat you +too.”</p> + +<p>“Eat me!” said I in surprise, “I thought the +South Sea islanders never ate anybody except their +enemies.”</p> + +<p>“Humph!” ejaculated Bill. “I +s’pose ’twas yer tender-hearted friends in England +that put that notion into your head. There’s a set +o’ soft-hearted folk at home that I knows on, who +don’t like to have their feelin’s ruffled, and when +you tell them anything they don’t like—that shocks +them, as they call it—no matter how true it be, they stop +their ears and cry out, ‘Oh, that is <i>too</i> +horrible! We can’t believe that!’ +An’ they say truth. They can’t believe it +’cause they won’t believe it. Now, I believe +there’s thousands o’ the people in England who are +sich born drivellin’ <i>won’t-believers</i> that they +think the black fellows hereaway, at the worst, eat an enemy only +now an’ then, out o’ spite; whereas, I know for +certain, and many captains of the British and American navies +know as well as me, that the Feejee islanders eat not only their +enemies but one another; and they do it not for spite, but for +pleasure. It’s a <i>fact</i> that they prefer human +flesh to any other. But they don’t like white +men’s flesh so well as black. They say it makes them +sick.”</p> + +<p>“Why, Bill,” said I, “you told me just now +that they would eat <i>me</i> if they caught me.”</p> + +<p>“So I did; and so I think they would. I’ve +only heard some o’ them say they don’t like white men +<i>so well</i> as black; but if they was hungry they +wouldn’t be particular. Anyhow, I’m sure they +would kill you. You see, Ralph, I’ve been a good +while in them parts, and I’ve visited the different groups +of islands oftentimes as a trader. And thorough goin’ +blackguards some o’ them traders are. No better than +pirates, I can tell you. One captain that I sailed with was +not a chip better than the one we’re with now. He was +tradin’ with a friendly chief one day, aboard his +vessel. The chief had swam off to us with the things for +trade tied a-top of his head, for them chaps are like otters in +the water. Well, the chief was hard on the captain, and +would not part with some o’ his things. When their +bargainin’ was over they shook hands, and the chief jumped +over board to swim ashore; but before he got forty yards from the +ship the captain seized a musket and shot him dead. He then +hove up anchor and put to sea, and as we sailed along shore, he +dropped six black-fellows with his rifle, remarkin’ that +‘that would spoil the trade for the next +comers.’ But, as I was sayin’, I’m up to +the ways o’ these fellows. One o’ the laws +o’ the country is, that every shipwrecked person who +happens to be cast ashore, be he dead or alive, is doomed to be +roasted and eaten. There was a small tradin’ schooner +wrecked off one of these islands when we were lyin’ there +in harbour during a storm. The crew was lost, all but three +men, who swam ashore. The moment they landed they were +seized by the natives and carried up into the woods. We +knew pretty well what their fate would be, but we could not help +them, for our crew was small, and if we had gone ashore they +would likely have killed us all. We never saw the three men +again; but we heard frightful yelling, and dancing, and +merry-making that night; and one of the natives, who came aboard +to trade with us next day, told us that the <i>long pigs</i>, as +he called the men, had been roasted and eaten, and their bones +were to be converted into sail needles. He also said that +white men were bad to eat, and that most o’ the people on +shore were sick.”</p> + +<p>I was very much shocked and cast down in my mind at this +terrible account of the natives, and asked Bill what he would +advise me to do. Looking round the deck to make sure that +we were not overheard, he lowered his voice and said, +“There are two or three ways that we might escape, Ralph, +but none o’ them’s easy. If the captain would +only sail for some o’ the islands near Tahiti, we might run +away there well enough, because the natives are all Christians; +an’ we find that wherever the savages take up with +Christianity they always give over their bloody ways, and are +safe to be trusted. I never cared for Christianity +myself,” he continued, in a soliloquising voice, “and +I don’t well know what it means; but a man with half an eye +can see what it does for these black critters. However, the +captain always keeps a sharp look out after us when we get to +these islands, for he half suspects that one or two o’ us +are tired of his company. Then, we might manage to cut the +boat adrift some fine night when it’s our watch on deck, +and clear off before they discovered that we were gone. But +we would run the risk o’ bein’ caught by the +blacks. I wouldn’t like to try that plan. But +you and I will think over it, Ralph, and see what’s to be +done. In the meantime it’s our watch below, so +I’ll go and turn in.”</p> + +<p>Bill then bade me good night, and went below, while a comrade +took his place at the helm; but, feeling no desire to enter into +conversation with him, I walked aft, and, leaning over the stern, +looked down into the phosphorescent waves that gargled around the +ladder, and streamed out like a flame of blue light in the +vessel’s wake. My thoughts were very sad, and I could +scarce refrain from tears as I contrasted my present wretched +position with the happy, peaceful time, I had spent on the Coral +Island with my dear companions. As I thought upon Jack and +Peterkin anxious forebodings crossed my mind, and I pictured to +myself the grief and dismay with which they would search every +nook and corner of the island, in a vain attempt to discover my +dead body; for I felt assured that if they did not see any sign +of the pirate schooner or boat, when they came out of the cave to +look for me, they would never imagine that I had been carried +away. I wondered, too, how Jack would succeed in getting +Peterkin out of the cave without my assistance; and I trembled +when I thought that he might lose presence of mind, and begin to +kick when he was in the tunnel! These thoughts were +suddenly interrupted and put to flight by a bright red blaze +which lighted up the horizon to the southward, and cut a crimson +glow far over the sea. This appearance was accompanied by a +low growling sound, as of distant thunder, and, at the same time, +the sky above us became black, while a hot stifling wind blew +around us in fitful gusts.</p> + +<p>The crew assembled hastily on deck, and most of them were +under the belief that a frightful hurricane was pending; but the +captain coming on deck, soon explained the phenomena.</p> + +<p>“It’s only a volcano,” said he. +“I knew there was one hereabouts, but thought it was +extinct. Up there and furl top-gallant-sails; we’ll +likely have a breeze, and it’s well to be ready.”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, a shower began to fall, which we quickly observed +was not rain, but fine ashes. As we were many miles distant +from the volcano, these must have been carried to us from it by +the wind. As the captain had predicted, a stiff breeze soon +afterwards sprang up, under the influence of which we speedily +left the volcano far behind us; but during the greater part of +the night we could see its lurid glare and hear its distant +thunder. The shower did not cease to fall for several +hours, and we must have sailed under it for nearly forty miles, +perhaps farther. When we emerged from the cloud, our decks +and every part of the rigging were completely covered with a +thick coat of ashes. I was much interested in this, and +recollected that Jack had often spoken of many of the islands of +the Pacific as being volcanoes, either active or extinct, and had +said that the whole region was more or less volcanic, and that +some scientific men were of opinion that the islands of the +Pacific were nothing more or less than the mountain tops of a +huge continent which had sunk under the influence of volcanic +agency.</p> + +<p>Three days after passing the volcano, we found ourselves a few +miles to windward of an island of considerable size and luxuriant +aspect. It consisted of two mountains, which seemed to be +nearly four thousand feet high. They were separated from +each other by a broad valley, whose thick-growing trees ascended +a considerable distance up the mountain sides; and rich level +plains, or meadow-land, spread round the base of the mountains, +except at the point immediately opposite the large valley, where +a river seemed to carry the trees, as it were, along with it down +to the white sandy shore. The mountain tops, unlike those +of our Coral Island, were sharp, needle-shaped, and bare, while +their sides were more rugged and grand in outline than anything I +had yet seen in those seas. Bloody Bill was beside me when +the island first hove in sight.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” he exclaimed, “I know that island +well. They call it Emo.”</p> + +<p>“Have you been here before, then?” I inquired.</p> + +<p>“Ay, that I have, often, and so has this schooner. +’Tis a famous island for sandal-wood. We have taken +many cargoes off it already, and have paid for them too; for the +savages are so numerous that we dared not try to take it by +force. But our captain has tried to cheat them so often, +that they’re beginnin’ not to like us overmuch +now. Besides, the men behaved ill the last time we were +here; and I wonder the captain is not afraid to venture. +But he’s afraid o’ nothing earthly, I +believe.”</p> + +<p>We soon ran inside the barrier coral-reef, and let go our +anchor in six fathoms water, just opposite the mouth of a small +creek, whose shores were densely covered with mangroves and tall +umbrageous trees. The principal village of the natives lay +about half a mile from this point. Ordering the boat out, +the captain jumped into it, and ordered me to follow him. +The men, fifteen in number, were well armed; and the mate was +directed to have Long Tom ready for emergencies.</p> + +<p>“Give way, lads,” cried the captain.</p> + +<p>The oars fell into the water at the word, the boat shot from +the schooner’s side, and in a few minutes reached the +shore. Here, contrary to our expectation, we were met with +the utmost cordiality by Romata, the principal chief of the +island, who conducted us to his house, and gave us mats to sit +upon. I observed in passing that the natives, of whom there +were two or three thousand, were totally unarmed.</p> + +<p>After a short preliminary palaver, a feast of baked pigs and +various roots was spread before us; of which we partook +sparingly, and then proceeded to business. The captain +stated his object in visiting the island, regretted that there +had been a slight misunderstanding during the last visit, and +hoped that no ill-will was borne by either party, and that a +satisfactory trade would be accomplished.</p> + +<p>Romata answered that he had forgotten there had been any +differences between them, protested that he was delighted to see +his friends again, and assured them they should have every +assistance in cutting and embarking the wood. The terms +were afterwards agreed on, and we rose to depart. All this +conversation was afterwards explained to me by Bill, who +understood the language pretty well.</p> + +<p>Romata accompanied us on board, and explained that a great +chief from another island was then on a visit to him, and that he +was to be ceremoniously entertained on the following day. +After begging to be allowed to introduce him to us, and receiving +permission, he sent his canoe ashore to bring him off. At +the same time he gave orders to bring on board his two +favourites, a cock and a paroquet. While the canoe was gone +on this errand, I had time to regard the savage chief +attentively. He was a man of immense size, with massive but +beautifully moulded limbs and figure, only parts of which, the +broad chest and muscular arms, were uncovered; for, although the +lower orders generally wore no other clothing than a strip of +cloth called <i>maro</i> round their loins, the chief, on +particular occasions, wrapped his person in voluminous folds of a +species of native cloth made from the bark of the Chinese +paper-mulberry. Romata wore a magnificent black beard and +moustache, and his hair was frizzed out to such an extent that it +resembled a large turban, in which was stuck a long wooden +pin! I afterwards found that this pin served for scratching +the head, for which purpose the fingers were too short without +disarranging the hair. But Romata put himself to much +greater inconvenience on account of his hair, for we found that +he slept with his head resting on a wooden pillow, in which was +cut a hollow for the neck, so that the hair of the sleeper might +not be disarranged.</p> + +<p>In ten minutes the canoe returned, bringing the other chief, +who certainly presented a most extraordinary appearance, having +painted one half of his face red and the other half yellow, +besides ornamenting it with various designs in black! +Otherwise he was much the same in appearance as Romata, though +not so powerfully built. As this chief had never seen a +ship before, except, perchance, some of the petty traders that at +long intervals visit these remote islands, he was much taken up +with the neatness and beauty of all the fittings of the +schooner. He was particularly struck with a musket which +was shown to him, and asked where the white men got hatchets hard +enough to cut the tree of which the barrel was made! While +he was thus engaged, his brother chief stood aloof, talking with +the captain, and fondling a superb cock and a little blue-headed +paroquet, the favourites of which I have before spoken. I +observed that all the other natives walked in a crouching posture +while in the presence of Romata. Before our guests left us, +the captain ordered the brass gun to be uncovered and fired for +their gratification; and I have every reason to believe he did so +for the purpose of showing our superior power, in case the +natives should harbour any evil designs against us. Romata +had never seen this gun before, as it had not been uncovered on +previous visits, and the astonishment with which he viewed it was +very amusing. Being desirous of knowing its power, he +begged that the captain would fire it. So a shot was put +into it. The chiefs were then directed to look at a rock +about two miles out at sea, and the gun was fired. In a +second the top of the rock was seen to burst asunder, and to fall +in fragments into the sea.</p> + +<p>Romata was so delighted with the success of this shot, that he +pointed to a man who was walking on the shore, and begged the +captain to fire at him, evidently supposing that his permission +was quite sufficient to justify the captain in such an act. +He was therefore surprised, and not a little annoyed, when the +captain refused to fire at the native, and ordered the gun to be +housed.</p> + +<p>Of all the things, however, that afforded matter of amusement +to these savages, that which pleased Romata’s visitor most +was the ship’s pump. He never tired of examining it, +and pumping up the water. Indeed, so much was he taken up +with this pump, that he could not be prevailed on to return on +shore, but sent a canoe to fetch his favourite stool, on which he +seated himself, and spent the remainder of the day in pumping the +bilge-water out of the ship!</p> + +<p>Next day the crew went ashore to cut sandal-wood, while the +captain, with one or two men, remained on board, in order to be +ready, if need be, with the brass gun, which was unhoused and +conspicuously elevated, with its capacious muzzle directed point +blank at the chief’s house. The men were fully armed +as usual; and the captain ordered me to go with them, to assist +in the work. I was much pleased with this order, for it +freed me from the captain’s company, which I could not now +endure, and it gave me an opportunity of seeing the natives.</p> + +<p>As we wound along in single file through the rich fragrant +groves of banana, cocoa-nut, bread-fruit, and other trees, I +observed that there were many of the plum and banian trees, with +which I had become familiar on the Coral Island. I noticed +also large quantities of taro-roots, yams, and sweet potatoes, +growing in enclosures. On turning into an open glade of the +woods, we came abruptly upon a cluster of native houses. +They were built chiefly of bamboos, and were thatched with the +large thick leaves of the pandanus; but many of them had little +more than a sloping roof and three sides with an open front, +being the most simple shelter from the weather that could well be +imagined. Within these, and around them, were groups of +natives—men, women, and children—who all stood up to +gaze at us as we marched along, followed by the party of men whom +the chief had sent to escort us. About half a mile inland +we arrived at the spot where the sandal-wood grew, and, while the +men set to work, I clambered up an adjoining hill to observe the +country.</p> + +<p>About mid-day, the chief arrived with several followers, one +of whom carried a baked pig on a wooden platter, with yams and +potatoes on several plantain leaves, which he presented to the +men, who sat down under the shade of a tree to dine. The +chief sat down to dine also; but, to my surprise, instead of +feeding himself, one of his wives performed that office for +him! I was seated beside Bill, and asked him the reason of +this.</p> + +<p>“It is beneath his dignity, I believe, to feed +himself,” answered Bill; “but I daresay he’s +not particular, except on great occasions. They’ve a +strange custom among them, Ralph, which is called <i>tabu</i>, +and they carry it to great lengths. If a man chooses a +particular tree for his god, the fruit o’ that tree is +tabued to him; and if he eats it, he is sure to be killed by his +people, and eaten, of course, for killing means eating +hereaway. Then, you see that great mop o’ hair on the +chief’s head? Well, he has a lot o’ barbers to +keep it in order; and it’s a law that whoever touches the +head of a living chief or the body of a dead one, his hands are +tabued; so, in that way, the barbers’ hands are always +tabued, and they daren’t use them for their lives, but have +to be fed like big babies, as they are, sure enough!”</p> + +<p>“That’s odd, Bill. But look there,” +said I, pointing to a man whose skin was of a much lighter colour +than the generality of the natives. “I’ve seen +a few of these light-skinned fellows among the Fejeeans. +They seem to me to be of quite a different race.”</p> + +<p>“So they are,” answered Bill. “These +fellows come from the Tongan Islands, which lie a long way to the +eastward. They come here to build their big war-canoes; and +as these take two, and sometimes four years, to build, +there’s always some o’ the brown-skins among the +black sarpents o’ these islands.”</p> + +<p>“By the way, Bill,” said I, “your mentioning +serpents, reminds me that I have not seen a reptile of any kind +since I came to this part of the world.”</p> + +<p>“No more there are any,” said Bill, “if ye +except the niggers themselves, there’s none on the islands, +but a lizard or two and some sich harmless things. But I +never seed any myself. If there’s none on the land, +however, there’s more than enough in the water, and that +minds me of a wonderful brute they have here. But, come, +I’ll show it to you.” So saying, Bill arose, +and, leaving the men still busy with the baked pig, led me into +the forest. After proceeding a short distance we came upon +a small pond of stagnant water. A native lad had followed +us, to whom we called and beckoned him to come to us. On +Bill saying a few words to him, which I did not understand, the +boy advanced to the edge of the pond, and gave a low peculiar +whistle. Immediately the water became agitated and an +enormous eel thrust its head above the surface and allowed the +youth to touch it. It was about twelve feet long, and as +thick round the body as a man’s thigh.</p> + +<p>“There,” said Bill, his lip curling with contempt, +“what do you think of that for a god, Ralph? This is +one o’ their gods, and it has been fed with dozens o’ +livin’ babies already. How many more it’ll get +afore it dies is hard to say.”</p> + +<p>“Babies?” said I, with an incredulous look</p> + +<p>“Ay, babies,” returned Bill. “Your +soft-hearted folk at home would say, ‘Oh, horrible! +impossible!’ to that, and then go away as comfortable and +unconcerned as if their sayin’ ‘horrible! +impossible!’ had made it a lie. But I tell you, +Ralph, it’s a <i>fact</i>. I’ve seed it with my +own eyes the last time I was here, an’ mayhap if you stop a +while at this accursed place, and keep a sharp look out, +you’ll see it too. They don’t feed it regularly +with livin’ babies, but they give it one now and then as a +treat. Bah! you brute!’ cried Bill, in disgust, +giving the reptile a kick on the snout with his heavy boot, that +sent it sweltering back in agony into its loathsome pool. I +thought it lucky for Bill, indeed for all of us, that the native +youth’s back happened to be turned at the time, for I am +certain that if the poor savages had come to know that we had so +rudely handled their god, we should have had to fight our way +back to the ship. As we retraced our steps I questioned my +companion further on this subject.</p> + +<p>“How comes it, Bill, that the mothers allow such a +dreadful thing to be done?”</p> + +<p>“Allow it? the mothers <i>do</i> it! It seems to +me that there’s nothing too fiendish or diabolical for +these people to do. Why, in some of the islands they have +an institution called the <i>Areoi</i>, and the persons connected +with that body are ready for any wickedness that mortal man can +devise. In fact they stick at nothing; and one o’ +their customs is to murder their infants the moment they are +born. The mothers agree to it, and the fathers do it. +And the mildest ways they have of murdering them is by sticking +them through the body with sharp splinters of bamboo, strangling +them with their thumbs, or burying them alive and stamping them +to death while under the sod.”</p> + +<p>I felt sick at heart while my companion recited these +horrors.</p> + +<p>“But it’s a curious fact,” he continued, +after a pause, during which we walked in silence towards the spot +where we had left our comrades,—“it’s a curious +fact, that wherever the missionaries get a footin’ all +these things come to an end at once, an’ the savages take +to doin’ each other good, and singin’ psalms, just +like Methodists.”</p> + +<p>“God bless the missionaries!” said I, while a +feeling of enthusiasm filled my heart, so that I could speak with +difficulty. “God bless and prosper the missionaries +till they get a footing in every island of the sea!”</p> + +<p>“I would say Amen to that prayer, Ralph, if I +could,” said Bill, in a deep, sad voice; “but it +would be a mere mockery for a man to ask a blessing for others +who dare not ask one for himself. But, Ralph,” he +continued, “I’ve not told you half o’ the +abominations I have seen durin’ my life in these +seas. If we pull long together, lad, I’ll tell you +more; and if times have not changed very much since I was here +last, it’s like that you’ll have a chance o’ +seeing a little for yourself before long.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The Sandal-wood party—Native children’s games, +somewhat surprising—Desperate amusements suddenly and +fatally brought to a close—An old friend +recognised—News—Romata’s mad conduct.</p> + +<p>Next day the wood-cutting party went ashore again, and I +accompanied them as before. During the dinner hour I +wandered into the woods alone, being disinclined for food that +day. I had not rambled far when I found myself unexpectedly +on the sea-shore, having crossed a narrow neck of land which +separated the native village from a large bay. Here I found +a party of the islanders busy with one of their war-canoes, which +was almost ready for launching. I stood for a long time +watching this party with great interest, and observed that they +fastened the timbers and planks to each other very much in the +same way in which I had seen Jack fasten those of our little +boat. But what surprised me most was its immense length, +which I measured very carefully, and found to be a hundred feet +long; and it was so capacious that it could have held three +hundred men. It had the unwieldy out-rigger and enormously +high stern-posts which I had remarked on the canoe that came to +us while I was on the Coral Island. Observing some boys +playing at games a short way along the beach, I resolved to go +and watch them; but as I turned from the natives who were engaged +so busily and cheerfully at their work, I little thought of the +terrible event that hung on the completion of that war-canoe.</p> + +<p>Advancing towards the children, who were so numerous that I +began to think this must be the general play-ground of the +village, I sat down on a grassy bank under the shade of a +plantain-tree, to watch them. And a happier or more noisy +crew I have never seen. There were at least two hundred of +them, both boys and girls, all of whom were clad in no other +garments than their own glossy little black skins, except the +maro, or strip of cloth round the loins of the boys, and a very +short petticoat or kilt on the girls. They did not all play +at the same game, but amused themselves in different groups.</p> + +<p>One band was busily engaged in a game exactly similar to our +blind-man’s-buff. Another set were walking on stilts, +which raised the children three feet from the ground. They +were very expert at this amusement and seldom tumbled. In +another place I observed a group of girls standing together, and +apparently enjoying themselves very much; so I went up to see +what they were doing, and found that they were opening their +eye-lids with their fingers till their eyes appeared of an +enormous size, and then thrusting pieces of straw between the +upper and lower lids, across the eye-ball, to keep them in that +position! This seemed to me, I must confess, a very foolish +as well as dangerous amusement. Nevertheless the children +seemed to be greatly delighted with the hideous faces they +made. I pondered this subject a good deal, and thought that +if little children knew how silly they seem to grown-up people +when they make faces, they would not be so fond of doing +it. In another place were a number of boys engaged in +flying kites, and I could not help wondering that some of the +games of those little savages should be so like to our own, +although they had never seen us at play. But the kites were +different from ours in many respects, being of every variety of +shape. They were made of very thin cloth, and the boys +raised them to a wonderful height in the air by means of twine +made from the cocoa-nut husk. Other games there were, some +of which showed the natural depravity of the hearts of these poor +savages, and made me wish fervently that missionaries might be +sent out to them. But the amusement which the greatest +number of the children of both sexes seemed to take chief delight +in, was swimming and diving in the sea; and the expertness which +they exhibited was truly amazing. They seemed to have two +principal games in the water, one of which was to dive off a sort +of stage which had been erected near a deep part of the sea, and +chase each other in the water. Some of them went down to an +extraordinary depth; others skimmed along the surface, or rolled +over and over like porpoises, or diving under each other, came up +unexpectedly and pulled each other down by a leg or an arm. +They never seemed to tire of this sport, and, from the great heat +of the water in the South Seas, they could remain in it nearly +all day without feeling chilled. Many of these children +were almost infants, scarce able to walk; yet they staggered down +the beach, flung their round fat little black bodies fearlessly +into deep water, and struck out to sea with as much confidence as +ducklings.</p> + +<p>The other game to which I have referred was swimming in the +surf. But as this is an amusement in which all engage, from +children of ten to gray-headed men of sixty, and as I had an +opportunity of witnessing it in perfection the day following, I +shall describe it more minutely.</p> + +<p>I suppose it was in honour of their guest that this grand +swimming-match was got up, for Romata came and told the captain +that they were going to engage in it, and begged him to +“come and see.”</p> + +<p>“What sort of amusement is this surf swimming?” I +inquired of Bill, as we walked together to a part of the shore on +which several thousands of the natives were assembled.</p> + +<p>“It’s a very favourite lark with these +’xtr’or’nary critters,” replied Bill, +giving a turn to the quid of tobacco that invariably bulged out +his left cheek. “Ye see, Ralph, them fellows take to +the water as soon a’most as they can walk, an’ long +before they can do that anything respectably, so that they are as +much at home in the sea as on the land. Well, ye see, I +’spose they found swimmin’ for miles out to sea, and +divin’ fathoms deep, wasn’t exciting enough, so they +invented this game o’ the surf. Each man and boy, as +you see, has got a short board or plank, with which he swims out +for a mile or more to sea, and then, gettin’ on the top +o’ yon thundering breaker, they come to shore on the top of +it, yellin’ and screechin’ like fiends. +It’s a marvel to me that they’re not dashed to +shivers on the coral reef, for sure an’ sartin am I that if +any o’ us tried it, we wouldn’t be worth the fluke of +a broken anchor after the wave fell. But there they +go!”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, several hundreds of the natives, amongst whom we +were now standing, uttered a loud yell, rushed down the beach, +plunged into the surf, and were carried off by the seething foam +of the retreating wave.</p> + +<p>At the point where we stood, the encircling coral reef joined +the shore, so that the magnificent breakers, which a recent stiff +breeze had rendered larger than usual, fell in thunder at the +feet of the multitudes who lined the beach. For some time +the swimmers continued to strike out to sea, breasting over the +swell like hundreds of black seals. Then they all turned, +and, watching an approaching billow, mounted its white crest, +and, each laying his breast on the short flat board, came rolling +towards the shore, careering on the summit of the mighty wave, +while they and the onlookers shouted and yelled with +excitement. Just as the monster wave curled in solemn +majesty to fling its bulky length upon the beach, most of the +swimmers slid back into the trough behind; others, slipping off +their boards, seized them in their hands, and, plunging through +the watery waste, swam out to repeat the amusement; but a few, +who seemed to me the most reckless, continued their career until +they were launched upon the beach, and enveloped in the churning +foam and spray. One of these last came in on the crest of +the wave most manfully, and landed with a violent bound almost on +the spot where Bill and I stood. I saw by his peculiar +head-dress that he was the chief whom the tribe entertained as +their guest. The sea-water had removed nearly all the paint +with which his face had been covered; and, as he rose panting to +his feet, I recognised, to my surprise, the features of Tararo, +my old friend of the Coral Island!</p> + +<p>Tararo at the same moment recognised me, and, advancing +quickly, took me round the neck and rubbed noses; which had the +effect of transferring a good deal of the moist paint from his +nose to mine. Then, recollecting that this was not the +white man’s mode of salutation, he grasped me by the hand +and shook it violently.</p> + +<p>“Hallo, Ralph!” cried Bill, in surprise, +“that chap seems to have taken a sudden fancy to you, or he +must be an old acquaintance.”</p> + +<p>“Right, Bill,” I replied, “he is indeed an +old acquaintance;” and I explained in a few words that he +was the chief whose party Jack and Peterkin and I had helped to +save.</p> + +<p>Tararo having thrown away his surf-board, entered into an +animated conversation with Bill, pointing frequently during the +course of it to me; whereby I concluded he must be telling him +about the memorable battle, and the part we had taken in +it. When he paused, I begged of Bill to ask him about the +woman Avatea, for I had some hope that she might have come with +Tararo on this visit. “And ask him,” said I, +“who she is, for I am persuaded she is of a different race +from the Feejeeans.” On the mention of her name the +chief frowned darkly, and seemed to speak with much anger.</p> + +<p>“You’re right, Ralph,” said Bill, when the +chief had ceased to talk; “she’s not a Feejee girl, +but a Samoan. How she ever came to this place the chief +does not very clearly explain, but he says she was taken in war, +and that he got her three years ago, an’ kept her as his +daughter ever since. Lucky for her, poor girl, else +she’d have been roasted and eaten like the rest.”</p> + +<p>“But why does Tararo frown and look so angry?” +said I.</p> + +<p>“Because the girl’s somewhat obstinate, like most +o’ the sex, an’ won’t marry the man he wants +her to. It seems that a chief of some other island came on +a visit to Tararo and took a fancy to her, but she wouldn’t +have him on no account, bein’ already in love, and engaged +to a young chief whom Tararo hates, and she kicked up a desperate +shindy; so, as he was going on a war expedition in his canoe, he +left her to think about it, sayin’ he’d be back in +six months or so, when he hoped she wouldn’t be so +obstropolous. This happened just a week ago; an’ +Tararo says that if she’s not ready to go, when the chief +returns, as his bride, she’ll be sent to him as a <i>long +pig</i>.”</p> + +<p>“As a long pig!” I exclaimed in surprise; +“why what does he mean by that?”</p> + +<p>“He means somethin’ very unpleasant,” +answered Bill with a frown. “You see these +blackguards eat men an’ women just as readily as they eat +pigs; and, as baked pigs and baked men are very like each other +in appearance, they call men <i>long</i> pigs. If Avatea +goes to this fellow as a long pig, it’s all up with her, +poor thing.”</p> + +<p>“Is she on the island now?” I asked eagerly.</p> + +<p>“No, she’s at Tararo’s island.”</p> + +<p>“And where does it lie?”</p> + +<p>“About fifty or sixty miles to the south’ard +o’ this,” returned Bill; “but +I—”</p> + +<p>At this moment we were startled by the cry of “Mao! +mao!—a shark! a shark!” which was immediately +followed by a shriek that rang clear and fearfully loud above the +tumult of cries that arose from the savages in the water and on +the land. We turned hastily towards the direction whence +the cry came, and had just time to observe the glaring eye-balls +of one of the swimmers as he tossed his arms in the air. +Next instant he was pulled under the waves. A canoe was +instantly launched, and the hand of the drowning man was caught, +but only half of his body was dragged from the maw of the +monster, which followed the canoe until the water became so +shallow that it could scarcely swim. The crest of the next +billow was tinged with red as it rolled towards the shore.</p> + +<p>In most countries of the world this would have made a deep +impression on the spectators, but the only effect it had upon +these islanders was to make them hurry with all speed out of the +sea, lest a similar fate should befall some of the others; but, +so utterly reckless were they of human life, that it did not for +a moment suspend the progress of their amusements. It is +true the surf-swimming ended for that time somewhat abruptly, but +they immediately proceeded with other games. Bill told me +that sharks do not often attack the surf-swimmers, being +frightened away by the immense numbers of men and boys in the +water, and by the shouting and splashing that they make. +“But,” said he, “such a thing as you have seen +just now don’t frighten them much. They’ll be +at it again to-morrow or next day, just as if there wasn’t +a single shark between Feejee and Nova Zembla.”</p> + +<p>After this the natives had a series of wrestling and boxing +matches; and being men of immense size and muscle, they did a +good deal of injury to each other, especially in boxing, in which +not only the lower orders, but several of the chiefs and priests +engaged. Each bout was very quickly terminated, for they +did not pretend to a scientific knowledge of the art, and wasted +no time in sparring, but hit straight out at each other’s +heads, and their blows were delivered with great force. +Frequently one of the combatants was knocked down with a single +blow; and one gigantic fellow hit his adversary so severely that +he drove the skin entirely off his forehead. This feat was +hailed with immense applause by the spectators.</p> + +<p>During these exhibitions, which were very painful to me, +though I confess I could not refrain from beholding them, I was +struck with the beauty of many of the figures and designs that +were tattooed on the persons of the chiefs and principal +men. One figure, that seemed to me very elegant, was that +of a palm-tree tattooed on the back of a man’s leg, the +roots rising, as it were, from under his heel, the stem ascending +the tendon of the ankle, and the graceful head branching out upon +the calf. I afterwards learned that this process of +tattooing is very painful, and takes long to do, commencing at +the age of ten, and being continued at intervals up to the age of +thirty. It is done by means of an instrument made of bone, +with a number of sharp teeth with which the skin is +punctured. Into these punctures a preparation made from the +kernel of the candle-nut, mixed with cocoa-nut oil, is rubbed, +and the mark thus made is indelible. The operation is +performed by a class of men whose profession it is, and they +tattoo as much at a time, as the person on whom they are +operating can bear; which is not much, the pain and inflammation +caused by tattooing being very great, sometimes causing +death. Some of the chiefs were tattooed with an ornamental +stripe down the legs, which gave them the appearance of being +clad in tights. Others had marks round the ankles and +insteps, which looked like tight-fitting and elegant boots. +Their faces were also tattooed, and their breasts were very +profusely marked with every imaginable species of +device,—muskets, dogs, birds, pigs, clubs, and canoes, +intermingled with lozenges, squares, circles, and other arbitrary +figures.</p> + +<p>The women were not tattooed so much as the men, having only a +few marks on their feet and arms. But I must say, however +objectionable this strange practice may be, it nevertheless had +this good effect, that it took away very much from their +appearance of nakedness.</p> + +<p>Next day, while we were returning from the woods to our +schooner, we observed Romata rushing about in the neighbourhood +of his house, apparently mad with passion.</p> + +<p>“Ah!” said Bill to me, “there he’s at +his old tricks again. That’s his way when he gets +drink. The natives make a sort of drink o’ their own, +and it makes him bad enough; but when he gets brandy he’s +like a wild tiger. The captain, I suppose, has given him a +bottle, as usual, to keep him in good humour. After +drinkin’ he usually goes to sleep, and the people know it +well and keep out of his way, for fear they should waken +him. Even the babies are taken out of ear-shot; for, when +he’s waked up, he rushes out just as you see him now, and +spears or clubs the first person he meets.”</p> + +<p>It seemed at the present time, however, that no deadly weapon +had been in his way, for the infuriated chief was raging about +without one. Suddenly he caught sight of an unfortunate man +who was trying to conceal himself behind a tree. Rushing +towards him, Romata struck him a terrible blow on the head, which +knocked out the poor man’s eye and also dislocated the +chief’s finger. The wretched creature offered no +resistance; he did not even attempt to parry the blow. +Indeed, from what Bill said, I found that he might consider +himself lucky in having escaped with his life, which would +certainly have been forfeited had the chief been possessed of a +club at the time.</p> + +<p>“Have these wretched creatures no law among +themselves,” said I, “which can restrain such +wickedness?”</p> + +<p>“None,” replied Bill. “The +chief’s word is law. He might kill and eat a dozen of +his own subjects any day for nothing more than his own pleasure, +and nobody would take the least notice of it.”</p> + +<p>This ferocious deed took place within sight of our party as we +wended our way to the beach, but I could not observe any other +expression on the faces of the men than that of total +indifference or contempt. It seemed to me a very awful +thing that it should be possible for men to come to such hardness +of heart and callousness to the sight of bloodshed and violence; +but, indeed, I began to find that such constant exposure to +scenes of blood was having a slight effect upon myself, and I +shuddered when I came to think that I, too, was becoming +callous.</p> + +<p>I thought upon this subject much that night while I walked up +and down the deck during my hours of watch; and I came to the +conclusion that if I, who hated, abhorred, and detested such +bloody deeds as I had witnessed within the last few weeks, could +so soon come to be less sensitive about them, how little wonder +that these poor ignorant savages, who were born and bred in +familiarity therewith, should think nothing of them at all, and +should hold human life in so very slight esteem.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Mischief brewing—My blood is made to run cold—Evil +consultations and wicked resolves—Bloody Bill attempts to +do good and fails—The attack—Wholesale +murder—The flight—The escape.</p> + +<p>Next morning I awoke with a feverish brow and a feeling of +deep depression at my heart; and the more I thought on my unhappy +fate, the more wretched and miserable did I feel.</p> + +<p>I was surrounded on all sides by human beings of the most +dreadful character, to whom the shedding of blood was mere +pastime. On shore were the natives, whose practices were so +horrible that I could not think of them without shuddering. +On board were none but pirates of the blackest dye, who, although +not cannibals, were foul murderers, and more blameworthy even +than the savages, inasmuch as they knew better. Even Bill, +with whom I had, under the strange circumstances of my lot, +formed a kind of intimacy, was so fierce in his nature as to have +acquired the title of “Bloody” from his vile +companions. I felt very much cast down the more I +considered the subject and the impossibility of delivery, as it +seemed to me, at least for a long time to come. At last, in +my feeling of utter helplessness, I prayed fervently to the +Almighty that he would deliver me out of my miserable condition; +and when I had done so I felt some degree of comfort.</p> + +<p>When the captain came on deck, before the hour at which the +men usually started for the woods, I begged of him to permit me +to remain aboard that day, as I did not feel well; but he looked +at me angrily, and ordered me, in a surly tone, to get ready to +go on shore as usual. The fact was that the captain had +been out of humour for some time past. Romata and he had +had some differences, and high words had passed between them, +during which the chief had threatened to send a fleet of his +war-canoes, with a thousand men, to break up and burn the +schooner; whereupon the captain smiled sarcastically, and going +up to the chief gazed sternly in his face, while he said, +“I have only to raise my little finger just now, and my big +gun will blow your whole village to atoms in five +minutes!” Although the chief was a bold man, he +quailed before the pirate’s glance and threat, and made no +reply; but a bad feeling had been raised and old sores had been +opened.</p> + +<p>I had, therefore, to go with the wood-cutters that day. +Before starting, however, the captain called me into the cabin, +and said,—</p> + +<p>“Here, Ralph, I’ve got a mission for you, +lad. That blackguard Romata is in the dumps, and nothing +will mollify him but a gift; so do you go up to his house and +give him these whales’ teeth, with my compliments. +Take with you one of the men who can speak the +language.”</p> + +<p>I looked at the gift in some surprise, for it consisted of six +white whales’ teeth, and two of the same dyed bright red, +which seemed to me very paltry things. However, I did not +dare to hesitate or ask any questions; so, gathering them up, I +left the cabin and was soon on my way to the chief’s house, +accompanied by Bill. On expressing my surprise at the gift, +he said,—</p> + +<p>“They’re paltry enough to you or me, Ralph, but +they’re considered of great value by them chaps. +They’re a sort o’ cash among them. The red ones +are the most prized, one of them bein’ equal to twenty +o’ the white ones. I suppose the only reason for +their bein’ valuable is that there ain’t many of +them, and they’re hard to be got.”</p> + +<p>On arriving at the house we found Romata sitting on a mat, in +the midst of a number of large bales of native cloth and other +articles, which had been brought to him as presents from time to +time by inferior chiefs. He received us rather haughtily, +but on Bill explaining the nature of our errand he became very +condescending, and his eyes glistened with satisfaction when he +received the whales’ teeth, although he laid them aside +with an assumption of kingly indifference.</p> + +<p>“Go,” said he, with a wave of the +hand,—“go, tell your captain that he may cut wood +to-day, but not to-morrow. He must come ashore,—I +want to have a palaver with him.”</p> + +<p>As we left the house to return to the woods, Bill shook his +head:</p> + +<p>“There’s mischief brewin’ in that black +rascal’s head. I know him of old. But what +comes here?”</p> + +<p>As he spoke, we heard the sound of laughter and shouting in +the wood, and presently there issued from it a band of savages, +in the midst of whom were a number of men bearing burdens on +their shoulders. At first I thought that these burdens were +poles with something rolled round them, the end of each pole +resting on a man’s shoulder. But on a nearer approach +I saw that they were human beings, tied hand and foot, and so +lashed to the poles that they could not move. I counted +twenty of them as they passed.</p> + +<p>“More murder!” said Bill, in a voice that sounded +between a hoarse laugh and a groan.</p> + +<p>“Surely they are not going to murder them?” said +I, looking anxiously into Bill’s face.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, Ralph,” replied Bill, +“what they’re goin’ to do with them; but I fear +they mean no good when they tie fellows up in that +way.”</p> + +<p>As we continued our way towards the wood-cutters, I observed +that Bill looked anxiously over his shoulder, in the direction +where the procession had disappeared. At last he stopped, +and turning abruptly on his heel, said,—</p> + +<p>“I tell ye what it is, Ralph, I must be at the bottom +o’ that affair. Let us follow these black scoundrels +and see what they’re goin’ to do.”</p> + +<p>I must say I had no wish to pry further into their bloody +practices; but Bill seemed bent on it, so I turned and +went. We passed rapidly through the bush, being guided in +the right direction by the shouts of the savages. Suddenly +there was a dead silence, which continued for some time, while +Bill and I involuntarily quickened our pace until we were running +at the top of our speed across the narrow neck of land previously +mentioned. As we reached the verge of the wood, we +discovered the savages surrounding the large war-canoe, which +they were apparently on the point of launching. Suddenly +the multitude put their united strength to the canoe; but +scarcely had the huge machine begun to move, when a yell, the +most appalling that ever fell upon my ear, rose high above the +shouting of the savages. It had not died away when another +and another smote upon my throbbing ear; and then I saw that +these inhuman monsters were actually launching their canoe over +the living bodies of their victims. But there was no pity +in the breasts of these men. Forward they went in ruthless +indifference, shouting as they went, while high above their +voices rang the dying shrieks of those wretched creatures, as, +one after another, the ponderous canoe passed over them, burst +the eyeballs from their sockets, and sent the life’s blood +gushing from their mouths. Oh, reader, this is no +fiction. I would not, for the sake of thrilling you with +horror, invent so terrible a scene. It was witnessed. +It is true; true as that accursed sin which has rendered the +human heart capable of such diabolical enormities!</p> + +<p>When it was over I turned round and fell upon the grass with a +deep groan; but Bill seized me by the arm, and lifting me up as +if I had been a child, cried,—</p> + +<p>“Come along, lad; let’s away!”—and so, +staggering and stumbling over the tangled underwood, we fled from +the fatal spot.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of that day I felt as if I were in a +horrible dream. I scarce knew what was said to me, and was +more than once blamed by the men for idling my time. At +last the hour to return aboard came. We marched down to the +beach, and I felt relief for the first time when my feet rested +on the schooner’s deck.</p> + +<p>In the course of the evening I overheard part of a +conversation between the captain and the first mate, which +startled me not a little. They were down in the cabin, and +conversed in an under-tone, but the sky-light being off, I +overheard every word that was said.</p> + +<p>“I don’t half like it,” said the mate. +“It seems to me that we’ll only have hard +fightin’ and no pay.”</p> + +<p>“No pay!” repeated the captain, in a voice of +suppressed anger. “Do you call a good cargo all for +nothing no pay?”</p> + +<p>“Very true,” returned the mate; “but +we’ve got the cargo aboard. Why not cut your cable +and take French leave o’ them? What’s the use +o’ tryin’ to lick the blackguards when it’ll do +us no manner o’ good?”</p> + +<p>“Mate,” said the captain, in a low voice, +“you talk like a fresh-water sailor. I can only +attribute this shyness to some strange delusion; for +surely” (his voice assumed a slightly sneering tone as he +said this) “surely I am not to suppose that <i>you</i> have +become soft-hearted! Besides, you are wrong in regard to +the cargo being aboard; there’s a good quarter of it lying +in the woods, and that blackguard chief knows it and won’t +let me take it off. He defied us to do our worst, +yesterday.”</p> + +<p>“Defied us! did he?” cried the mate, with a bitter +laugh. “Poor contemptible thing!”</p> + +<p>“And yet he seems not so contemptible but that you are +afraid to attack him.”</p> + +<p>“Who said I was afraid?” growled the mate, +sulkily. “I’m as ready as any man in the +ship. But, captain, what is it that you intend to +do?”</p> + +<p>“I intend to muffle the sweeps and row the schooner up +to the head of the creek there, from which point we can command +the pile of sandal-wood with our gun. Then I shall land +with all the men except two, who shall take care of the schooner +and be ready with the boat to take us off. We can creep +through the woods to the head of the village, where these +cannibals are always dancing round their suppers of human flesh, +and if the carbines of the men are loaded with a heavy charge of +buck-shot, we can drop forty or fifty at the first volley. +After that the thing will be easy enough. The savages will +take to the mountains in a body, and we shall take what we +require, up anchor, and away.”</p> + +<p>To this plan the mate at length agreed. As he left the +cabin I heard the captain say,—</p> + +<p>“Give the men an extra glass of grog, and don’t +forget the buck-shot.”</p> + +<p>The reader may conceive the horror with which I heard this +murderous conversation. I immediately repeated it to Bill, +who seemed much perplexed about it. At length he +said,—</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you what I’ll do, Ralph: +I’ll swim ashore after dark and fix a musket to a tree not +far from the place where we’ll have to land, and I’ll +tie a long string to the trigger, so that when our fellows cross +it they’ll let it off, and so alarm the village in time to +prevent an attack, but not in time to prevent us gettin’ +back to the boat; so, master captain,” added Bill with a +smile that for the first time seemed to me to be mingled with +good-natured cheerfulness, “you’ll be baulked at +least for once in your life by Bloody Bill.”</p> + +<p>After it grew dark, Bill put this resolve in practice. +He slipped over the side with a musket in his left hand, while +with his right he swam ashore and entered the woods. He +soon returned, having accomplished his purpose, and got on board +without being seen,—I being the only one on deck.</p> + +<p>When the hour of midnight approached the men were mustered on +deck, the cable was cut and the muffled sweeps got out. +These sweeps were immensely large oars, each requiring a couple +of men to work it. In a few minutes we entered the mouth of +the creek, which was indeed the mouth of a small river, and took +about half an hour to ascend it, although the spot where we +intended to land was not more than six hundred yards from the +mouth, because there was a slight current against us, and the +mangroves which narrowed the creek, impeded the rowers in some +places. Having reached the spot, which was so darkened by +overhanging trees that we could see with difficulty, a small +kedge anchor attached to a thin line was let softly down over the +stern.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” whispered the captain, as he walked +along the line of men, who were all armed to the teeth, +“don’t be in a hurry, aim low, and don’t waste +your first shots.”</p> + +<p>He then pointed to the boat, into which the men crowded in +silence. There was no room to row, but oars were not +needed, as a slight push against the side of the schooner sent +the boat gliding to the shore.</p> + +<p>“There’s no need of leaving two in the +boat,” whispered the mate, as the men stepped out; +“we shall want all our hands. Let Ralph +stay.”</p> + +<p>The captain assented, and ordered me to stand in readiness +with the boat-hook, to shove ashore at a moment’s notice if +they should return, or to shove off if any of the savages should +happen to approach. He then threw his carbine into the +hollow of his arm and glided through the bushes followed by his +men. With a throbbing head I awaited the result of our +plan. I knew the exact locality where the musket was +placed, for Bill had described it to me, and I kept my straining +eyes fixed upon the spot. But no sound came, and I began to +fear that either they had gone in another direction or that Bill +had not fixed the string properly. Suddenly I heard a faint +click, and observed one or two bright sparks among the +bushes. My heart immediately sank within me, for I knew at +once that the trigger had indeed been pulled but that the priming +had not caught. The plan, therefore, had utterly +failed. A feeling of dread now began to creep over me as I +stood in the boat, in that dark, silent spot, awaiting the issue +of this murderous expedition. I shuddered as I glanced at +the water that glided past like a dark reptile. I looked +back at the schooner, but her hull was just barely visible, while +her tapering masts were lost among the trees which overshadowed +her. Her lower sails were set, but so thick was the gloom +that they were quite invisible.</p> + +<p>Suddenly I heard a shot. In a moment a thousand voices +raised a yell in the village; again the cry rose on the night +air, and was followed by broken shouts as of scattered parties of +men bounding into the woods. Then I heard another shout +loud and close at hand. It was the voice of the captain +cursing the man who had fired the premature shot. Then came +the order, “Forward,” followed by the wild hurrah of +our men, as they charged the savages. Shots now rang in +quick succession, and at last a loud volley startled the echoes +of the woods. It was followed by a multitude of wild +shrieks, which were immediately drowned in another +“hurrah” from the men; the distance of the sound +proving that they were driving their enemies before them towards +the sea.</p> + +<p>While I was listening intently to these sounds, which were now +mingled in confusion, I was startled by the rustling of the +leaves not far from me. At first I thought it was a party +of savages who had observed the schooner, but I was speedily +undeceived by observing a body of natives—apparently +several hundreds, as far as I could guess in the uncertain +light—bounding through the woods towards the scene of +battle. I saw at once that this was a party who had +out-flanked our men, and would speedily attack them in the +rear. And so it turned out, for, in a short time, the +shouts increased ten-fold, and among them I thought I heard a +death-cry uttered by voices familiar to my ear.</p> + +<p>At length the tumult of battle ceased, and, from the cries of +exultation that now arose from the savages, I felt assured that +our men had been conquered. I was immediately thrown into +dreadful consternation. What was I now to do? To be +taken by the savages was too horrible to be thought of; to flee +to the mountains was hopeless, as I should soon be discovered; +and to take the schooner out of the creek without assistance was +impossible. I resolved, however, to make the attempt, as +being my only hope, and was on the point of pushing off when my +hand was stayed and my blood chilled by an appalling shriek in +which I recognised the voice of one of the crew. It was +succeeded by a shout from the savages. Then came another, +and another shriek of agony, making my ears to tingle, as I felt +convinced they were murdering the pirate crew in cold +blood. With a bursting heart and my brain whirling as if on +fire, I seized the boat-hook to push from shore when a man sprang +from the bushes.</p> + +<p>“Stop! Ralph, stop!—there now, push off,” he +cried, and bounded into the boat so violently as nearly to upset +her. It was Bill’s voice! In another moment we +were on board,—the boat made fast, the line of the anchor +cut, and the sweeps run out. At the first stroke of +Bill’s giant arm the schooner was nearly pulled ashore, for +in his haste he forgot that I could scarcely move the unwieldy +oar. Springing to the stern he lashed the rudder in such a +position as that, while it aided me, it acted against him, and so +rendered the force of our strokes nearly equal. The +schooner now began to glide quickly down the creek, but before we +reached its mouth, a yell from a thousand voices on the bank told +that we were discovered. Instantly a number of the savages +plunged into the water and swam towards us; but we were making so +much way that they could not overtake us. One, however, an +immensely powerful man, succeeded in laying hold of the cut rope +that hung from the stern, and clambered quickly upon deck. +Bill caught sight of him the instant his head appeared above the +taffrail. But he did not cease to row, and did not appear +even to notice the savage until he was within a yard of him; +then, dropping the sweep, he struck him a blow on the forehead +with his clenched fist that felled him to the deck. Lifting +him up he hurled him overboard and resumed the oar. But now +a greater danger awaited us, for the savages had outrun us on the +bank and were about to plunge into the water ahead of the +schooner. If they succeeded in doing so our fate was +sealed. For one moment Bill stood irresolute. Then, +drawing a pistol from his belt, he sprang to the brass gun, held +the pan of his pistol over the touch-hole and fired. The +shot was succeeded by the hiss of the cannon’s priming, +then the blaze and the crashing thunder of the monstrous gun +burst upon the savages with such deafening roar that it seemed as +if their very mountains had been rent asunder.</p> + +<p>This was enough. The moment of surprise and hesitation +caused by the unwonted sound, gave us time to pass the point; a +gentle breeze, which the dense foliage had hitherto prevented us +from feeling, bulged out our sails; the schooner bent before it, +and the shouts of the disappointed savages grew fainter and +fainter in the distance as we were slowly wafted out to sea.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Reflections—The wounded man—The squall—True +consolation—Death.</p> + +<p>There is a power of endurance in human beings, both in their +bodies and in their minds, which, I have often thought, seems to +be wonderfully adapted and exactly proportioned to the +circumstances in which individuals may happen to be +placed,—a power which, in most cases, is sufficient to +carry a man through and over every obstacle that may happen to be +thrown in his path through life, no matter how high or how steep +the mountain may be, but which often forsakes him the moment the +summit is gained, the point of difficulty passed; and leaves him +prostrated, with energies gone, nerves unstrung, and a feeling of +incapacity pervading the entire frame that renders the most +trifling effort almost impossible.</p> + +<p>During the greater part of that day I had been subjected to +severe mental and much physical excitement, which had almost +crushed me down by the time I was relieved from duty in the +course of the evening. But when the expedition, whose +failure has just been narrated, was planned, my anxieties and +energies had been so powerfully aroused that I went through the +protracted scenes of that terrible night without a feeling of the +slightest fatigue. My mind and body were alike active and +full of energy. No sooner was the last thrilling fear of +danger past, however, than my faculties were utterly relaxed; +and, when I felt the cool breezes of the Pacific playing around +my fevered brow, and heard the free waves rippling at the +schooner’s prow, as we left the hated island behind us, my +senses forsook me and I fell in a swoon upon the deck.</p> + +<p>From this state I was quickly aroused by Bill, who shook me by +the arm, saying,—</p> + +<p>“Hallo! Ralph, boy, rouse up, lad, we’re safe +now. Poor thing, I believe he’s fainted.” +And raising me in his arms he laid me on the folds of the +gaff-top-sail, which lay upon the deck near the tiller. +“Here, take a drop o’ this, it’ll do you good, +my boy,” he added, in a voice of tenderness which I had +never heard him use before, while he held a brandy-flask to my +lips.</p> + +<p>I raised my eyes gratefully, as I swallowed a mouthful; next +moment my head sank heavily upon my arm and I fell fast +asleep. I slept long, for when I awoke the sun was a good +way above the horizon. I did not move on first opening my +eyes, as I felt a delightful sensation of rest pervading me, and +my eyes were riveted on and charmed with the gorgeous splendour +of the mighty ocean, that burst upon my sight. It was a +dead calm; the sea seemed a sheet of undulating crystal, tipped +and streaked with the saffron hues of sunrise, which had not yet +merged into the glowing heat of noon; and there was a deep calm +in the blue dome above, that was not broken even by the usual +flutter of the sea-fowl. How long I would have lain in +contemplation of this peaceful scene I know not, but my mind was +recalled suddenly and painfully to the past and the present by +the sight of Bill, who was seated on the deck at my feet with his +head reclining, as if in sleep, on his right arm, which rested on +the tiller. As he seemed to rest peacefully I did not mean +to disturb him, but the slight noise I made in raising myself on +my elbow caused him to start and look round.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ralph, awake at last, my boy; you have slept long +and soundly,” he said, turning towards me.</p> + +<p>On beholding his countenance I sprang up in anxiety. He +was deadly pale, and his hair, which hung in dishevelled locks +over his face, was clotted with blood. Blood also stained +his hollow cheeks and covered the front of his shirt, which, with +the greater part of dress, was torn and soiled with mud.</p> + +<p>“Oh, Bill!” said I, with deep anxiety, “what +is the matter with you? You are ill. You must have +been wounded.”</p> + +<p>“Even so, lad,” said Bill in a deep soft voice, +while he extended his huge frame on the couch from which I had +just risen. “I’ve got an ugly wound, I fear, +and I’ve been waiting for you to waken, to ask you to get +me a drop o’ brandy and a mouthful o’ bread from the +cabin lockers. You seemed to sleep so sweetly, Ralph, that +I didn’t like to disturb you. But I don’t feel +up to much just now.”</p> + +<p>I did not wait till he had done talking, but ran below +immediately, and returned in a few seconds with a bottle of +brandy and some broken biscuit. He seemed much refreshed +after eating a few morsels and drinking a long draught of water +mingled with a little of the spirits. Immediately +afterwards he fell asleep, and I watched him anxiously until he +awoke, being desirous of knowing the nature and extent of his +wound.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” he exclaimed, on awaking suddenly, after a +slumber of an hour, “I’m the better of that nap, +Ralph; I feel twice the man I was;” and he attempted to +rise, but sank back again immediately with a deep groan.</p> + +<p>“Nay, Bill you must not move, but lie still while I look +at your wound. I’ll make a comfortable bed for you +here on deck, and get you some breakfast. After that you +shall tell me how you got it. Cheer up, Bill,” I +added, seeing that he turned his head away; “you’ll +be all right in a little, and I’ll be a capital nurse to +you though I’m no doctor.”</p> + +<p>I then left him, and lighted a fire in the caboose. +While it was kindling, I went to the steward’s pantry and +procured the materials for a good breakfast, with which, in +little more than half an hour, I returned to my companion. +He seemed much better, and smiled kindly on me as I set before +him a cup of coffee and a tray with several eggs and some bread +on it.</p> + +<p>“Now then, Bill,” said I, cheerfully, sitting down +beside him on the deck, “let’s fall to. +I’m very hungry myself, I can tell you; but—I +forgot—your wound,” I added, rising; “let me +look at it.”</p> + +<p>I found that the wound was caused by a pistol shot in the +chest. It did not bleed much, and, as it was on the right +side, I was in hopes that it might not be very serious. But +Bill shook his head. “However,” said he, +“sit down, Ralph, and I’ll tell you all about +it.”</p> + +<p>“You see, after we left the boat an’ began to push +through the bushes, we went straight for the line of my musket, +as I had expected; but by some unlucky chance it didn’t +explode, for I saw the line torn away by the men’s legs, +and heard the click o’ the lock; so I fancy the priming had +got damp and didn’t catch. I was in a great quandary +now what to do, for I couldn’t concoct in my mind, in the +hurry, any good reason for firin’ off my piece. But +they say necessity’s the mother of invention; so, just as I +was givin’ it up and clinchin’ my teeth to bide the +worst o’t, and take what should come, a sudden thought came +into my head. I stepped out before the rest, seemin’ +to be awful anxious to be at the savages, tripped my foot on a +fallen tree, plunged head foremost into a bush, an’, ov +coorse, my carbine exploded! Then came such a +screechin’ from the camp as I never heard in all my +life. I rose at once, and was rushin’ on with the +rest when the captain called a halt.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p334b.jpg"> +<img alt="The dying pirate" src="images/p334s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>“‘You did that a-purpose, you villain!’ he +said, with a tremendous oath, and, drawin’ a pistol from +his belt, let fly right into my breast. I fell at once, and +remembered no more till I was startled and brought round by the +most awful yell I ever heard in my life, except, maybe, the +shrieks o’ them poor critters that were crushed to death +under yon big canoe. Jumpin’ up, I looked round, and, +through the trees, saw a fire gleamin’ not far off, the +light o’ which showed me the captain and men tied hand and +foot, each to a post, and the savages dancin’ round them +like demons. I had scarce looked for a second, when I saw +one o’ them go up to the captain flourishing a knife, and, +before I could wink, he plunged it into his breast, while another +yell, like the one that roused me, rang upon my ear. I +didn’t wait for more, but, bounding up, went crashing +through the bushes into the woods. The black fellows caught +sight of me, however, but not in time to prevent me jumpin’ +into the boat, as you know.”</p> + +<p>Bill seemed to be much exhausted after this recital, and +shuddered frequently during the narrative, so I refrained from +continuing the subject at that time, and endeavoured to draw his +mind to other things.</p> + +<p>“But now, Bill,” said I, “it behoves us to +think about the future, and what course of action we shall +pursue. Here we are, on the wide Pacific, in a +well-appointed schooner, which is our own,—at least no one +has a better claim to it than we have,—and the world lies +before us. Moreover, here comes a breeze, so we must make +up our minds which way to steer.”</p> + +<p>“Ralph, boy,” said my companion, “it matters +not to me which way we go. I fear that my time is short +now. Go where you will. I’m content.”</p> + +<p>“Well then, Bill, I think we had better steer to the +Coral Island, and see what has become of my dear old comrades, +Jack and Peterkin. I believe the island has no name, but +the captain once pointed it out to me on the chart, and I marked +it afterwards; so, as we know pretty well our position just now, +I think I can steer to it. Then, as to working the vessel, +it is true I cannot hoist the sails single-handed, but luckily we +have enough of sail set already, and if it should come on to blow +a squall, I could at least drop the peaks of the main and fore +sails, and clew them up partially without help, and throw her +head close into the wind, so as to keep her all shaking till the +violence of the squall is past. And if we have continued +light breezes, I’ll rig up a complication of blocks and fix +them to the top-sail halyards, so that I shall be able to hoist +the sails without help. ’Tis true I’ll require +half a day to hoist them, but we don’t need to mind +that. Then I’ll make a sort of erection on deck to +screen you from the sun, Bill; and if you can only manage to sit +beside the tiller and steer for two hours every day, so as to let +me get a nap, I’ll engage to let you off duty all the rest +of the twenty-four hours. And if you don’t feel able +for steering, I’ll lash the helm and heave to, while I get +you your breakfasts and dinners; and so we’ll manage +famously, and soon reach the Coral Island.”</p> + +<p>Bill smiled faintly as I ran on in this strain.</p> + +<p>“And what will you do,” said he, “if it +comes on to blow a storm?”</p> + +<p>This question silenced me, while I considered what I should do +in such a case. At length I laid my hand an his arm, and +said, “Bill, when a man has done all that he <i>can</i> do, +he ought to leave the rest to God.”</p> + +<p>“Oh, Ralph,” said my companion, in a faint voice, +looking anxiously into my face, “I wish that I had the +feelin’s about God that you seem to have, at this +hour. I’m dyin’, Ralph; yet I, who have braved +death a hundred times, am afraid to die. I’m afraid +to enter the next world. Something within tells me there +will be a reckoning when I go there. But it’s all +over with me, Ralph. I feel that there’s no chance +o’ my bein’ saved.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t say that, Bill,” said I, in deep +compassion, “don’t say that. I’m quite +sure there’s hope even for you, but I can’t remember +the words of the Bible that make me think so. Is there not +a Bible on board, Bill?”</p> + +<p>“No; the last that was in the ship belonged to a poor +boy that was taken aboard against his will. He died, poor +lad, I think, through ill treatment and fear. After he was +gone the captain found his Bible and flung it +overboard.”</p> + +<p>I now reflected, with great sadness and self-reproach, on the +way in which I had neglected my Bible; and it flashed across me +that I was actually in the sight of God a greater sinner than +this blood-stained pirate; for, thought I, he tells me that he +never read the Bible, and was never brought up to care for it; +whereas I was carefully taught to read it by my own mother, and +had read it daily as long as I possessed one, yet to so little +purpose that I could not now call to mind a single text that +would meet this poor man’s case, and afford him the +consolation he so much required. I was much distressed, and +taxed my memory for a long time. At last a text did flash +into my mind, and I wondered much that I had not thought of it +before.</p> + +<p>“Bill,” said I, in a low voice, +“‘Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and thou shalt be +saved.’”</p> + +<p>“Ay, Ralph, I’ve heard the missionaries say that +before now, but what good can it do me? It’s not for +me that. It’s not for the likes o’ +me.”</p> + +<p>I knew not now what to say, for, although I felt sure that +that word was for him as well as for me, I could not remember any +other word whereby I could prove it.</p> + +<p>After a short pause, Bill raised his eyes to mine and said, +“Ralph, I’ve led a terrible life. I’ve +been a sailor since I was a boy, and I’ve gone from bad to +worse ever since I left my father’s roof. I’ve +been a pirate three years now. It is true I did not choose +the trade, but I was inveigled aboard this schooner and kept here +by force till I became reckless and at last joined them. +Since that time my hand has been steeped in human blood again and +again. Your young heart would grow cold if I—; but +why should I go on? ’Tis of no use, Ralph; my doom is +fixed.”</p> + +<p>“Bill,” said I, “‘Though your sins be +red like crimson, they shall be white as snow.’ +‘Only believe.’”</p> + +<p>“Only believe!” cried Bill, starting up on his +elbow; “I’ve heard men talk o’ believing as if +it was easy. Ha! ’tis easy enough for a man to point +to a rope and say, ‘I believe that would bear my +weight;’ but ’tis another thing for a man to catch +hold o’ that rope, and swing himself by it over the edge of +a precipice!”</p> + +<p>The energy with which he said this, and the action with which +it was accompanied, were too much for Bill. He sank back +with a deep groan. As if the very elements sympathized with +this man’s sufferings, a low moan came sweeping over the +sea.</p> + +<p>“Hist! Ralph,” said Bill, opening his eves; +“there’s a squall coming, lad. Look alive, +boy. Clew up the fore-sail. Drop the main-sail +peak. Them squalls come quick sometimes.”</p> + +<p>I had already started to my feet, and saw that a heavy squall +was indeed bearing down on us. It had hitherto escaped my +notice, owing to my being so much engrossed by our +conversation. I instantly did as Bill desired, for the +schooner was still lying motionless on the glassy sea. I +observed with some satisfaction that the squall was bearing down +on the larboard bow, so that it would strike the vessel in the +position in which she would be best able to stand the +shock. Having done my best to shorten sail, I returned aft, +and took my stand at the helm.</p> + +<p>“Now, boy,” said Bill, in a faint voice, +“keep her close to the wind.”</p> + +<p>A few seconds afterwards he said, “Ralph, let me hear +those two texts again.”</p> + +<p>I repeated them.</p> + +<p>“Are ye sure, lad, ye saw them in the Bible?”</p> + +<p>“Quite sure,” I replied.</p> + +<p>Almost before the words had left my lips the wind burst upon +us, and the spray dashed over our decks. For a time the +schooner stood it bravely, and sprang forward against the rising +sea like a war-horse. Meanwhile clouds darkened the sky, +and the sea began to rise in huge billows. There was still +too much sail on the schooner, and, as the gale increased, I +feared that the masts would be torn out of her or carried away, +while the wind whistled and shrieked through the strained +rigging. Suddenly the wind shifted a point, a heavy sea +struck us on the bow, and the schooner was almost laid on her +beam-ends, so that I could scarcely keep my legs. At the +same moment Bill lost his hold of the belaying-pin which had +served to steady him, and he slid with stunning violence against +the sky-light. As he lay on the deck close beside me, I +could see that the shock had rendered him insensible, but I did +not dare to quit the tiller for an instant, as it required all my +faculties, bodily and mental, to manage the schooner. For +an hour the blast drove us along, while, owing to the sharpness +of the vessel’s bow and the press of canvass, she dashed +through the waves instead of breasting over them, thereby +drenching the decks with water fore and aft. At the end of +that time the squall passed away, and left us rocking on the +bosom of the agitated sea.</p> + +<p>My first care, the instant I could quit the helm, was to raise +Bill from the deck and place him on the couch. I then ran +below for the brandy bottle and rubbed his face and hands with +it, and endeavoured to pour a little down his throat. But +my efforts, although I continued them long and assiduously, were +of no avail; as I let go the hand which I had been chafing it +fell heavily on the deck. I laid my hand over his heart, +and sat for some time quite motionless, but there was no flutter +there—the pirate was dead!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Alone on the deep—Necessity the mother of +invention—A valuable book discovered—Natural +phenomenon—A bright day in my history.</p> + +<p>It was with feelings of awe, not unmingled with fear, that I +now seated myself on the cabin sky-light and gazed upon the rigid +features of my late comrade, while my mind wandered over his past +history and contemplated with anxiety my present position. +Alone! in the midst of the wide Pacific, having a most imperfect +knowledge of navigation, and in a schooner requiring at least +eight men as her proper crew. But I will not tax the +reader’s patience with a minute detail of my feelings and +doings during the first few days that followed the death of my +companion. I will merely mention that I tied a cannon ball +to his feet and, with feelings of the deepest sorrow, consigned +him to the deep.</p> + +<p>For fully a week after that a steady breeze blew from the +east, and, as my course lay west-and-by-north, I made rapid +progress towards my destination. I could not take an +observation, which I very much regretted, as the captain’s +quadrant was in the cabin; but, from the day of setting sail from +the island of the savages, I had kept a dead reckoning, and as I +knew pretty well now how much lee-way the schooner made, I hoped +to hit the Coral Island without much difficulty. In this I +was the more confident that I knew its position on the chart +(which I understood was a very good one), and so had its correct +bearings by compass.</p> + +<p>As the weather seemed now quite settled and fine, and as I had +got into the trade-winds, I set about preparations for hoisting +the top-sails. This was a most arduous task, and my first +attempts were complete failures, owing, in a great degree, to my +reprehensible ignorance of mechanical forces. The first +error I made was in applying my apparatus of blocks and pulleys +to a rope which was too weak, so that the very first heave I made +broke it in two, and sent me staggering against the after-hatch, +over which I tripped, and, striking against the main-boom, +tumbled down the companion ladder into the cabin. I was +much bruised and somewhat stunned by this untoward +accident. However, I considered it fortunate that I was not +killed. In my next attempt I made sure of not coming by a +similar accident, so I unreeved the tackling and fitted up larger +blocks and ropes. But although the principle on which I +acted was quite correct, the machinery was now so massive and +heavy that the mere friction and stiffness of the thick cordage +prevented me from moving it at all. Afterwards, however, I +came to proportion things more correctly; but I could not avoid +reflecting at the time how much better it would have been had I +learned all this from observation and study, instead of waiting +till I was forced to acquire it through the painful and tedious +lessons of experience.</p> + +<p>After the tackling was prepared and in good working order, it +took me the greater part of a day to hoist the main-top +sail. As I could not steer and work at this at the same +time, I lashed the helm in such a position that, with a little +watching now and then, it kept the schooner in her proper +course. By this means I was enabled also to go about the +deck and down below for things that I wanted, as occasion +required; also to cook and eat my victuals. But I did not +dare to trust to this plan during the three hours of rest that I +allowed myself at night, as the wind might have shifted, in which +case I should have been blown far out of my course ere I +awoke. I was, therefore, in the habit of heaving-to during +those three hours; that is, fixing the rudder and the sails in +such a position as that by acting against each other, they would +keep the ship stationary. After my night’s rest, +therefore, I had only to make allowance for the lee-way she had +made, and so resume my course.</p> + +<p>Of course I was to some extent anxious lest another squall +should come, but I made the best provision I could in the +circumstances, and concluded that by letting go the +weather-braces of the top-sails and the top-sail halyards at the +same time, I should thereby render these sails almost +powerless. Besides this, I proposed to myself to keep a +sharp look-out on the barometer in the cabin, and if I observed +at any time a sudden fall in it, I resolved that I would +instantly set about my multiform appliances for reducing sail, so +as to avoid being taken at unawares. Thus I sailed +prosperously for two weeks, with a fair wind, so that I +calculated I must be drawing near to the Coral Island; at the +thought of which my heart bounded with joyful expectation.</p> + +<p>The only book I found on board, after a careful search, was a +volume of Captain Cook’s voyages. This, I suppose, +the pirate captain had brought with him in order to guide him, +and to furnish him with information regarding the islands of +these seas. I found this a most delightful book indeed, and +I not only obtained much interesting knowledge about the sea in +which I was sailing, but I had many of my own opinions, derived +from experience, corroborated; and not a few of them +corrected. Besides the reading of this charming book, and +the daily routine of occupations, nothing of particular note +happened to me during this voyage, except once, when on rising +one night, after my three hours’ nap, while it was yet +dark, I was amazed and a little alarmed to find myself floating +in what appeared to be a sea of blue fire! I had often +noticed the beautiful appearance of phosphorescent light, but +this far exceeded anything of the sort I ever saw before. +The whole sea appeared somewhat like milk and was remarkably +luminous.</p> + +<p>I rose in haste, and, letting down a bucket into the sea, +brought some of the water on board and took it down to the cabin +to examine it; but no sooner did I approach the light than the +strange appearance disappeared, and when I removed the cabin lamp +the luminous light appeared again. I was much puzzled with +this, and took up a little of the water in the hollow of my hand +and then let it run off, when I found that the luminous substance +was left behind on my palm. I ran with it to the lamp; but +when I got there it was gone. I found, however, that when I +went into the dark my hand shone again; so I took the large glass +of the ship’s telescope and examined my hand minutely, when +I found that there were on it one or two small patches of a +clear, transparent substance like jelly, which were so thin as to +be almost invisible to the naked eye. Thus I came to know +that the beautiful phosphoric light, which I had so often admired +before, was caused by animals, for I had no doubt that these were +of the same kind as the medusae or jelly-fish which are seen in +all parts of the world.</p> + +<p>On the evening of my fourteenth day, I was awakened out of a +nap into which I had fallen by a loud cry, and starting up, I +gazed around me. I was surprised and delighted to see a +large albatross soaring majestically over the ship. I +immediately took it into my head that this was the albatross I +had seen at Penguin Island. I had, of course, no good +reason for supposing this, but the idea occurred to me, I know +not why, and I cherished it, and regarded the bird with as much +affection as if he had been an old friend. He kept me +company all that day and left me as night fell.</p> + +<p>Next morning as I stood motionless and with heavy eyes at the +helm, for I had not slept well, I began to weary anxiously for +day-light, and peered towards the horizon, where I thought I +observed something like a black cloud against the dark sky. +Being always on the alert for squalls, I ran to the bow. +There could be no doubt it was a squall, and as I listened I +thought I heard the murmur of the coming gale. Instantly I +began to work might and main at my cumbrous tackle for shortening +sail, and in the course of an hour and a half had the most of it +reduced,—the top-sail yards down on the caps, the top-sails +clewed up, the sheets hauled in, the main and fore peaks lowered, +and the flying-jib down. While thus engaged the dawn +advanced, and I cast an occasional furtive glance ahead in the +midst of my labour. But now that things were prepared for +the worst, I ran forward again and looked anxiously over the +bow. I now heard the roar of the waves distinctly, and as a +single ray of the rising sun gleamed over the ocean I +saw—what! could it be that I was dreaming?—that +magnificent breaker with its ceaseless roar!—that mountain +top!—yes, once more I beheld the Coral Island!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The effect of a cannon-shot—A happy reunion of a +somewhat moist nature—Retrospects and explanations—An +awful dive—New plans—The last of the Coral +Island.</p> + +<p>I almost fell upon the deck with the tumult of mingled +emotions that filled my heart, as I gazed ardently towards my +beautiful island. It was still many miles away, but +sufficiently near to enable me to trace distinctly the +well-remembered outlines of the two mountains. My first +impulse was to utter an exclamation of gratitude for being +carried to my former happy home in safety; my second, to jump up, +clap my hands, shout, and run up and down the deck, with no other +object in view than that of giving vent to my excited +feelings. Then I went below for the telescope, and spent +nearly ten minutes of the utmost impatience in vainly trying to +get a focus, and in rubbing the skin nearly off my eyes, before I +discovered that having taken off the large glass to examine the +phosphoric water with I had omitted to put it on again.</p> + +<p>After that I looked up impatiently at the sails, which I now +regretted having lowered so hastily, and for a moment thought of +hoisting the main-top sail again; but recollecting that it would +take me full half a day to accomplish, and that, at the present +rate of sailing, two hours would bring me to the island, I +immediately dismissed the idea.</p> + +<p>The remainder of the time I spent in making feverish +preparations for arriving and seeing my dear comrades. I +remembered that they were not in the habit of rising before six, +and, as it was now only three, I hoped to arrive before they were +awake. Moreover, I set about making ready to let go the +anchor, resolving in my own mind that, as I knew the depth of +water in the passage of the reef and within the lagoon, I would +run the schooner in and bring up opposite the bower. +Fortunately the anchor was hanging at the cat-head, otherwise I +should never have been able to use it. Now, I had only to +cut the tackling, and it would drop of its own weight. +After searching among the flags, I found the terrible black one, +which I ran up to the peak. While I was doing this, a +thought struck me. I went to the powder magazine, brought +up a blank cartridge and loaded the big brass gun, which, it will +be remembered, was unhoused when we set sail, and, as I had no +means of housing it, there it had stood, bristling alike at fair +weather and foul all the voyage. I took care to grease its +mouth well, and, before leaving the fore part of the ship, thrust +the poker into the fire.</p> + +<p style="text-align: center"> +<a href="images/p352b.jpg"> +<img alt="A terrible surprise" src="images/p352s.jpg" /> +</a></p> + +<p>All was now ready. A steady five-knot breeze was +blowing, so that I was now not more than quarter of a mile from +the reef. I was soon at the entrance, and, as the schooner +glided quietly through, I glanced affectionately at the huge +breaker, as if it had been the same one I had seen there when I +bade adieu, as I feared for ever, to the island. On coming +opposite the Water Garden, I put the helm hard down. The +schooner came round with a rapid, graceful bend, and lost way +just opposite the bower. Running forward, I let go the +anchor, caught up the red-hot poker, applied it to the brass gun, +and the mountains with a <i>bang</i>, such as had only once +before broke their slumbering echoes!</p> + +<p>Effective although it was, however, it was scarcely equal to +the bang with which, instantly after, Peterkin bounded from the +bower, in scanty costume, his eye-balls starting from his head +with surprise and terror. One gaze he gave, one yell, and +then fled into the bushes like a wild cat. The next moment +Jack went through exactly the same performance, the only +difference being, that his movements were less like those of +Jack-in-the-box, though not less vigorous and rapid than those of +Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” I shouted, almost mad with joy, +“what, ho! Peterkin! Jack! hallo! it’s +me!”</p> + +<p>My shout was just in time to arrest them. They halted +and turned round, and, the instant I repeated the cry, I saw that +they recognised my voice, by both of them running at full speed +towards the beach. I could no longer contain myself. +Throwing off my jacket, I jumped overboard at the same moment +that Jack bounded into the sea. In another moment we met in +deep water, clasped each other round the neck, and sank, as a +matter of course, to the bottom! We were well-nigh choked, +and instantly struggled to the surface, where Peterkin was +spluttering about like a wounded duck, laughing and crying by +turns, and choking himself with salt water!</p> + +<p>It would be impossible to convey to my reader, by description, +an adequate conception of the scene that followed my landing on +the beach, as we stood embracing each other indiscriminately in +our dripping garments, and giving utterance to incoherent +rhapsodies, mingled with wild shouts. It can be more easily +imagined than described, so I will draw a curtain over this part +of my history, and carry the reader forward over an interval of +three days.</p> + +<p>During the greater part of that period Peterkin did nothing +but roast pigs, taro, and bread-fruit, and ply me with plantains, +plums, potatoes, and cocoa-nuts, while I related to him and Jack +the terrible and wonderful adventures I had gone through since we +last met. After I had finished the account, they made me go +all over it again; and, when I had concluded the second recital, +I had to go over it again, while they commented upon it +piecemeal. They were much affected by what I told them of +the probable fate of Avatea, and Peterkin could by no means brook +the idea of the poor girl being converted into a <i>long +pig</i>! As for Jack, he clenched his teeth, and shook his +fist towards the sea, saying at the same time, that he was sorry +he had not broken Tararo’s head, and he only hoped that one +day he should be able to plant his knuckles on the bridge of that +chief’s nose! After they had “pumped me +dry,” as Peterkin said, I begged to be informed of what had +happened to them during my long absence, and particularly as to +how they got out of the Diamond Cave.</p> + +<p>“Well, you must know,” began Jack, “after +you had dived out of the cave, on the day you were taken away +from us, we waited very patiently for half an hour, not expecting +you to return before the end of that time. Then we began to +upbraid you for staying so long, when you knew we would be +anxious; but when an hour passed, we became alarmed, and I +resolved at all hazards to dive out, and see what had become of +you, although I felt for poor Peterkin, because, as he truly +said, ‘If you never come back, I’m shut up here for +life.’ However, I promised not to run any risk, and +he let me go; which, to say truth, I thought very courageous of +him!”</p> + +<p>“I should just think it was!” interrupted +Peterkin, looking at Jack over the edge of a monstrous potato +which he happened to be devouring at the time.</p> + +<p>“Well,” continued Jack, “you may guess my +consternation when you did not answer to my halloo. At +first I imagined that the pirates must have killed you, and left +you in the bush, or thrown you into the sea; then it occurred to +me that this would have served no end of theirs, so I came to the +conclusion that they must have carried you away with them. +As this thought struck me, I observed the pirate schooner +standing away to the nor’ard, almost hull-down on the +horizon, and I sat down on the rocks to watch her as she slowly +sank from my sight. And I tell you, Ralph, my boy, that I +shed more tears that time, at losing you, than I have done, I +verify believe, all my life before—”</p> + +<p>“Pardon me, Jack, for interrupting,” said +Peterkin; “surely you must be mistaken in that; +you’ve often told me that, when you were a baby, you used +to howl and roar from morning to—”</p> + +<p>“Hold your tongue, Peterkin,” cried Jack. +“Well, after the schooner had disappeared, I dived back +into the cave, much to Peterkin’s relief, and told him what +I had seen. We sat down and had a long talk over this +matter, and then we agreed to make a regular, systematic search +through the woods, so as to make sure, at least, that you had not +been killed. But now we thought of the difficulty of +getting out of the cave without your help. Peterkin became +dreadfully nervous when he thought of this; and I must confess +that I felt some alarm, for, of course, I could not hope alone to +take him out so quickly as we two together had brought him in; +and he himself vowed that, if we had been a moment longer with +him that time, he would have had to take a breath of salt +water. However, there was no help for it, and I endeavoured +to calm his fears as well as I could: ‘for,’ said I, +‘you can’t live here, Peterkin;’ to which he +replied, ‘Of course not, Jack, I can only die here, and, as +that’s not at all desirable, you had better propose +something.’ So I suggested that he should take a good +long breath, and trust himself to me.</p> + +<p>“‘Might we not make a large bag of cocoa-nut +cloth, into which I could shove my head, and tie it tight round +my neck?’ he asked, with a haggard smile. ‘It +might let me get one breath under water!’</p> + +<p>“‘No use,’ said I; ‘it would fill in a +moment and suffocate you. I see nothing for it, Peterkin, +if you really can’t keep your breath so long, but to let me +knock you down, and carry you out while in a state of +insensibility.’</p> + +<p>“But Peterkin didn’t relish this idea. He +seemed to fear that I could not be able to measure the exact +force of the blow, and might, on the one hand, hit him so softly +as to render a second or third blow necessary, which would be +very uncomfortable; or, on the other hand, give him such a smash +as would entirely spoil his figure-head, or, mayhap, knock the +life out of him altogether! At last I got him persuaded to +try to hold his breath, and commit himself to me; so he agreed, +and down we went. But I had not got him half way through, +when he began to struggle and kick like a wild bull, burst from +my grasp, and hit against the roof of the tunnel. I was +therefore, obliged to force him violently back into the cave +gain, where he rose panting to the surface. In short, he +had lost his presence of mind, and—”</p> + +<p>“Nothing of the sort,” cried Peterkin, +indignantly, “I had only lost my wind; and if I had not had +presence of mind enough to kick as I did, I should have +bu’st in your arms!”</p> + +<p>“Well, well, so be it,” resumed Jack, with a +smile, “but the upshot of it was, that we had to hold +another consultation on the point, and I really believe that, had +it not been for a happy thought of mine, we should have been +consulting there yet.”</p> + +<p>“I wish we had,” again interrupted Peterkin with a +sigh. “I’m sure, Ralph, if I had thought that +you were coming back again, I would willingly have awaited your +return for months, rather than have endured the mental agony +which I went through! But proceed.”</p> + +<p>“The thought was this,” continued Jack, +“that I should tie Peterkin’s hands and feet with +cords, and then lash him firmly to a stout pole about five feet +long, in order to render him quite powerless, and keep him +straight and stiff. You should have seen his face of +horror, Ralph, when I suggested this: but he came to see that it +was his only chance, and told me to set about it as fast as I +could; ‘for,’ said he, ‘this is no +jokin’, Jack, <i>I</i> can tell you, and the sooner +it’s done the better.’ I soon procured the +cordage and a suitable pole, with which I returned to the cave, +and lashed him as stiff and straight as an Egyptian mummy; and, +to say truth, he was no bad representation of what an English +mummy would be, if there were such things, for he was as white as +a dead man.”</p> + +<p>“‘Now,’ said Peterkin, in a tremulous voice, +‘swim with me as near to the edge of the hole as you can +before you dive, then let me take a long breath, and, as I +sha’nt be able to speak after I’ve taken it, +you’ll watch my face, and the moment you see me +wink—dive! And oh!’ he added, earnestly, +‘pray don’t be long!’</p> + +<p>“I promised to pay the strictest attention to his +wishes, and swam with him to the outlet of the cave. Here I +paused. ‘Now then,’ said I, ‘pull away at +the wind, lad.’”</p> + +<p>Peterkin drew in a breath so long that I could not help +thinking of the frog in the fable, that wanted to swell itself as +big as the ox. Then I looked into his face earnestly. +Slap went the lid of his right eye; down went my head, and up +went my heels. We shot through the passage like an arrow, +and rose to the surface of the open sea before you could count +twenty!</p> + +<p>“Peterkin had taken in such an awful load of wind that, +on reaching the free air, he let it out with a yell loud enough +to have been heard a mile off, and then, the change in his +feelings was so sudden and great, that he did not wait till we +landed, but began, tied up as he was, to shout and sing for joy +as I supported him with my left arm to the shore. However, +in the middle of a laugh that a hyaena might have envied, I let +him accidentally slip, which extinguished him in a moment.</p> + +<p>“After this happy deliverance, we immediately began our +search for your dead body, Ralph, and you have no idea how low +our hearts sank as we set off, day after day, to examine the +valleys and mountain sides with the utmost care. In about +three weeks we completed the survey of the whole island, and had +at least the satisfaction of knowing that you had not been +killed. But it occurred to us that you might have been +thrown into the sea, so we examined the sands and the lagoon +carefully, and afterwards went all round the outer reef. +One day, while we were upon the reef, Peterkin espied a small +dark object lying among the rocks, which seemed to be quite +different from the surrounding stones. We hastened towards +the spot, and found it to be a small keg. On knocking out +the head we discovered that it was gunpowder.”</p> + +<p>“It was I who sent you that, Jack,” said I, with a +smile.</p> + +<p>“Fork out!” cried Peterkin, energetically, +starting to his feet and extending his open hand to Jack. +“Down with the money, sir, else I’ll have you shut up +for life in a debtor’s prison the moment we return to +England!”</p> + +<p>“I’ll give you an I.O.U. in the meantime,” +returned Jack, laughing, “so sit down and be quiet. +The fact is, Ralph, when we discovered this keg of powder, +Peterkin immediately took me a bet of a thousand pounds that you +had something to do with it, and I took him a bet of ten thousand +that you had not.</p> + +<p>“Peterkin was right then,” said I, explaining how +the thing had occurred.</p> + +<p>“Well, we found it very useful,” continued Jack; +“although some of it had got a little damp; and we +furbished up the old pistol, with which Peterkin is a crack shot +now. But, to continue. We did not find any other +vestige of you on the reef, and, finally, gave up all hope of +ever seeing you again. After this the island became a +dreary place to us, and we began to long for a ship to heave in +sight and take us off. But now that you’re back +again, my dear fellow, it looks as bright and cheerful as it used +to do, and I love it as much as ever.”</p> + +<p>“And now,” continued Jack, “I have a great +desire to visit some of the other islands of the South +Seas. Here we have a first-rate schooner at our disposal, +so I don’t see what should hinder us.”</p> + +<p>“Just the very thing I was going to propose,” +cried Peterkin; “I vote for starting at once.”</p> + +<p>“Well, then,” said Jack, “it seems to me +that we could not do better than shape our course for the island +on which Avatea lives, and endeavour to persuade Tararo to let +her marry the black fellow to whom she is engaged, instead of +making a long pig of her. If he has a spark of gratitude in +him he’ll do it. Besides, having become champions for +this girl once before, it behoves us, as true knights, not to +rest until we set her free; at least, all the heroes in all the +story-books I have ever read would count it foul disgrace to +leave such a work unfinished.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I don’t know, or care, what your +knights in story-books would do,” said Peterkin, “but +I’m certain that it would be capital fun, so I’m your +man whenever you want me.”</p> + +<p>This plan of Jack’s was quite in accordance with his +romantic, impulsive nature; and, having made up his mind to save +this black girl, he could not rest until the thing was +commenced.</p> + +<p>“But there may be great danger in this attempt,” +he said, at the end of a long consultation on the subject; +“will you, lads, go with me in spite of this?”</p> + +<p>“Go with you?” we repeated in the same breath.</p> + +<p>“Can you doubt it?” said I.</p> + +<p>“For a moment,” added Peterkin.</p> + +<p>I need scarcely say that, having made up our minds to go on +this enterprise, we lost no time in making preparations to quit +the island; and as the schooner was well laden with stores of +every kind for a long cruise, we had little to do except to add +to our abundant supply a quantity of cocoa-nuts, bread-fruit, +taro, yams, plums, and potatoes, chiefly with the view of +carrying the fragrance of our dear island along with us as long +as we could.</p> + +<p>When all was ready, we paid a farewell visit to the different +familiar spots where most of our time had been spent. We +ascended the mountain top, and gazed for the last time at the +rich green foliage in the valleys, the white sandy beach, the +placid lagoon, and the barrier coral-reef with its crested +breakers. Then we descended to Spouting Cliff, and looked +down at the pale-green monster which we had made such fruitless +efforts to spear in days gone by. From this we hurried to +the Water Garden and took a last dive into its clear waters, and +a last gambol amongst its coral groves. I hurried out +before my companions, and dressed in haste, in order to have a +long examination of my tank, which Peterkin, in the fulness of +his heart, had tended with the utmost care, as being a vivid +remembrancer of me, rather than out of love for natural +history. It was in superb condition;—the water as +clear and pellucid as crystal; the red and green sea-weed of the +most brilliant hues; the red, purple, yellow, green, and striped +anemones fully expanded, and stretching out their arms as if to +welcome and embrace their former master; the starfish, zoophytes, +sea-pens, and other innumerable marine insects, looking fresh and +beautiful; and the crabs, as Peterkin said, looking as wide +awake, impertinent, rampant, and pugnacious as ever. It was +indeed so lovely and so interesting that I would scarcely allow +myself to be torn away from it.</p> + +<p>Last of all, we returned to the bower and collected the few +articles we possessed, such as the axe, the pencil-case, the +broken telescope, the pen-knife, the hook made from the brass +ring, and the sail-needle, with which we had landed on the +island;—also, the long boots and the pistol, besides +several curious articles of costume which we had manufactured +from time to time.</p> + +<p>These we conveyed on board in our little boat, after having +carved our names on a chip of iron-wood, thus:—</p> + +<p class="letter"> +JACK MARTIN,<br /> +RALPH ROVER,<br /> +PETERKIN GAY, +</p> + +<p class="noindent"> +which we fixed up inside of the bower. The boat was then +hoisted on board and the anchor weighed; which latter operation +cost us great labour and much time, as the anchor was so heavy +that we could not move it without the aid of my complex machinery +of blocks and pulleys. A steady breeze was blowing off +shore when we set sail, at a little before sunset. It swept +us quickly past the reef and out to sea. The shore grew +rapidly more indistinct as the shades of evening fell, while our +clipper bark bounded lightly over the waves. Slowly the +mountain top sank on the horizon, until it became a mere +speck. In another moment the sun and the Coral Island sank +together into the broad bosom of the Pacific.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXX.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The voyage—The island, and a consultation in which +danger is scouted as a thing unworthy of consideration—Rats +and cats—The native teacher—Awful +revelations—Wonderful effects of Christianity.</p> + +<p>Our voyage during the next two weeks was most interesting and +prosperous. The breeze continued generally fair, and at all +times enabled us to lie our course; for being, as I have said +before, clipper-built, the pirate schooner could lie very close +to the wind, and made little lee-way. We had no difficulty +now in managing our sails, for Jack was heavy and powerful, while +Peterkin was active as a kitten. Still, however, we were a +very insufficient crew for such a vessel, and if any one had +proposed to us to make such a voyage in it before we had been +forced to go through so many hardships from necessity, we would +have turned away with pity from the individual making such +proposal as from a madman. I pondered this a good deal, and +at last concluded that men do not know how much they are capable +of doing till they try, and that we should never give way to +despair in any undertaking, however difficult it may +seem:—always supposing, however, that our cause is a good +one, and that we can ask the divine blessing on it.</p> + +<p>Although, therefore, we could now manage our sails easily, we +nevertheless found that my pulleys were of much service to us in +some things; though Jack did laugh heartily at the uncouth +arrangement of ropes and blocks, which had, to a sailor’s +eye, a very lumbering and clumsy appearance. But I will not +drag my reader through the details of this voyage. Suffice +it to say, that, after an agreeable sail of about three weeks, we +arrived off the island of Mango, which I recognised at once from +the description that the pirate, Bill, had given me of it during +one of our conversations.</p> + +<p>As soon as we came within sight of it we hove the ship to, and +held a council of war.</p> + +<p>“Now, boys,” said Jack, as we seated ourselves +beside him on the cabin sky-light, “before we go farther in +this business, we must go over the pros and cons of it; for, +although you have so generously consented to stick by me through +thick and thin, it would be unfair did I not see that you +thoroughly understand the danger of what we are about to +attempt.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! bother the danger,” cried Peterkin; “I +wonder to hear <i>you</i>, Jack, talk of danger. When a +fellow begins to talk about it, he’ll soon come to magnify +it to such a degree that he’ll not be fit to face it when +it comes, no more than a suckin’ baby!”</p> + +<p>“Nay, Peterkin,” replied Jack, gravely, “I +won’t be jested out of it. I grant you, that, when +we’ve once resolved to act, and have made up our minds what +to do, we should think no more of danger. But, before we +have so resolved, it behoves us to look at it straight in the +face, and examine into it, and walk round it; for if we flinch at +a distant view, we’re sure to run away when the danger is +near. Now, I understand from you, Ralph, that the island is +inhabited by thorough-going, out-and-out cannibals, whose +principal law is—‘Might is right, and the weakest +goes to the wall?’”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” said I, “so Bill gave me to +understand. He told me, however, that, at the southern side +of it, the missionaries had obtained a footing amongst an +insignificant tribe. A native teacher had been sent there +by the Wesleyans, who had succeeded in persuading the chief at +that part to embrace Christianity. But instead of that +being of any advantage to our enterprise, it seems the very +reverse; for the chief Tararo is a determined heathen, and +persecutes the Christians,—who are far too weak in numbers +to offer any resistance,—and looks with dislike upon all +white men, whom he regards as propagators of the new +faith.”</p> + +<p>“’Tis a pity,” said Jack, “that the +Christian tribe is so small, for we shall scarcely be safe under +their protection, I fear. If Tararo takes it into his head +to wish for our vessel, or to kill ourselves, he could take us +from them by force. You say that the native missionary +talks English?”</p> + +<p>“So I believe.”</p> + +<p>“Then, what I propose is this,” said Jack: +“We will run round to the south side of the island, and cut +anchor off the Christian village. We are too far away just +now to have been descried by any of the savages, so we shall get +there unobserved, and have time to arrange our plans before the +heathen tribes know of our presence. But, in doing this, we +run the risk of being captured by the ill-disposed tribes, and +being very ill used, if not—a—”</p> + +<p>“Roasted alive and eaten,” cried Peterkin. +“Come, out with it, Jack; according to your own showing, +it’s well to look the danger straight in the +face!”</p> + +<p>“Well, that is the worst of it, certainly. Are you +prepared, then, to take your chance of that?”</p> + +<p>“I’ve been prepared and had my mind made up long +ago,” cried Peterkin, swaggering about the deck with his +hands thrust into his breeches’ pockets. “The +fact is, Jack, I don’t believe that Tararo will be so +ungrateful as to eat us; and I’m quite sure that +he’ll be too happy to grant us whatever we ask: so the +sooner we go in and win the better.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin was wrong, however, in his estimate of savage +gratitude, as the sequel will show.</p> + +<p>The schooner was now put before the wind, and, after making a +long run to the south’ard, we put about and beat up for the +south side of Mango, where we arrived before sunset, and hove-to +off the coral reef. Here we awaited the arrival of a canoe, +which immediately put off on our rounding to. When it +arrived, a mild-looking native, of apparently forty years of age, +came on board, and, taking off his straw hat, made us a low +bow. He was clad in a respectable suit of European clothes; +and the first words he uttered, as he stepped up to Jack and +shook hands with him, were,—</p> + +<p>“Good day, gentlemen; we are happy to see you at +Mango—you are heartily welcome.”</p> + +<p>After returning his salutation, Jack exclaimed, “You +must be the native missionary teacher of whom I have +heard—are you not?”</p> + +<p>“I am. I have the joy to be a servant of the Lord +Jesus at this station.”</p> + +<p>“You’re the very man I want to see, then,” +replied Jack; “that’s lucky. Come down to the +cabin, friend, and have a glass of wine. I wish +particularly to speak with you. My men there” +(pointing to Peterkin and me) “will look after your +people.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you,” said the teacher, as he followed Jack +to the cabin, “I do not drink wine or any strong +drink.”</p> + +<p>“Oh! then, there’s lots of water, and you can have +biscuit.”</p> + +<p>“Now, ’pon my word, that’s cool!” said +Peterkin; “his <i>men</i>, forsooth! Well, since we +are to be men, we may as well come it as strong over these black +chaps as we can. Hallo, there!” he cried to the half +dozen of natives who stood upon the deck, gazing in wonder at all +they saw, “here’s for you;” and he handed them +a tray of broken biscuit and a can of water. Then, +thrusting his hands into his pockets, he walked up and down the +deck with an enormous swagger, whistling vociferously.</p> + +<p>In about half an hour Jack and the teacher came on deck, and +the latter, bidding us a cheerful good evening, entered his canoe +and paddled to the shore. When he was gone, Peterkin +stepped up to Jack, and, touching his cap, said,—</p> + +<p>“Well, captain, have you any communications to make to +your <i>men</i>?”</p> + +<p>“Yes,” cried Jack; “ready about, mind the +helm and clew up your tongue, while I con the schooner through +the passage in the reef. The teacher, who seems a +first-rate fellow, says it’s quite deep, and good anchorage +within the lagoon close to the shore.”</p> + +<p>While the vessel was slowly advancing to her anchorage, under +a light breeze, Jack explained to us that Avatea was still on the +island, living amongst the heathens; that she had expressed a +strong desire to join the Christians, but Tararo would not let +her, and kept her constantly in close confinement.</p> + +<p>“Moreover,” continued Jack, “I find that she +belongs to one of the Samoan Islands, where Christianity had been +introduced long before her capture by the heathens of a +neighbouring island; and the very day after she was taken, she +was to have joined the church which had been planted there by +that excellent body, the London Missionary Society. The +teacher tells me, too, that the poor girl has fallen in love with +a Christian chief, who lives on an island some fifty miles or so +to the south of this one, and that she is meditating a desperate +attempt at escape. So, you see, we have come in the nick of +time. I fancy that this chief is the fellow whom you heard +of, Ralph, at the Island of Emo. Besides all this, the +heathen savages are at war among themselves, and there’s to +be a battle fought the day after to-morrow, in which the +principal leader is Tararo; so that we’ll not be able to +commence our negotiations with the rascally chief till the day +after.”</p> + +<p>The village off which we anchored was beautifully situated at +the head of a small bay, from the margin of which trees of every +description peculiar to the tropics rose in the richest +luxuriance to the summit of a hilly ridge, which was the line of +demarcation between the possessions of the Christians and those +of the neighbouring heathen chief.</p> + +<p>The site of the settlement was an extensive plot of flat land, +stretching in a gentle slope from the sea to the mountain. +The cottages stood several hundred yards from the beach, and were +protected from the glare of the sea by the rich foliage of rows +of large Barringtonia and other trees, which girt the +shore. The village was about a mile in length, and +perfectly straight, with a wide road down the middle, on either +side of which were rows of the tufted-topped ti tree, whose +delicate and beautiful blossoms, hanging beneath their +plume-crested tops, added richness to the scene. The +cottages of the natives were built beneath these trees, and were +kept in the most excellent order, each having a little garden in +front, tastefully laid out and planted, while the walks were +covered with black and white pebbles.</p> + +<p>Every house had doors and Venetian windows, painted partly +with lamp black made from the candle-nut, and partly with red +ochre, which contrasted powerfully with the dazzling coral lime +that covered the walls. On a prominent position stood a +handsome church, which was quite a curiosity in its way. It +was a hundred feet long by fifty broad, and was seated throughout +to accommodate upwards of two thousand persons. It had six +large folding doors and twelve windows with Venetian blinds; and, +although a large and substantial edifice, it had been built, we +were told by the teacher, in the space of two months! There +was not a single iron nail in the fabric, and the natives had +constructed it chiefly with their stone and bone axes and other +tools, having only one or two axes or tools of European +manufacture. Everything around this beautiful spot wore an +aspect of peace and plenty, and, as we dropped our anchor within +a stone’s cast of the substantial coral wharf, I could not +avoid contrasting it with the wretched village of Emo, where I +had witnessed so many frightful scenes. When the teacher +afterwards told me that the people of this tribe had become +converts only a year previous to our arrival, and that they had +been living before that in the practice of the most bloody system +of idolatry, I could not refrain from exclaiming, “What a +convincing proof that Christianity is of God!”</p> + +<p>On landing from our little boat, we were received with a warm +welcome by the teacher and his wife; the latter being also a +native, clothed in a simple European gown and straw bonnet. +The shore was lined with hundreds of natives, whose persons were +all more or less clothed with native cloth. Some of the men +had on a kind of poncho formed of this cloth, their legs being +uncovered. Others wore clumsily-fashioned trousers, and no +upper garment except hats made of straw and cloth. Many of +the dresses, both of women and men, were grotesque enough, being +very bad imitations of the European garb; but all wore a dress of +some sort or other. They seemed very glad to see us, and +crowded round us as the teacher led the way to his dwelling, +where we were entertained, in the most sumptuous manner, on baked +pig and all the varieties of fruits and vegetables that the +island produced. We were much annoyed, however, by the +rats: they seemed to run about the house like domestic +animals. As we sat at table, one of them peeped up at us +over the edge of the cloth, close to Peterkin’s elbow, who +floored it with a blow on the snout from his knife, exclaiming as +he did so—</p> + +<p>“I say, Mister Teacher, why don’t you set traps +for these brutes?—surely you are not fond of +them!”</p> + +<p>“No,” replied the teacher, with a smile; “we +would be glad to get rid of them if we could; but if we were to +trap all the rats on the island, it would occupy our whole +time.”</p> + +<p>“Are they, then, so numerous?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“They swarm everywhere. The poor heathens on the +north side eat them, and think them very sweet. So did my +people formerly; but they do not eat so many now, because the +missionary who was last here expressed disgust at it. The +poor people asked if it was wrong to eat rats; and he told them +that it was certainly not wrong, but that the people of England +would be much disgusted were they asked to eat rats.”</p> + +<p>We had not been an hour in the house of this kind-hearted man +when we were convinced of the truth of his statement as to their +numbers, for the rats ran about the floors in dozens, and, during +our meal, two men were stationed at the table to keep them +off!</p> + +<p>“What a pity you have no cats,” said Peterkin, as +he aimed a blow at another reckless intruder, and missed it.</p> + +<p>“We would, indeed, be glad to have a few,” +rejoined the teacher, “but they are difficult to be +got. The hogs, we find, are very good rat-killers, but they +do not seem to be able to keep the numbers down. I have +heard that they are better than cats.”</p> + +<p>As the teacher said this, his good-natured black face was +wrinkled with a smile of merriment. Observing that I had +noticed it, he said:—</p> + +<p>“I smiled just now when I remembered the fate of the +first cat that was taken to Raratonga. This is one of the +stations of the London Missionary Society. It, like our +own, is infested with rats, and a cat was brought at last to the +island. It was a large black one. On being turned +loose, instead of being content to stay among men, the cat took +to the mountains, and lived in a wild state, sometimes paying +visits during the night to the houses of the natives; some of +whom, living at a distance from the settlement, had not heard of +the cat’s arrival, and were dreadfully frightened in +consequence, calling it a ‘monster of the deep,’ and +flying in terror away from it. One night the cat, feeling a +desire for company, I suppose, took its way to the house of a +chief, who had recently been converted to Christianity, and had +begun to learn to read and pray. The chief’s wife, +who was sitting awake at his side while he slept, beheld with +horror two fires glistening in the doorway, and heard with +surprise a mysterious voice. Almost petrified with fear, +she awoke her husband, and began to upbraid him for forsaking his +old religion, and burning his god, who, she declared, was now +come to be avenged of them. ‘Get up and pray! get up +and pray!’ she cried. The chief arose, and, on +opening his eyes, beheld the same glaring lights, and heard the +same ominous sound. Impelled by the extreme urgency of the +case, he commenced, with all possible vehemence, to vociferate +the alphabet, as a prayer to God to deliver them from the +vengeance of Satan! On hearing this, the cat, as much +alarmed as themselves, fled precipitately away, leaving the chief +and his wife congratulating themselves on the efficacy of their +prayer.”</p> + +<p>We were much diverted with this anecdote, which the teacher +related in English so good, that we certainly could not have +supposed him a native but for the colour of his face and the +foreign accent in his tone. Next day we walked out with +this interesting man, and were much entertained and instructed by +his conversation, as we rambled through the cool shady groves of +bananas, citrons, limes, and other trees, or sauntered among the +cottages of the natives, and watched them while they laboured +diligently in the taro beds, or manufactured the tapa or native +cloth. To some of these Jack put questions through the +medium of the missionary; and the replies were such as to +surprise us at the extent of their knowledge. Indeed, +Peterkin very truly remarked that “they seemed to know a +considerable deal more than Jack himself!”</p> + +<p>Among other pieces of interesting information that we obtained +was the following, in regard to coral formations:—</p> + +<p>“The islands of the Pacific,” said our friend, +“are of three different kinds or classes. Those of +the first class are volcanic, mountainous, and wild; some +shooting their jagged peaks into the clouds at an elevation of +ten and fifteen thousand feet. Those of the second class +are of crystalized limestone, and vary in height from one hundred +to five hundred feet. The hills on these are not so wild or +broken as those of the first class, but are richly clothed with +vegetation, and very beautiful. I have no doubt that the +Coral Island on which you were wrecked was one of this +class. They are supposed to have been upheaved from the +bottom of the sea by volcanic agency, but they are not themselves +volcanic in their nature, neither are they of coral +formation. Those of the third class are the low coralline +islands usually having lagoons of water in their midst; they are +very numerous.</p> + +<p>“As to the manner in which coral islands and reefs are +formed; there are various opinions on this point. I will +give you what seems to me the most probable theory,—a +theory, I may add, which is held by some of the good and +scientific missionaries. It is well known that there is +much lime in salt water; it is also known that coral is composed +of lime. It is supposed that the polypes, or coral insects, +have the power of attracting this lime to their bodies; and with +this material they build their little cells or habitations. +They choose the summit of a volcano, or the top of a submarine +mountain, as a foundation on which to build; for it is found that +they never work at any great depth below the surface. On +this they work; the polypes on the mountain top, of course, reach +the surface first, then those at the outer edges reach the top +sooner than the others between them and the centre, thus forming +the coral reef surrounding the lagoon of water and the central +island; after that the insects within the lagoon cease +working. When the surface of the water is reached, these +myriads of wonderful creatures die. Then birds visit the +spot, and seeds are thus conveyed thither, which take root, and +spring up, and flourish. Thus are commenced those coralline +islets of which you have seen so many in these seas. The +reefs round the large islands are formed in a similar +manner. When we consider,” added the missionary, +“the smallness of the architects used by our heavenly +Father in order to form those lovely and innumerable islands, we +are filled with much of that feeling which induced the ancient +king to exclaim, ‘How manifold, O God, are thy works! in +wisdom thou hast made them all.’”</p> + +<p>We all heartily agreed with the missionary in this sentiment, +and felt not a little gratified to find that the opinions which +Jack and I had been led to form from personal observation on our +Coral Island were thus to a great extent corroborated.</p> + +<p>The missionary also gave us an account of the manner in which +Christianity had been introduced among them. He said: +“When missionaries were first sent here, three years ago, a +small vessel brought them; and the chief, who is now dead, +promised to treat well the two native teachers who were left with +their wives on the island. But scarcely had the boat which +landed them returned to the ship, than the natives began to +maltreat their guests, taking away all they possessed, and +offering them further violence, so that, when the boat was sent +in haste to fetch them away, the clothes of both men and women +were torn nearly off their backs.</p> + +<p>“Two years after this the vessel visited them again, and +I, being in her, volunteered to land alone, without any goods +whatever; begging that my wife might be brought to me the +following year,—that is, <i>this</i> year; and, as you see, +she is with me. But the surf was so high that the boat +could not land me; so with nothing on but my trousers and shirt, +and with a few catechisms and a Bible, besides some portions of +the Scripture translated into the Mango tongue, I sprang into the +sea, and swam ashore on the crest of a breaker. I was +instantly dragged up the beach by the natives; who, on finding I +had nothing worth having upon me, let me alone. I then made +signs to my friends in the ship to leave me; which they +did. At first the natives listened to me in silence, but +laughed at what I said while I preached the gospel of our blessed +Saviour Jesus Christ to them. Afterwards they treated me +ill sometimes; but I persevered, and continued to dwell among +them, and dispute, and exhort them to give up their sinful ways +of life, burn their idols, and come to Jesus.</p> + +<p>“About a month after I landed, I heard that the chief +was dead. He was the father of the present chief, who is +now a most consistent member of the church. It is a custom +here that, when a chief dies, his wives are strangled and buried +with him. Knowing this, I hastened to his house to +endeavour to prevent such cruelty if possible. When I +arrived, I found two of the wives had already been killed, while +another was in the act of being strangled. I pleaded hard +for her, but it was too late; she was already dead. I then +entreated the son to spare the fourth wife; and, after much +hesitation, my prayer was granted: but, in half an hour +afterwards, this poor woman repented of being unfaithful, as she +termed it, to her husband, and insisted on being strangled; which +was accordingly done.</p> + +<p>“All this time the chief’s son was walking up and +down before his father’s house with a brow black as +thunder. When he entered, I went in with him, and found, to +my surprise, that his father was not dead! The old man was +sitting on a mat in a corner, with an expression of placid +resignation on his face.</p> + +<p>“‘Why,’ said I, ‘have you strangled +your father’s wives before he is dead?’</p> + +<p>“To this the son replied, ‘He is dead. That +is no longer my father. He is as good as dead now. He +is to be <i>buried alive</i>.’</p> + +<p>“I now remembered having heard that it is a custom among +the Feejee islanders, that when the reigning chief grows old or +infirm, the heir to the chieftainship has a right to depose his +father; in which case he is considered as dead, and is buried +alive. The young chief was now about to follow this custom, +and, despite my earnest entreaties and pleadings, the old chief +was buried that day before my eyes in the same grave with his +four strangled wives! Oh! my heart groaned when I saw this, +and I prayed to God to open the hearts of these poor creatures, +as he had already opened mine, and pour into them the light and +the love of the gospel of Jesus. My prayer was answered +very soon. A week afterwards, the son, who was now chief of +the tribe, came to me, bearing his god on his shoulders, and +groaning beneath its weight. Flinging it down at my feet, +he desired me to burn it!</p> + +<p>“You may conceive how overjoyed I was at this. I +sprang up and embraced him, while I shed tears of joy. Then +we made a fire, and burned the god to ashes, amid an immense +concourse of the people, who seemed terrified at what was being +done, and shrank back when we burned the god, expecting some +signal vengeance to be taken upon us; but seeing that nothing +happened, they changed their minds, and thought that our God must +be the true one after all. From that time the mission +prospered steadily, and now, while there is not a single man in +the tribe who has not burned his household gods, and become a +convert to Christianity, there are not a few, I hope, who are +true followers of the Lamb, having been plucked as brands from +the burning by Him who can save unto the uttermost. I will +not tell you more of our progress at this time, but you +see,” he said, waving his hand around him, “the +village and the church did not exist a year ago!”</p> + +<p>We were indeed much interested in this account, and I could +not help again in my heart praying God to prosper those +missionary societies that send such inestimable blessings to +these islands of dark and bloody idolatry. The teacher also +added that the other tribes were very indignant at this one for +having burned its gods, and threatened to destroy it altogether, +but they had done nothing yet; “and if they should,” +said the teacher, “the Lord is on our side; of whom shall +we be afraid?”</p> + +<p>“Have the missionaries many stations in these +seas?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“Oh, yes. The London Missionary Society have a +great many in the Tahiti group, and other islands in that +quarter. Then the Wesleyans have the Feejee Islands all to +themselves, and the Americans have many stations in other +groups. But still, my friend, there are hundreds of islands +here the natives of which have never heard of Jesus, or the good +word of God, or the Holy Spirit; and thousands are living and +dying in the practice of those terrible sins and bloody murders +of which you have already heard. I trust, my +friends,” he added, looking earnestly into our faces, +“I trust that if you ever return to England, you will tell +your Christian friends that the horrors which they hear of in +regard to these islands are <i>literally true</i>, and that when +they have heard the worst, the ‘<i>half has not been told +them</i>;’ for there are perpetrated here foul deeds of +darkness of which man may not speak. You may also tell +them,” he said, looking around with a smile, while a tear +of gratitude trembled in his eye and rolled down his coal-black +cheek,—“tell them of the blessings that the gospel +has wrought <i>here</i>!”</p> + +<p>We assured our friend that we would certainly not forget his +request. On returning towards the village, about noon, we +remarked on the beautiful whiteness of the cottages.</p> + +<p>“That is owing to the lime with which they are +plastered,” said the teacher. “When the natives +were converted, as I have described, I set them to work to build +cottages for themselves, and also this handsome church which you +see. When the framework and other parts of the houses were +up, I sent the people to fetch coral from the sea. They +brought immense quantities. Then I made them cut wood, and, +piling the coral above it, set it on fire.</p> + +<p>“‘Look! look!’ cried the poor people, in +amazement; ‘what wonderful people the Christians are! +He is roasting stones. We shall not need taro or +bread-fruit any more; we may eat stones!’</p> + +<p>“But their surprise was still greater when the coral was +reduced to a fine soft white powder. They immediately set +up a great shout, and, mingling the lime with water, rubbed their +faces and their bodies all over with it, and ran through the +village screaming with delight. They were also much +surprised at another thing they saw me do. I wished to make +some household furniture, and constructed a turning-lathe to +assist me. The first thing that I turned was the leg of a +sofa; which was no sooner finished than the chief seized it with +wonder and delight, and ran through the village exhibiting it to +the people, who looked upon it with great admiration. The +chief then, tying a string to it, hung it round his neck as an +ornament! He afterwards told me that if he had seen it +before he became a Christian he would have made it his +god!”</p> + +<p>As the teacher concluded this anecdote we reached his +door. Saying that he had business to attend to, he left us +to amuse ourselves as we best could.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, turning abruptly towards +us, and buttoning up his jacket as he spoke, “I’m off +to see the battle. I’ve no particular fondness for +seein’ blood-shed, but I must find out the nature o’ +these fellows and see their customs with my own eyes, so that I +may be able to speak of it again, if need be, +authoritatively. It’s only six miles off, and we +don’t run much more risk than that of getting a rap with a +stray stone or an over-shot arrow. Will you go?”</p> + +<p>“To be sure we will,” said Peterkin.</p> + +<p>“If they chance to see us we’ll cut and run for +it,” added Jack.</p> + +<p>“Dear me!” cried Peterkin,—“<i>you</i> +run! thought you would scorn to run from any one.”</p> + +<p>“So I would, if it were my duty to fight,” +returned Jack, coolly; “but as I don’t want to fight, +and don’t intend to fight, if they offer to attack us +I’ll run away like the veriest coward that ever went by the +name of Peterkin. So come along.”</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +A strange and bloody battle—The lion bearded in his +den—Frightful scenes of cruelty, and fears for the +future.</p> + +<p>We had ascertained from the teacher the direction to the spot +on which the battle was to be fought, and after a walk of two +hours reached it. The summit of a bare hill was the place +chosen; for, unlike most of the other islanders, who are addicted +to bush-fighting, those of Mango are in the habit of meeting on +open ground. We arrived before the two parties had +commenced the deadly struggle, and, creeping as close up as we +dared among the rocks, we lay and watched them.</p> + +<p>The combatants were drawn up face to face, each side ranged in +rank four deep. Those in the first row were armed with long +spears; the second, with clubs to defend the spearmen; the third +row was composed of young men with slings; and the fourth +consisted of women, who carried baskets of stones for the +slingers, and clubs and spears with which to supply the +warriors. Soon after we arrived, the attack was made with +great fury. There was no science displayed. The two +bodies of savages rushed headlong upon each other and engaged in +a general <i>melee</i>, and a more dreadful set of men I have +never seen. They wore grotesque war-caps made of various +substances and decorated with feathers. Their faces and +bodies were painted so as to make them look as frightful as +possible; and as they brandished their massive clubs, leaped, +shouted, yelled, and dashed each other to the ground, I thought I +had never seen men look so like demons before.</p> + +<p>We were much surprised at the conduct of the women, who seemed +to be perfect furies, and hung about the heels of their husbands +in order to defend them. One stout young women we saw, +whose husband was hard pressed and about to be overcome: she +lifted a large stone, and throwing it at his opponent’s +head, felled him to the earth. But the battle did not last +long. The band most distant from us gave way and were +routed, leaving eighteen of their comrades dead upon the +field. These the victors brained as they lay; and putting +some of their brains on leaves went off with them, we were +afterwards informed, to their temples, to present them to their +gods as an earnest of the human victims who were soon to be +brought there.</p> + +<p>We hastened back to the Christian village with feelings of the +deepest sadness at the sanguinary conflict which we had just +witnessed.</p> + +<p>Next day, after breakfasting with our friend the teacher, we +made preparations for carrying out our plan. At first the +teacher endeavoured to dissuade us.</p> + +<p>“You do not know,” said he, turning to Jack, +“the danger you run in venturing amongst these ferocious +savages. I feel much pity for poor Avatea; but you are not +likely to succeed in saving her, and you may die in the +attempt.”</p> + +<p>“Well,” said Jack, quietly, “I am not afraid +to die in a good cause.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled approvingly at him as he said this, and +after a little further conversation agreed to accompany us as +interpreter; saying that, although Tararo was unfriendly to him, +he had hitherto treated him with respect.</p> + +<p>We now went on board the schooner, having resolved to sail +round the island and drop anchor opposite the heathen +village. We manned her with natives, and hoped to overawe +the savages by displaying our brass gun to advantage. The +teacher soon after came on board, and setting our sails we put to +sea. In two hours more we made the cliffs reverberate with +the crash of the big gun, which we fired by way of salute, while +we ran the British ensign up to the peak and cast anchor. +The commotion on shore showed us that we had struck terror into +the hearts of the natives; but seeing that we did not offer to +molest them, a canoe at length put off and paddled cautiously +towards us. The teacher showed himself, and explaining that +we were friends and wished to palaver with the chief, desired the +native to go and tell him to come on board.</p> + +<p>We waited long and with much impatience for an answer. +During this time the native teacher conversed with us again, and +told us many things concerning the success of the gospel among +those islands; and perceiving that we were by no means so much +gratified as we ought to have been at the hearing of such good +news, he pressed us more closely in regard to our personal +interest in religion, and exhorted us to consider that our souls +were certainly in as great danger as those of the wretched +heathen whom we pitied so much, if we had not already found +salvation in Jesus Christ. “Nay, further,” he +added, “if such be your unhappy case, you are, in the sight +of God, much worse than these savages (forgive me, my young +friends, for saying so); for they have no knowledge, no light, +and do not profess to believe; while you, on the contrary, have +been brought up in the light of the blessed gospel and call +yourselves Christians. These poor savages are indeed the +enemies of our Lord; but you, if ye be not true believers, are +traitors!”</p> + +<p>I must confess that my heart condemned me while the teacher +spoke in this earnest manner, and I knew not what to reply. +Peterkin, too, did not seem to like it, and I thought would +willingly have escaped; but Jack seemed deeply impressed, and +wore an anxious expression on his naturally grave countenance, +while he assented to the teacher’s remarks and put to him +many earnest questions. Meanwhile the natives who composed +our crew, having nothing particular to do, had squatted down on +the deck and taken out their little books containing the +translated portions of the New Testament, along with hymns and +spelling-books, and were now busily engaged, some vociferating +the alphabet, others learning prayers off by heart, while a few +sang hymns,—all of them being utterly unmindful of our +presence. The teacher soon joined them, and soon afterwards +they all engaged in a prayer which was afterwards translated to +us, and proved to be a petition for the success of our +undertaking and for the conversion of the heathen.</p> + +<p>While we were thus engaged a canoe put off from shore and +several savages leaped on deck, one of whom advanced to the +teacher and informed him that Tararo could not come on board that +day, being busy with some religious ceremonies before the gods, +which could on no account be postponed. He was also engaged +with a friendly chief who was about to take his departure from +the island, and therefore begged that the teacher and his friends +would land and pay a visit to him. To this the teacher +returned answer that we would land immediately.</p> + +<p>“Now, lads,” said Jack, as we were about to step +into our little boat, “I’m not going to take any +weapons with me, and I recommend you to take none either. +We are altogether in the power of these savages, and the utmost +we could do, if they were to attack us, would be to kill a few of +them before we were ourselves overpowered. I think that our +only chance of success lies in mild measures. Don’t +you think so?”</p> + +<p>To this I assented gladly, and Peterkin replied by laying down +a huge bell-mouthed blunderbuss, and divesting himself of a pair +of enormous horse-pistols with which he had purposed to overawe +the natives! We then jumped into our boat and rowed +ashore.</p> + +<p>On reaching the beach we were received by a crowd of naked +savages, who shouted a rude welcome, and conducted us to a house +or shed where a baked pig and a variety of vegetables were +prepared for us. Having partaken of these, the teacher +begged to be conducted to the chief; but there seemed some +hesitation, and after some consultation among themselves, one of +the men stood forward and spoke to the teacher.</p> + +<p>“What says he?” inquired Jack when the savage had +concluded.</p> + +<p>“He says that the chief is just going to the temple of +his god and cannot see us yet; so we must be patient, my +friend.”</p> + +<p>“Well,” cried Jack, rising; “if he +won’t come to see me, I’ll e’en go and see +him. Besides, I have a great desire to witness their +proceedings at this temple of theirs. Will you go with me, +friend?”</p> + +<p>“I cannot,” said the teacher, shaking his head; +“I must not go to the heathen temples and witness their +inhuman rites, except for the purpose of condemning their +wickedness and folly.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” returned Jack; “then I’ll +go alone, for I cannot condemn their doings till I have seen +them.”</p> + +<p>Jack arose, and we, having determined to go also, followed him +through the banana groves to a rising ground immediately behind +the village, on the top of which stood the Buré, or +temple, under the dark shade of a group of iron-wood trees. +As we went through the village, I was again led to contrast the +rude huts and sheds, and their almost naked savage-looking +inhabitants, with the natives of the Christian village, who, to +use the teacher’s scriptural expression, were now +“clothed and in their right mind.”</p> + +<p>As we turned into a broad path leading towards the hill, we +were arrested by the shouts of an approaching multitude in the +rear. Drawing aside into the bushes we awaited their coming +up, and as they drew near we observed that it was a procession of +the natives, many of whom were dancing and gesticulating in the +most frantic manner. They had an exceedingly hideous +aspect, owing to the black, red, and yellow paints with which +their faces and naked bodies were bedaubed. In the midst of +these came a band of men carrying three or four planks, on which +were seated in rows upwards of a dozen men. I shuddered +involuntarily as I recollected the sacrifice of human victims at +the island of Emo, and turned with a look of fear to Jack as I +said,—</p> + +<p>“Oh, Jack! I have a terrible dread that they are +going to commit some of their cruel practices on these wretched +men. We had better not go to the temple. We shall +only be horrified without being able to do any good, for I fear +they are going to kill them.”</p> + +<p>Jack’s face wore an expression of deep compassion as he +said, in a low voice, “No fear, Ralph; the sufferings of +these poor fellows are over long ago.”</p> + +<p>I turned with a start as he spoke, and, glancing at the men, +who were now quite near to the spot where we stood, saw that they +were all dead. They were tied firmly with ropes in a +sitting posture on the planks, and seemed, as they bent their +sightless eye-balls and grinning mouths over the dancing crew +below, as if they were laughing in ghastly mockery at the utter +inability of their enemies to hurt them now. These, we +discovered afterwards, were the men who had been slain in the +battle of the previous day, and were now on their way to be first +presented to the gods, and then eaten. Behind these came +two men leading between them a third, whose hands were pinioned +behind his back. He walked with a firm step, and wore a +look of utter indifference on his face, as they led him along; so +that we concluded he must be a criminal who was about to receive +some slight punishment for his faults. The rear of the +procession was brought up by a shouting crowd of women and +children, with whom we mingled and followed to the temple.</p> + +<p>Here we arrived in a few minutes. The temple was a tall +circular building, open at one side. Around it were strewn +heaps of human bones and skulls. At a table inside sat the +priest, an elderly man, with a long gray beard. He was +seated on a stool, and before him lay several knives, made of +wood, bone, and splinters of bamboo, with which he performed his +office of dissecting dead bodies. Farther in lay a variety +of articles that had been dedicated to the god, and among them +were many spears and clubs. I observed among the latter +some with human teeth sticking in them, where the victims had +been clubbed in their mouths.</p> + +<p>Before this temple the bodies, which were painted with +vermilion and soot, were arranged in a sitting posture; and a +man, called a “dan-vosa” (orator), advanced, and, +laying his hands on their heads, began to chide them, apparently, +in a low bantering tone. What he said we knew not, but, as +he went on, he waxed warm, and at last shouted to them at the top +of his lungs, and finally finished by kicking the bodies over and +running away, amid the shouts and laughter of the people, who now +rushed forward. Seizing the bodies by a leg, or an arm, or +by the hair of the head, they dragged them over stumps and stones +and through sloughs, until they were exhausted. The bodies +were then brought back to the temple and dissected by the priest, +after which they were taken out to be baked.</p> + +<p>Close to the temple a large fire was kindled, in which stones +were heated red hot. When ready these were spread out on +the ground, and a thick coating of leaves strewn over them to +slack the heat. On this “lovo,” or oven, the +bodies were then placed, covered over, and left to bake.</p> + +<p>The crowd now ran, with terrible yells, towards a neighbouring +hill or mound, on which we observed the frame-work of a house +lying ready to be erected. Sick with horror, yet fascinated +by curiosity, we staggered after them mechanically, scarce +knowing where we were going or what we did, and feeling a sort of +impression that all we saw was a dreadful dream.</p> + +<p>Arrived at the place, we saw the multitude crowding round a +certain spot. We pressed forward and obtained a sight of +what they were doing. A large wooden beam or post lay on +the ground, beside the other parts of the frame-work of the +house, and close to the end of it was a hole about seven feet +deep and upwards of two feet wide. While we looked, the man +whom we had before observed with his hands pinioned, was carried +into the circle. His hands were now free, but his legs were +tightly strapped together. The post of the house was then +placed in the hole, and the man put in beside it. His head +was a good way below the surface of the hole, and his arms were +clasped round the post. Earth was now thrown in until all +was covered over and stamped down; and this, we were afterwards +told, was a <i>ceremony</i> usually performed at the dedication +of a new temple, or the erection of a chief’s house!</p> + +<p>“Come, come,” cried Jack, on beholding this +horrible tragedy, “we have seen enough, enough, far more +than enough! Let us go.”</p> + +<p>Jack’s face looked ghastly pale and haggard as we +hurried back to rejoin the teacher, and I have no doubt that he +felt terrible anxiety when he considered the number and ferocity +of the savages, and the weakness of the few arms which were ready +indeed to essay, but impotent to effect, Avatea’s +deliverance from these ruthless men.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +An unexpected discovery, and a bold, reckless defiance, with +its consequences—Plans of escape, and heroic resolves.</p> + +<p>When we returned to the shore, and related to our friend what +had passed, he was greatly distressed, and groaned in spirit; but +we had not sat long in conversation, when we were interrupted by +the arrival of Tararo on the beach, accompanied by a number of +followers bearing baskets of vegetables and fruits on their +heads.</p> + +<p>We advanced to meet him, and he expressed, through our +interpreter, much pleasure in seeing us.</p> + +<p>“And what is it that my friends wish to say to +me?” he inquired.</p> + +<p>The teacher explained that we came to beg that Avatea might be +spared.</p> + +<p>“Tell him,” said Jack, “that I consider that +I have a right to ask this of him, having not only saved the +girl’s life, but the lives of his own people also; and say +that I wish her to be allowed to follow her own wishes, and join +the Christians.”</p> + +<p>While this was being translated, the chiefs brow lowered, and +we could see plainly that our request met with no favourable +reception. He replied with considerable energy, and at some +length.</p> + +<p>“What says he?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“I regret to say that he will not listen to the +proposal. He says he has pledged his word to his friend +that the girl shall be sent to him, and a deputy is even now on +this island awaiting the fulfilment of the pledge.”</p> + +<p>Jack bit his lip in suppressed anger. “Tell +Tararo,” he exclaimed with flashing eye, “that if he +does not grant my demand, it will be worse for him. Say I +have a big gun on board my schooner that will blow his village +into the sea, if he does not give up the girl.”</p> + +<p>“Nay, my friend,” said the teacher, gently, +“I will not tell him that; we must overcome evil with +good.’”</p> + +<p>“What does my friend say?” inquired the chief, who +seemed nettled by Jack’s looks of defiance.</p> + +<p>“He is displeased,” replied the teacher.</p> + +<p>Tararo turned away with a smile of contempt, and walked +towards the men who carried the baskets of vegetables, and who +had now emptied the whole on the beach in an enormous pile.</p> + +<p>“What are they doing there?” I inquired.</p> + +<p>“I think that they are laying out a gift which they +intend to present to some one,” said the teacher.</p> + +<p>At this moment a couple of men appeared leading a young girl +between them; and, going towards the heap of fruits and +vegetables, placed her on the top of it. We started with +surprise and fear, for in the young female before us we +recognised the Samoan girl, Avatea!</p> + +<p>We stood rooted to the earth with surprise and thick coming +fears.</p> + +<p>“Oh! my dear young friend,” whispered the teacher, +in a voice of deep emotion, while he seized Jack by the arm, +“she is to be made a sacrifice even now!”</p> + +<p>“Is she?” cried Jack, with a vehement shout, +spurning the teacher aside, and dashing over two natives who +stood in his way, while he rushed towards the heap, sprang up its +side, and seized Avatea by the arm. In another moment he +dragged her down, placed her back to a large tree, and, wrenching +a war-club from the hand of a native who seemed powerless and +petrified with surprise, whirled it above his head, and yelled, +rather than shouted, while his face blazed with fury, “Come +on, the whole nation of you, an ye like it, and do your +worst!”</p> + +<p>It seemed as though the challenge had been literally accepted; +for every savage on the ground ran precipitately at Jack with +club and spear, and, doubtless, would speedily have poured out +his brave blood on the sod, had not the teacher rushed in between +them, and, raising his voice to its utmost, cried.—</p> + +<p>“Stay your hands, warriors! It is not your part to +judge in this matter. It is for Tararo, the chief, to say +whether or not the young man shall live or die.”</p> + +<p>The natives were arrested; and I know not whether it was the +gratifying acknowledgment of his superiority thus made by the +teacher, or some lingering feeling of gratitude for Jack’s +former aid in time of need, that influenced Tararo, but he +stepped forward, and, waving his hand, said to his +people,—“Desist. The young man’s life is +mine.” Then, turning to Jack, he said, “You +have forfeited your liberty and life to me. Submit +yourself, for we are more numerous than the sand upon the +shore. You are but one; why should you die?”</p> + +<p>“Villain!” exclaimed Jack, passionately, “I +may die, but, assuredly, I shall not perish alone. I will +not submit until you promise that this girl shall not be +injured.”</p> + +<p>“You are very bold,” replied the chief, haughtily, +“but very foolish. Yet I will say that Avatea shall +not be sent away, at least for three days.”</p> + +<p>“You had better accept these terms,” whispered the +teacher, entreatingly. “If you persist in this mad +defiance, you will be slain, and Avatea will be lost. Three +days are worth having.”</p> + +<p>Jack hesitated a moment, then lowered his club, and, throwing +it moodily to the ground, crossed his arms on his breast, and +hung down his head in silence.</p> + +<p>Tararo seemed pleased by his submission, and told the teacher +to say that he did not forget his former services, and, +therefore, would leave him free as to his person, but that the +schooner would be detained till he had further considered the +matter.</p> + +<p>While the teacher translated this, he approached as near to +where Avatea was standing as possible, without creating +suspicion, and whispered to her a few words in the native +language. Avatea, who, during the whole of the foregoing +scene, had stood leaning against the tree perfectly passive, and +seemingly quite uninterested in all that was going on, replied by +a single rapid glance of her dark eye, which was instantly cast +down again on the ground at her feet.</p> + +<p>Tararo now advanced, and taking the girl by the hand, led her +unresistingly away, while Jack, Peterkin, and I returned with the +teacher on board the schooner.</p> + +<p>On reaching the deck, we went down to the cabin, where Jack +threw himself, in a state of great dejection, on a couch; but the +teacher seated himself by his side, and, laying his hand upon his +shoulder, said,—</p> + +<p>“Do not give way to anger, my young friend. God +has given us three days, and we must use the means that are in +our power to free this poor girl from slavery. We must not +sit in idle disappointment, we must act”—</p> + +<p>“Act!” cried Jack, raising himself, and tossing +back his hair wildly; “it is mockery to balk of acting when +one is bound hand and foot. How can I act? I cannot +fight a whole nation of savages single-handed. Yes,” +he said, with a bitter smile, “I can fight them, but I +cannot conquer them, or save Avatea.”</p> + +<p>“Patience, my friend; your spirit is not a good one just +now. You cannot expect that blessing which alone can insure +success, unless you are more submissive. I will tell you my +plans if you will listen.”</p> + +<p>“Listen!” cried Jack, eagerly, “of course I +will, my good fellow; I did not know you had any plans. Out +with them. I only hope you will show me how I can get the +girl on board of this schooner, and I’d up anchor and away +in no time. But proceed with your plans.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled sadly: “Ah! my friend, if one fathom +of your anchor chain were to rattle, as you drew it in, a +thousand warriors would be standing on your deck. No, no, +that could not be done. Even now, your ship would be taken +from you were it not that Tararo has some feeling of gratitude +toward you. But I know Tararo well. He is a man of +falsehood, as all the unconverted savages are. The chief to +whom he has promised this girl is very powerful, and Tararo +<i>must</i> fulfil his promise. He has told you that he +would do nothing to the girl for three days; but that is because +the party who are to take her away will not be ready to start for +three days. Still, as he might have made you a prisoner +during those three days, I say that God has given them to +us.”</p> + +<p>“Well, but what do you propose to do?” said Jack, +impatiently.</p> + +<p>“My plan involves much danger, but I see no other, and I +think you have courage to brave it. It is this: There is an +island about fifty miles to the south of this, the natives of +which are Christians, and have been so for two years or more, and +the principal chief is Avatea’s lover. Once there, +Avatea would be safe. Now, I suggest that you should +abandon your schooner. Do you think that you can make so +great a sacrifice?”</p> + +<p>“Friend,” replied Jack, “when I make up my +mind to go through with a thing of importance, I can make any +sacrifice.”</p> + +<p>The teacher smiled. “Well, then, the savages could +not conceive it possible that, for the sake of a girl, you would +voluntarily lose your fine vessel; therefore as long as she lies +here they think they have you all safe: so I suggest that we get +a quantity of stores conveyed to a sequestered part of the shore, +provide a small canoe, put Avatea on board, and you three would +paddle to the Christian island.”</p> + +<p>“Bravo!” cried Peterkin, springing up and seizing +the teacher’s hand. “Missionary, you’re a +regular brick. I didn’t think you had so much in +you.”</p> + +<p>“As for me,” continued the teacher, “I will +remain on board till they discover that you are gone. Then +they will ask me where you are gone to, and I will refuse to +tell.”</p> + +<p>“And what’ll be the result of that?” +inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>“I know not. Perhaps they will kill me; +but,” he added, looking at Jack with a peculiar smile, +“I too am not afraid to die in a good cause!”</p> + +<p>“But how are we to get hold of Avatea?” inquired +Jack.</p> + +<p>“I have arranged with her to meet us at a particular +spot, to which I will guide you to-night. We shall then +arrange about it. She will easily manage to elude her +keepers, who are not very strict in watching her, thinking it +impossible that she could escape from the island. Indeed, I +am sure that such an idea will never enter their heads. +But, as I have said, you run great danger. Fifty miles in a +small canoe, on the open sea, is a great voyage to make. +You may miss the island, too, in which case there is no other in +that direction for a hundred miles or more; and if you lose your +way and fall among other heathens, you know the law of +Feejee—a cast-away who gains the shore is doomed to +die. You must count the cost, my young friend.”</p> + +<p>“I have counted it,” replied Jack. “If +Avatea consents to run the risk, most certainly I will; and so +will my comrades also. Besides,” added Jack, looking +seriously into the teacher’s face, “your +Bible,—<i>our</i> Bible, tells of ONE who delivers those +who call on Him in the time of trouble; who holds the winds in +his fists and the waters in the hollow of his hand.”</p> + +<p>We now set about active preparations for the intended voyage; +collected together such things as we should require, and laid out +on the deck provisions sufficient to maintain us for several +weeks, purposing to load the canoe with as much as she could hold +consistently with speed and safety. These we covered with a +tarpaulin, intending to convey them to the canoe only a few hours +before starting. When night spread her sable curtain over +the scene, we prepared to land; but, first, kneeling along with +the natives and the teacher, the latter implored a blessing on +our enterprise. Then we rowed quietly to the shore and +followed our sable guide, who led us by a long detour, in order +to avoid the village, to the place of rendezvous. We had +not stood more than five minutes under the gloomy shade of the +thick foliage when a dark figure glided noiselessly up to us.</p> + +<p>“Ah! here you are,” said Jack, as Avatea +approached. “Now, then, tell her what we’ve +come about, and don’t waste time.”</p> + +<p>“I understan’ leetl English,” said Avatea, +in a low voice.</p> + +<p>“Why, where did you pick up English?” exclaimed +Jack, in amazement; “you were dumb as a stone when I saw +you last.”</p> + +<p>“She has learned all she knows of it from me,” +said the teacher, “since she came to the island.”</p> + +<p>We now gave Avatea a full explanation of our plans, entering +into all the details, and concealing none of the danger, so that +she might be fully aware of the risk she ran. As we had +anticipated, she was too glad of the opportunity thus afforded +her to escape from her persecutors to think of the danger or +risk.</p> + +<p>“Then you’re willing to go with us, are +you?” said Jack.</p> + +<p>“Yis, I am willing to go.”</p> + +<p>“And you’re not afraid to trust yourself out on +the deep sea so far?”</p> + +<p>“No, I not ’fraid to go. Safe with +Christian.”</p> + +<p>After some further consultation, the teacher suggested that it +was time to return, so we bade Avatea good night, and having +appointed to meet at the cliff where the canoe lay, on the +following night, just after dark, we hastened away—we to +row on board the schooner with muffled oars—Avatea to glide +back to her prison-hut among the Mango savages.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIII.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +The flight—The pursuit—Despair and its +results—The lion bearded in his den again—Awful +danger threatened and wonderfully averted—A terrific +storm.</p> + +<p>As the time for our meditated flight drew near, we became +naturally very fearful lest our purpose should be discovered, and +we spent the whole of the following day in a state of nervous +anxiety. We resolved to go a-shore and ramble about the +village, as if to observe the habits and dwellings of the people, +as we thought that an air of affected indifference to the events +of the previous day would be more likely than any other course of +conduct to avert suspicion as to our intentions. While we +were thus occupied, the teacher remained on board with the +Christian natives, whose powerful voices reached us ever and anon +as they engaged in singing hymns or in prayer.</p> + +<p>At last the long and tedious day came to a close, the sank +into the sea, and the short-lived twilight of those regions, to +which I have already referred, ended abruptly in a dark +night. Hastily throwing a few blankets into our little +boat, we stepped into it, and, whispering farewell to the natives +in the schooner, rowed gently over the lagoon, taking care to +keep as near to the beach as possible. We rowed in the +utmost silence and with muffled oars, so that had any one +observed us at the distance of a few yards, he might have almost +taken us for a phantom-boat or a shadow on the dark water. +Not a breath of air was stirring; but fortunately the gentle +ripple of the sea upon the shore, mingled with the soft roar of +the breaker on the distant reef, effectually drowned the slight +plash that we unavoidably made in the water by the dipping of our +oars.</p> + +<p>Quarter of an hour sufficed to bring us to the over-hanging +cliff under whose black shadow our little canoe lay, with her bow +in the water ready to be launched, and most of her cargo already +stowed away. As the keel of our little boat grated on the +sand, a hand was laid upon the bow, and a dim form was seen.</p> + +<p>“Ha!” said Peterkin in a whisper, as he stepped +upon the beach, “is that you, Avatea?”</p> + +<p>“Yis, it am me,” was the reply.</p> + +<p>“All right! Now, then, gently. Help me to +shove off the canoe,” whispered Jack to the teacher; +“and Peterkin, do you shove these blankets aboard, we may +want them before long. Avatea, step into the +middle;—that’s right.”</p> + +<p>“Is all ready?” whispered the teacher.</p> + +<p>“Not quite,” replied Peterkin. “Here, +Ralph, lay hold o’ this pair of oars, and stow them away if +you can. I don’t like paddles. After +we’re safe away I’ll try to rig up rollicks for +them.”</p> + +<p>“Now, then, in with you and shove off.”</p> + +<p>One more earnest squeeze of the kind teacher’s hand, +and, with his whispered blessing yet sounding in our ears, we +shot like an arrow from the shore, sped over the still waters of +the lagoon, and paddled as swiftly as strong arms and willing +hearts could urge us over the long swell of the open sea.</p> + +<p>All that night and the whole of the following day we plied our +paddles in almost total silence and without halt, save twice to +recruit our failing energies with a mouthful of food and a +draught of water. Jack had taken the bearing of the island +just after starting, and laying a small pocket-compass before +him, kept the head of the canoe due south, for our chance of +hitting the island depended very much on the faithfulness of our +steersman in keeping our tiny bark exactly and constantly on its +proper course. Peterkin and I paddled in the bow, and +Avatea worked untiringly in the middle.</p> + +<p>As the sun’s lower limb dipped on the gilded edge of the +sea Jack ceased working, threw down his paddle, and called a +halt.</p> + +<p>“There,” he cried, heaving a deep, long-drawn +sigh, “we’ve put a considerable breadth of water +between us and these black rascals, so now we’ll have a +hearty supper and a sound sleep.”</p> + +<p>“Hear, hear,” cried Peterkin. “Nobly +spoken, Jack. Hand me a drop water, Ralph. Why, girl +what’s wrong with you? You look just like a black owl +blinking in the sunshine.”</p> + +<p>Avatea smiled. “I sleepy,” she said; and as +if to prove the truth of this, she laid her head on the edge of +the canoe and fell fast asleep.</p> + +<p>“That’s uncommon sharp practice,” said +Peterkin, with a broad grin. “Don’t you think +we should awake her to make her eat something first? or, +perhaps,” he added, with a grave, meditative look, +“perhaps we might put some food in her mouth, which is so +elegantly open at the present moment, and see if she’d +swallow it while asleep. If so, Ralph, you might come round +to the front here and feed her quietly, while Jack and I are +tucking into the victuals. It would be a monstrous economy +of time.”</p> + +<p>I could not help smiling at Peterkin’s idea, which, +indeed, when I pondered it, seemed remarkably good in theory; +nevertheless I declined to put it in practice, being fearful of +the result should the victual chance to go down the wrong +throat. But, on suggesting this to Peterkin, he +exclaimed—</p> + +<p>“Down the wrong throat, man! why, a fellow with half an +eye might see that if it went down Avatea’s throat it could +not go down the wrong throat!—unless, indeed, you have all +of a sudden become inordinately selfish, and think that all the +throats in the world are wrong ones except your own. +However, don’t talk so much, and hand me the pork before +Jack finishes it. I feel myself entitled to at least one +minute morsel.”</p> + +<p>“Peterkin, you’re a villain. A paltry little +villain,” said Jack, quietly, as he tossed the hind legs +(including the tail) of a cold roast pig to his comrade; +“and I must again express my regret that unavoidable +circumstances have thrust your society upon me, and that +necessity has compelled me to cultivate your acquaintance. +Were it not that you are incapable of walking upon the water, I +would order you, sir, out of the canoe.”</p> + +<p>“There! you’ve wakened Avatea with your long +tongue,” retorted Peterkin, with a frown, as the girl gave +vent to a deep sigh. “No,” he continued, +“it was only a snore. Perchance she dreameth of her +black Apollo. I say, Ralph, do leave just one little slice +of that yam. Between you and Jack I run a chance of being +put on short allowance, if +not—yei—a—a—ow!”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s concluding remark was a yawn of so great +energy that Jack recommended him to postpone the conclusion of +his meal till next morning,—a piece of advice which he +followed so quickly, that I was forcibly reminded of his remark, +a few minutes before, in regard to the sharp practice of +Avatea.</p> + +<p>My readers will have observed, probably, by this time, that I +am much given to meditation; they will not, therefore, be +surprised to learn that I fell into a deep reverie on the subject +of sleep, which was continued without intermission into the +night, and prolonged without interruption into the following +morning. But I cannot feel assured that I actually slept +during that time, although I am tolerably certain that I was not +awake.</p> + +<p>Thus we lay like a shadow on the still bosom of the ocean, +while the night closed in, and all around was calm, dark, and +silent.</p> + +<p>A thrilling cry of alarm from Peterkin startled us in the +morning, just as the gray dawn began to glimmer in the east.</p> + +<p>“What’s wrong?” cried Jack, starting up.</p> + +<p>Peterkin replied by pointing with a look of anxious dread +towards the horizon; and a glance sufficed to show us that one of +the largest sized war-canoes was approaching us!</p> + +<p>With a groan of mingled despair and anger Jack seized his +paddle, glanced at the compass, and, in a suppressed voice, +commanded us to “give way.”</p> + +<p>But we did not require to be urged. Already our four +paddles were glancing in the water, and the canoe bounded over +the glassy sea like a dolphin, while a shout from our pursuers +told that they had observed our motions.</p> + +<p>“I see something like land ahead,” said Jack, in a +hopeful tone. “It seems impossible that we could have +made the island yet; still, if it is so, we may reach it before +these fellows can catch us, for our canoe is light and our +muscles are fresh.”</p> + +<p>No one replied; for, to say truth, we felt that, in a long +chase, we had no chance whatever with a canoe which held nearly a +hundred warriors. Nevertheless, we resolved to do our +utmost to escape, and paddled with a degree of vigour that kept +us well in advance of our pursuers. The war-canoe was so +far behind us that it seemed but a little speck on the sea, and +the shouts, to which the crew occasionally gave vent, came +faintly towards us on the morning breeze. We therefore +hoped that we should be able to keep in advance for an hour or +two, when we might, perhaps, reach the land ahead. But this +hope was suddenly crushed by the supposed land, not long after, +rising up into the sky; thus proving itself to be a fog-bank!</p> + +<p>A bitter feeling of disappointment filled each heart, and was +expressed on each countenance, as we beheld this termination to +our hopes. But we had little time to think of regret. +Our danger was too great and imminent to permit of a +moment’s relaxation from our exertions. No hope now +animated our bosoms; but a feeling of despair, strange to say, +lent us power to work, and nerved our arms with such energy, that +it was several hours ere the savages overtook us. When we +saw that there was indeed no chance of escape, and that paddling +any longer would only serve to exhaust our strength, without +doing any good, we turned the side of our canoe towards the +approaching enemy, and laid down our paddles.</p> + +<p>Silently, and with a look of bitter determination on his face, +Jack lifted one of the light boat-oars that we had brought with +us, and, resting it on his shoulder, stood up in an attitude of +bold defiance. Peterkin took the other oar and also stood +up, but there was no anger visible on his countenance. When +not sparkling with fun, it usually wore a mild, sad expression, +which was deepened on the present occasion, as he glanced at +Avatea, who sat with her face resting in her hands upon her +knees. Without knowing very well what I intended to do, I +also arose and grasped my paddle with both hands.</p> + +<p>On came the large canoe like a war-horse of the deep, with the +foam curling from its sharp bow, and the spear-heads of the +savages glancing the beams of the rising sun. Perfect +silence was maintained on both sides, and we could hear the +hissing water, and see the frowning eyes of the warriors, as they +came rushing on. When about twenty yards distant, five or +six of the savages in the bow rose, and, laying aside their +paddles, took up their spears. Jack and Peterkin raised +their oars, while, with a feeling of madness whirling in my +brain, I grasped my paddle and prepared for the onset. But, +before any of us could strike a blow, the sharp prow of the +war-canoe struck us like a thunderbolt on the side, and hurled us +into the sea!</p> + +<p>What occurred after this I cannot tell, for I was nearly +drowned; but when I recovered from the state of insensibility +into which I had been thrown, I found myself stretched on my +back, bound hand and foot between Jack and Peterkin, in the +bottom of the large canoe.</p> + +<p>In this condition we lay the whole day, during which time the +savages only rested one hour. When night came, they rested +again for another hour, and appeared to sleep just as they +sat. But we were neither unbound nor allowed to speak to +each other during the voyage, nor was a morsel of food or a +draught of water given to us. For food, however, we cared +little; but we would have given much for a drop of water to cool +our parched lips, and we would have been glad, too, had they +loosened the cords that bound us, for they were tightly fastened +and occasioned us much pain. The air, also, was unusually +hot, so much so that I felt convinced that a storm was +brewing. This also added to our sufferings. However, +these were at length relieved by our arrival at the island from +which we had fled.</p> + +<p>While we were being led ashore, we caught a glimpse of Avatea, +who was seated in the hinder part of the canoe. She was not +fettered in any way. Our captors now drove us before them +towards the hut of Tararo, at which we speedily arrived, and +found the chief seated with an expression on his face that boded +us no good. Our friend the teacher stood beside him, with a +look of anxiety on his mild features.</p> + +<p>“How comes it,” said Tararo, turning to the +teacher, “that these youths have abused our +hospitality?”</p> + +<p>“Tell him,” replied Jack, “that we have not +abused his hospitality, for his hospitality has not been extended +to us. I came to the island to deliver Avatea, and my only +regret is that I have failed to do so. If I get another +chance, I will try to save her yet.”</p> + +<p>The teacher shook his head. “Nay, my young friend, +I had better not tell him that. It will only incense +him.”</p> + +<p>“Fear not,” replied Jack. “If you +don’t tell him that, you’ll tell him nothing, for I +won’t say anything softer.”</p> + +<p>On hearing Jack’s speech, Tararo frowned and his eye +flashed with anger.</p> + +<p>“Go,” he said, “presumptuous boy. My +debt to you is cancelled. You and your companions shall +die.”</p> + +<p>As he spoke he rose and signed to several of his attendants, +who seized Jack, and Peterkin, and me, violently by the collars, +and, dragging us from the hut of the chief, led us through the +wood to the outskirts of the village. Here they thrust us +into a species of natural cave in a cliff, and, having barricaded +the entrance, left us in total darkness.</p> + +<p>After feeling about for some time—for our legs were +unshackled, although our wrists were still bound with +thongs—we found a low ledge of rock running along one side +of the cavern. On this we seated ourselves, and for a long +time maintained unbroken silence.</p> + +<p>At last I could restrain my feelings no longer. +“Alas! dear Jack and Peterkin,” said I, “what +is to become of us? I fear that we are doomed to +die.”</p> + +<p>“I know not,” replied Jack, in a tremulous voice, +“I know not; Ralph, I regret deeply the hastiness of my +violent temper, which, I must confess, has been the chief cause +of our being brought to this sad condition. Perhaps the +teacher may do something for us. But I have little +hope.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! no,” said Peterkin, with a heavy sigh; +“I am sure he can’t help us. Tararo +doesn’t care more for him than for one of his +dogs.”</p> + +<p>“Truly,” said I, “there seems no chance of +deliverance, unless the Almighty puts forth his arm to save +us. Yet I must say that I have great hope, my comrades, for +we have come to this dark place by no fault of ours—unless +it be a fault to try to succour a woman in distress.”</p> + +<p>I was interrupted in my remarks by a noise at the entrance to +the cavern, which was caused by the removal of the +barricade. Immediately after, three men entered, and, +taking us by the collars of our coats, led us away through the +forest. As we advanced, we heard much shouting and beating +of native drums in the village, and at first we thought that our +guards were conducting us to the hut of Tararo again. But +in this we were mistaken. The beating of drums gradually +increased, and soon after we observed a procession of the natives +coming towards us. At the head of this procession we were +placed, and then we all advanced together towards the temple +where human victims were wont to be sacrificed!</p> + +<p>A thrill of horror ran through my heart as I recalled to mind +the awful scenes that I had before witnessed at that dreadful +spot. But deliverance came suddenly from a quarter whence +we little expected it. During the whole of that day there +had been an unusual degree of heat in the atmosphere, and the sky +assumed that lurid aspect which portends a thunder-storm. +Just as we were approaching the horrid temple, a growl of thunder +burst overhead and heavy drops of rain began to fall.</p> + +<p>Those who have not witnessed gales and storms in tropical +regions can form but a faint conception of the fearful hurricane +that burst upon the island of Mango at this time. Before we +reached the temple, the storm burst upon us with a deafening +roar, and the natives, who knew too well the devastation that was +to follow, fled right and left through the woods in order to save +their property, leaving us alone in the midst of the howling +storm. The trees around us bent before the blast like +willows, and we were about to flee in order to seek shelter, when +the teacher ran toward us with a knife in his hand.</p> + +<p>“Thank the Lord,” he said, cutting our bonds, +“I am in time! Now, seek the shelter of the nearest +rock.”</p> + +<p>This we did without a moment’s hesitation, for the +whistling wind burst, ever and anon, like thunder-claps among the +trees, and, tearing them from their roots, hurled them with +violence to the ground. Rain cut across the land in sheets, +and lightning played like forked serpents in the air; while, high +above the roar of the hissing tempest, the thunder crashed, and +burst, and rolled in awful majesty.</p> + +<p>In the village the scene was absolutely appalling. Roofs +were blown completely off the houses in many cases; and in +others, the houses themselves were levelled with the +ground. In the midst of this, the natives were darting to +and fro, in some instances saving their goods, but in many others +seeking to save themselves from the storm of destruction that +whirled around them. But, terrific although the tempest was +on land, it was still more tremendous on the mighty ocean. +Billows sprang, as it were, from the great deep, and while their +crests were absolutely scattered into white mist, they fell upon +the beach with a crash that seemed to shake the solid land. +But they did not end there. Each successive wave swept +higher and higher on the beach, until the ocean lashed its angry +waters among the trees and bushes, and at length, in a sheet of +white curdled foam, swept into the village and upset and carried +off, or dashed into wreck, whole rows of the native +dwellings! It was a sublime, an awful scene, calculated, in +some degree at least, to impress the mind of beholders with the +might and the majesty of God.</p> + +<p>We found shelter in a cave that night and all the next day, +during which time the storm raged in fury; but on the night +following it abated somewhat, and in the morning we went to the +village to seek for food, being so famished with hunger that we +lost all feeling of danger and all wish to escape in our desire +to satisfy the cravings of nature. But no sooner had we +obtained food than we began to wish that we had rather +endeavoured to make our escape into the mountains. This we +attempted to do soon afterwards, but the natives were now able to +look after us, and on our showing a disposition to avoid +observation and make towards the mountains, we were seized by +three warriors, who once more bound our wrists and thrust us into +our former prison.</p> + +<p>It is true Jack made a vigorous resistance, and knocked down +the first savage who seized him, with a well-directed blow of his +fist, but he was speedily overpowered by others. Thus we +were again prisoners, with the prospect of torture and a violent +death before us.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIV.</h2> + +<p class="letter"> +Imprisonment—Sinking hopes—Unexpected freedom to +more than one, and in more senses than one.</p> + +<p>For a long long month we remained in our dark and dreary +prison, during which dismal time we did not see the face of a +human being, except that of the silent savage who brought us our +daily food.</p> + +<p>There have been one or two seasons in my life during which I +have felt as if the darkness of sorrow and desolation that +crushed my inmost heart could never pass away, until death should +make me cease to feel the present was such a season.</p> + +<p>During the first part of our confinement we felt a cold chill +at our hearts every time we heard a foot-fall near the +cave—dreading lest it should prove to be that of our +executioner. But as time dragged heavily on, we ceased to +feel this alarm, and began to experience such a deep, +irrepressible longing for freedom, that we chafed and fretted in +our confinement like tigers. Then a feeling of despair came +over us, and we actually longed for the time when the savages +would take us forth to die! But these changes took place +very gradually, and were mingled sometimes with brighter +thoughts; for there were times when we sat in that dark cavern on +our ledge of rock and conversed almost pleasantly about the past, +until we well-nigh forgot the dreary present. But we seldom +ventured to touch upon the future.</p> + +<p>A few decayed leaves and boughs formed our bed; and a scanty +supply of yams and taro, brought to us once a-day, constituted +our food.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ralph, how have you slept?” said Jack, in a +listless tone, on rising one morning from his humble couch. +“Were you much disturbed by the wind last night?”</p> + +<p>“No,” said I; “I dreamed of home all night, +and I thought that my mother smiled upon me, and beckoned me to +go to her; but I could not, for I was chained.”</p> + +<p>“And I dreamed, too,” said Peterkin; “but it +was of our happy home on the Coral Island. I thought we +were swimming in the Water Garden; then the savages gave a yell, +and we were immediately in the cave at Spouting Cliff, which, +somehow or other, changed into this gloomy cavern; and I awoke to +find it true.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin’s tone was so much altered by the depressing +influence of his long imprisonment, that, had I not known it was +he who spoke, I should scarcely have recognised it, so sad was +it, and so unlike to the merry, cheerful voice we had been +accustomed to hear. I pondered this much, and thought of +the terrible decline of happiness that may come on human beings +in so short a time; how bright the sunshine in the sky at one +time, and, in a short space, how dark the overshadowing +cloud! I had no doubt that the Bible would have given me +much light and comfort on this subject, if I had possessed one, +and I once more had occasion to regret deeply having neglected to +store my memory with its consoling truths.</p> + +<p>While I meditated thus, Peterkin again broke the silence of +the cave, by saying, in a melancholy tone, “Oh, I wonder if +we shall ever see our dear island more.”</p> + +<p>His voice trembled, and, covering his face with both hands, he +bent down his head and wept. It was an unusual sight for me +to see our once joyous companion in tears, and I felt a burning +desire to comfort him; but, alas! what could I say? I could +hold out no hope; and although I essayed twice to speak, the +words refused to pass my lips. While I hesitated, Jack sat +down beside him, and whispered a few words in his ear, while +Peterkin threw himself on his friend’s breast, and rested +his head on his shoulder.</p> + +<p>Thus we sat for some time in deep silence. Soon after, +we heard footsteps at the entrance of the cave, and immediately +our jailer entered. We were so much accustomed to his +regular visits, however, that we paid little attention to him, +expecting that he would set down our meagre fare, as usual, and +depart. But, to our surprise, instead of doing so, he +advanced towards us with a knife in his hand, and, going up to +Jack, he cut the thongs that bound his wrists, then he did the +same to Peterkin and me! For fully five minutes we stood in +speechless amazement, with our freed hands hanging idly by our +sides. The first thought that rushed into my mind was, that +the time had come to put us to death; and although, as I have +said before, we actually wished for death in the strength of our +despair, now that we thought it drew really near I felt all the +natural love of life revive in my heart, mingled with a chill of +horror at the suddenness of our call.</p> + +<p>But I was mistaken. After cutting our bonds, the savage +pointed to the cave’s mouth, and we marched, almost +mechanically, into the open air. Here, to our surprise, we +found the teacher standing under a tree, with his hands clasped +before him, and the tears trickling down his dark cheeks. +On seeing Jack, who came out first, he sprang towards him, and +clasping him in his arms, exclaimed,—</p> + +<p>“Oh! my dear young friend, through the great goodness of +God you are free!”</p> + +<p>“Free!” cried Jack.</p> + +<p>“Ay, free,” repeated the teacher, shaking us +warmly by the hands again and again; “free to go and come +as you will. The Lord has unloosed the bands of the captive +and set the prisoners free. A missionary has been sent to +us, and Tararo has embraced the Christian religion! The +people are even now burning their gods of wood! Come, my +dear friends, and see the glorious sight.”</p> + +<p>We could scarcely credit our senses. So long had we been +accustomed in our cavern to dream of deliverance, that we +imagined for a moment this must surely be nothing more than +another vivid dream. Our eyes and minds were dazzled, too, +by the brilliant sunshine, which almost blinded us after our long +confinement to the gloom of our prison, so that we felt giddy +with the variety of conflicting emotions that filled our +throbbing bosoms; but as we followed the footsteps of our sable +friend, and beheld the bright foliage of the trees, and heard the +cries of the paroquets, and smelt the rich perfume of the +flowering shrubs, the truth, that we were really delivered from +prison and from death, rushed with overwhelming power into our +souls, and, with one accord, while tears sprang to our eyes, we +uttered a loud long cheer of joy.</p> + +<p>It was replied to by a shout from a number of the natives who +chanced to be near. Running towards us, they shook us by +the hand with every demonstration of kindly feeling. They +then fell behind, and, forming a sort of procession, conducted us +to the dwelling of Tararo.</p> + +<p>The scene that met our eyes here was one that I shall never +forget. On a rude bench in front of his house sat the +chief. A native stood on his left hand, who, from his +dress, seemed to be a teacher. On his right stood an +English gentleman, who, I at once and rightly concluded, was a +missionary. He was tall, thin, and apparently past forty, +with a bald forehead, and thin gray hair. The expression of +his countenance was the most winning I ever saw, and his clear +gray eye beamed with a look that was frank, fearless, loving, and +truthful. In front of the chief was an open space, in the +centre of which lay a pile of wooden idols, ready to be set on +fire; and around these were assembled thousands of natives, who +had come to join in or to witness the unusual sight. A +bright smile overspread the missionary’s face as he +advanced quickly to meet us, and he shook us warmly by the +hands.</p> + +<p>“I am overjoyed to meet you, my dear young +friends,” he said. “My friend, and your friend, +the teacher, has told me your history; and I thank our Father in +heaven, with all my heart, that he has guided me to this island, +and made me the instrument of saving you.”</p> + +<p>We thanked the missionary most heartily, and asked him in some +surprise how he had succeeded in turning the heart of Tararo in +our favour.</p> + +<p>“I will tell you that at a more convenient time,” +he answered, “meanwhile we must not forget the respect due +to the chief. He waits to receive you.”</p> + +<p>In the conversation that immediately followed between us and +Tararo, the latter said that the light of the gospel of Jesus +Christ had been sent to the island, and that to it we were +indebted for our freedom. Moreover, he told us that we were +at liberty to depart in our schooner whenever we pleased, and +that we should be supplied with as much provision as we +required. He concluded by shaking hands with us warmly, and +performing the ceremony of rubbing noses.</p> + +<p>This was indeed good news to us, and we could hardly find +words to express our gratitude to the chief and to the +missionary.</p> + +<p>“And what of Avatea?” inquired Jack.</p> + +<p>The missionary replied by pointing to a group of natives in +the midst of whom the girl stood. Beside her was a tall, +strapping fellow, whose noble mien and air of superiority bespoke +him a chief of no ordinary kind.</p> + +<p>“That youth is her lover. He came this very +morning in his war-canoe to treat with Tararo for Avatea. +He is to be married in a few days, and afterwards returns to his +island home with his bride!”</p> + +<p>“That’s capital,” said Jack, as he stepped +up to the savage and gave him a hearty shake of the hand. +“I wish you joy, my lad;—and you too, +Avatea.”</p> + +<p>As Jack spoke, Avatea’s lover took him by the hand and +led him to the spot where Tararo and the missionary stood, +surrounded by most of the chief men of the tribe. The girl +herself followed, and stood on his left hand while her lover +stood on his right, and, commanding silence, made the following +speech, which was translated by the missionary:—</p> + +<p>“Young friend, you have seen few years, but your head is +old. Your heart also is large and very brave. I and +Avatea are your debtors, and we wish, in the midst of this +assembly, to acknowledge our debt, and to say that it is one +which we can never repay. You have risked your life for one +who was known to you only for a few days. But she was a +woman in distress, and that was enough to secure to her the aid +of a Christian man. We, who live in these islands of the +sea, know that the true Christians always act thus. Their +religion is one of love and kindness. We thank God that so +many Christians have been sent here—we hope many more will +come. Remember that I and Avatea will think of you and pray +for you and your brave comrades when you are far away.”</p> + +<p>To this kind speech Jack returned a short sailor-like reply, +in which he insisted that he had only done for Avatea what he +would have done for any woman under the sun. But +Jack’s forte did not lie in speech-making, so he terminated +rather abruptly by seizing the chief’s hand and shaking it +violently, after which he made a hasty retreat.</p> + +<p>“Now, then, Ralph and Peterkin,” said Jack, as we +mingled with the crowd, “it seems to me that the object we +came here for having been satisfactorily accomplished, we have +nothing more to do but get ready for sea as fast as we can, and +hurrah for dear old England!”</p> + +<p>“That’s my idea precisely,” said Peterkin, +endeavouring to wink, but he had wept so much of late, poor +fellow, that he found it difficult; “however, I’m not +going away till I see these fellows burn their gods.”</p> + +<p>Peterkin had his wish, for, in a few minutes afterwards, fire +was put to the pile, the roaring flames ascended, and, amid the +acclamations of the assembled thousands, the false gods of Mango +were reduced to ashes!</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div class="chapter"> + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXV.</h2> + +<p>Conclusion.</p> + +<p>To part is the lot of all mankind. The world is a scene +of constant leave-taking, and the hands that grasp in cordial +greeting to-day, are doomed ere long to unite for the last time, +when the quivering lips pronounce the +word—“Farewell.” It is a sad thought, but +should we on that account exclude it from our minds? May +not a lesson worth learning be gathered in the contemplation of +it? May it not, perchance, teach us to devote our thoughts +more frequently and attentively to that land where we meet, but +part no more?</p> + +<p>How many do we part from in this world with a light +“Good-bye,” whom we never see again! Often do I +think, in my meditations on this subject, that if we realized +more fully the shortness of the fleeting intercourse that we have +in this world with many of our fellow-men, we would try more +earnestly to do them good, to give them a friendly smile, as it +were, in passing (for the longest intercourse on earth is little +more than a passing word and glance), and show that we have +sympathy with them in the short quick struggle of life, by our +kindly words and looks and action.</p> + +<p>The time soon drew near when we were to quit the islands of +the South Seas; and, strange though it may appear, we felt deep +regret at parting with the natives of the island of Mango; for, +after they embraced the Christian faith, they sought, by showing +us the utmost kindness, to compensate for the harsh treatment we +had experienced at their hands; and we felt a growing affection +for the native teachers and the missionary, and especially for +Avatea and her husband.</p> + +<p>Before leaving, we had many long and interesting conversations +with the missionary, in one of which he told us that he had been +making for the island of Raratonga when his native-built sloop +was blown out of its course, during a violent gale, and driven to +this island. At first the natives refused to listen to what +he had to say; but, after a week’s residence among them, +Tararo came to him and said that he wished to become a Christian, +and would burn his idols. He proved himself to be sincere, +for, as we have seen, he persuaded all his people to do +likewise. I use the word persuaded advisedly; for, like all +the other Feejee chiefs, Tararo was a despot and might have +commanded obedience to his wishes; but he entered so readily into +the spirit of the new faith that he perceived at once the +impropriety of using constraint in the propagation of it. +He set the example, therefore; and that example was followed by +almost every man of the tribe.</p> + +<p>During the short time that we remained at the island, +repairing our vessel and getting her ready for sea, the natives +had commenced building a large and commodious church, under the +superintendence of the missionary, and several rows of new +cottages were marked out; so that the place bid fair to become, +in a few months, as prosperous and beautiful as the Christian +village at the other end of the island.</p> + +<p>After Avatea was married, she and her husband were sent away, +loaded with presents, chiefly of an edible nature. One of +the native teachers went with them, for the purpose of visiting +still more distant islands of the sea, and spreading, if +possible, the light of the glorious gospel there.</p> + +<p>As the missionary intended to remain for several weeks longer, +in order to encourage and confirm his new converts, Jack and +Peterkin and I held a consultation in the cabin of our +schooner,—which we found just as we had left her, for +everything that had been taken out of her was restored. We +now resolved to delay our departure no longer. The desire +to see our beloved native land was strong upon us, and we could +not wait.</p> + +<p>Three natives volunteered to go with us to Tahiti, where we +thought it likely that we should be able to procure a sufficient +crew of sailors to man our vessel; so we accepted their offer +gladly.</p> + +<p>It was a bright clear morning when we hoisted the snow-white +sails of the pirate schooner and left the shores of Mango. +The missionary, and thousands of the natives, came down to bid us +God-speed, and to see us sail away. As the vessel bent +before a light fair wind, we glided quickly over the lagoon under +a cloud of canvass.</p> + +<p>Just as we passed through the channel in the reef the natives +gave us a loud cheer; and as the missionary waved his hat, while +he stood on a coral rock with his gray hairs floating in the +wind, we heard the single word “Farewell” borne +faintly over the sea.</p> + +<p>That night, as we sat on the taffrail, gazing out upon the +wide sea and up into the starry firmament, a thrill of joy, +strangely mixed with sadness, passed through our +hearts,—for we were at length “homeward bound,” +and were gradually leaving far behind us the beautiful, bright, +green, coral islands of the Pacific Ocean.</p> + +</div><!--end chapter--> + +<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE CORAL ISLAND ***</div> +<div style='text-align:left'> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will +be renamed. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright +law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, +so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United +States without permission and without paying copyright +royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part +of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ +concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, +and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following +the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use +of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for +copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very +easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation +of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project +Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may +do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected +by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark +license, especially commercial redistribution. +</div> + +<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> +<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full +Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at +www.gutenberg.org/license. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or +destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your +possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a +Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound +by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person +or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this +agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the +Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection +of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual +works in the collection are in the public domain in the United +States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the +United States and you are located in the United States, we do not +claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, +displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as +all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope +that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting +free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ +works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the +Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily +comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the +same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when +you share it without charge with others. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are +in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, +check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this +agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, +distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any +other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no +representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any +country other than the United States. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other +immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear +prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work +on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the +phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, +performed, viewed, copied or distributed: +</div> + +<blockquote> + <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> + This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most + other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions + whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms + of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online + at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you + are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws + of the country where you are located before using this eBook. + </div> +</blockquote> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is +derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not +contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the +copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in +the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are +redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project +Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply +either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or +obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ +trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any +additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms +will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works +posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the +beginning of this work. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg™ License. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including +any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access +to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format +other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official +version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website +(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense +to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means +of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain +Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the +full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +provided that: +</div> + +<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed + to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has + agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid + within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are + legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty + payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project + Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in + Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg + Literary Archive Foundation.” + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ + License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all + copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue + all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ + works. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of + any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of + receipt of the work. + </div> + + <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> + • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. + </div> +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than +are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing +from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of +the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set +forth in Section 3 below. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project +Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may +contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate +or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or +other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or +cannot be read by your equipment. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right +of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium +with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you +with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in +lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person +or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second +opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If +the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing +without further opportunities to fix the problem. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO +OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of +damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement +violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the +agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or +limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or +unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the +remaining provisions. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in +accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the +production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ +electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, +including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of +the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this +or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or +additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any +Defect you cause. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of +computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It +exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations +from people in all walks of life. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future +generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see +Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by +U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, +Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up +to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website +and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread +public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND +DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state +visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To +donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate +</div> + +<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project +Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be +freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and +distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of +volunteer support. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in +the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not +necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper +edition. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +Most people start at our website which has the main PG search +facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. +</div> + +<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> +This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. +</div> + +</div> + +</body> +</html> |